Presenter: Agi Spatz, Françoise, Desaulniers, Jacques

Les techniques d'hypnose en chirurgie dentaire.

Rémi Côté2, Françoise Spatz1.

1Hypnose médicale, Clinique dentaire, Montréal, QC, Canada; 2Hypnose clinique, hypnose-

cllinique.ca inc., Montréal, QC, Canada.

L'hypnose sera présentée en contexte d’intervention en dentisterie. Les protocoles hypnotiques

produisent un état de transe qui sera utilisé de façon à rassurer, à calmer, à relaxer et à aider les
patients à bien vivre un passage rassurant en clinique dentaire.

Deux présentateurs se relaieront pour animer cet atelier et présenter les aspects relatifs à la
psychologie de l’intervention puis, en alternance et de façon dynamique, les aspects cliniques de
la technique médicale dentaire.

L’un des coprésentateurs, psychologue et hypnothérapeute, s’intéresse aux aspects cliniques de

l’hypnose médicale et à son histoire. La coprésentatrice est docteure en chirurgie dentaire et
s’intéresse à la relation praticien-patient et notamment à la gestion du patient angoissé en
clinique dentaire.

Les présentateurs expliqueront comment l’application des techniques d’induction et de

suggestions dans le contexte de soins dentaires permet aux clients de vivre une expérience
positive en « état d’hypnose ». Nous verrons comment cette présence « rassurante et attentive »
du dentiste, permet au client de mieux vivre l’intervention dentaire.

Presenter: Aïm, Philippe

Quelle séance pour quel patient ? Apports de la stratégie orientée vers la solution pour
choisir la stratégie hypnotique.

Philippe Aïm1.
1Directeur pédagogique, Institut UTHyL, Nancy, France.

Parfois, face au patient nous ne savons pas quoi faire.

Et parfois, c'est parce que nous avons plusieurs possibilités !

Face à une difficulté présentée est-il plus indiqué de lui demander quelle en est la sensation la
forme et la couleur, la réifier ? D'en faire une métaphore hypnotique sous forme de conte? De
mettre ce problème dans une main et les solutions dans l'autre, comme Rossi? De lui faire
expériementer la ressource utile, de façon indirecte, comme dans un souvenir agréable ou plus
directe comme une projection dans le futur? De lui suggérer directement en transe de la
diminuer? Mettre beaucoup de confusion et de dissociation? Ou de présence, d'acceptation?
Quelle stratégie choisir pour mieux aider?

L'intuition diront certains, le type de problème diront d'autres... Mais pourquoi la "même"
séance, sur le "même" problème est utile aux uns et semble inutile ou inadaptée pour d'autres?

L'hypnose s'exprimant dans un contexte relationnel Il m'a paru intéressant de montrer comment
la thérapie orientée vers la solution (TOS, S. de Shazer), [3] particulièrement les dernières
modélisations du modèle de Bruges (Isebaert, Cabié) [2]pouvaient nous guider.

En effet, très tôt, la TOS nous a convaincu qu'il était plus pertinent de traiter le patient, non pas
en fonction de son problème mais en fonction de sa posture relationnelle. Cette dernière peut être
déterminée en se posant quelques questions assez simple en fin d'anamnèse.

Et surtout un entretien qui "pose les bonnes questions" [1]aidera le thérapeute à "se poser les
bonnes questions".

L'arbre décisionnel décrit par le modèle, sert théoriquement à choisir quel type de tâche
thérapeutique prescrire. Mais si nous considérons que l'hypnose est une sorte de "tâche en cours
de séance", alors avec quelques adaptations il devient beaucoup plus simple de s'orienter.

En fin d'atelier, les stagiaires sauront quelles sont les questions à se poser pour savoir où ils en
sont en fin d'anamnèse, et quel genre de séance proposer (ou ne pas proposer !) pour parler le
langage du patient et l'aider à profiter au mieux de la séance d'hypnose.

References:

1. AIM P. Ecouter, Parler, soigner. Ed Vuibert

2. Iseabaert L, Cabie MC, Alliance thérapeutique et thérapies brèves. Ed Eres.
3. De Shazer S. Au-delà des miracles. Ed Satas.

Presenter: Aïm, Philippe

Traitement intégratif du psychotraumatisme: Evaluer fonctionnellement, stratégiser

pertinemment, intégrer durablement.

Philippe Aïm1.
1Directeur pédagogique, Institut UTHyL, NANCY, France.

Comment évaluer un traumatisme? Comment cette évaluation peut mener à une intervention
stratégique en hypnose?

La gravité des faits ne dit rien sur le pronostic. La gravité des symptômes non plus. Des
symptomes plus ou moins "bruyants" peuvent parfois s'amender très vite ou au contraire perdurer
longtemps malgré les soins. Des faits plus ou moins "graves" judiciairement ne disent rien non
plus sur les capacités de résislience. Seule la voix de la victime compte.

Nous proposons un modèle dit "CRAI" [1]qui peut aider à évaluer la gravité d'un traumatisme de
façon fonctionnelle, c'est à dire qui nous mène à une intervention ou une autre et à mieux prendre
en compte les facteurs de résilience.

En partant de cela, il pourra même être question de sécuriser "en aigu" (en post-traumatique
immédiat) de façon plus pertinente ou de prévenir les difficultés traumatogènes (annonces de
diagnostic, pré-interventionnel etc.)

Par ailleurs nous proposons de diviser les symptomes du trauma en trois grands groupes "DIR"
fonctionnels, menant à des interventions spécifiques pour élaborer une stratégie simple mais
globale sur le traumatisme.

Ainsi les différents outils de l'arsenal thérapeutique (hypnose dissociative ou non, thérapie brève,
mouvements oculaires...) loin de s'opposer s'utilisent de façon complémentaire.

References:

1. AIM P. Ecouter, Parler, soigner. Ed Vuibert

Presenter: Alexander, John

Introducing a digital application of the spiegels' hypnotic induction profile.

John Alexander1.
1University Hospitals Portage Medical Center, Ravenna, OH, United States.

The HIP was developed originally by Herbert Spiegel as a means for inducing hypnosis,
measuring hypnotizability, and teaching self-hypnosis. Findings from the HIP also have
important implications for understanding personality,assessing psychopathology,and planning
treatment. Herbert and David Spiegel described the HIP in detail in their landmark text in
psychiatry, Trance and Treatment,( first released in 1978 and, as a second edition in 2004), and
have referenced it many subsequent investigations and publications.However, for many
clinicians and researchers, the HIP remains only vaguely familiar, and woefully underutilized.

One reason for this is because so few members of the hypnosis community have had sufficient
personal experience with the HIP to become familiar with it; not for lack of interest but because
mastering the test solely by studying the text alone proves to be very challenging and also
because training opportunities for learning the exam have been largely unavailable.In an effort to
make the HIP easier to learn and more accessible to a wider audience of students and parcticing
professionals, a digital application of the exam has been developed which streamlines the
administration procedures, simplifies the scoring process and includes demonstration videos to
augment the instructions for some of the more challenging items.

The purpose of this presentation is to, in lecture, slide, and video format,: (1) demonstrate the
operations of the digital application of the HIP, showing how it simplifies the administration of
individual exam items and computes and interprets summary scores; (2) describe the significance
of the three HIP summary scores, the Profile Score, Induction Score, and Profile Grade;
(3) describe the utility of each of the HIP summary scores in research and clinical applications.

References:

1. Spiegel H, and Spiegel D: Trance and Treatment: Clinical uses of Hypnosis. Arlington
Virginia, American Psychiatric Press, 2004
2. Spiegel H.The Neural Trance: A new look at hypnosis. Internal Journal of Clinical and
Experimental Hypnosis, 55,387-410, 2007
3. Spiegel, H.: The Hypnotic Induction Profile (HIP): A review of its development. Annals of the
New York Academy of Sciences, 1977.

Presenter: Alexander, Ronald

Hypnotic language of change: Resources for improving your mind, mood and happiness.

Ronald Alexander1.
1Departments of Humanities, Psychology, Medicine and Entertainment, UCLA, Los Angeles,

CA, United States.

“Anytime words alone stop you doing what is important to you - change the words” ~ Moshe
Feldankreis

This workshop is for those seeking to ignite the flame of creative change and to learn clinical
skills for mind/body/energy healing. People can learn to grow, to modify their thinking and
behavior in ways that enhance happiness and well-being. When we enter into the essence of our
true nature and heed its call, we undergo a death/rebirth of the self. We journey into the
unconscious to de-structure the ego and reemerge with a freer self and life path. This encounter
with our underworld guides us toward our inner fire for a more creative and soulful way of
living. Referred to as the Hero’s Journey, this is the ancient initiatory process of transition and
self-transformation.

Using methods and techniques from Ericksonian Hypnosis, Somatic Experiencing therapies,
creative thinking, mindfulness practices, and intensive coaching inquiry participants will be
taught how to creatively solve problems, calm the mind, regulate affect (emotion & feeling)
states, and develop trust with the unconscious. They will also explore their inner resources for
activating creativity, vitality, and a sense of body well being.

Participants will learn the following skillful methods for both personal and clinical application as
well as for coaching and business environments to bring forth shifts in ones capacity to lead,
heal, and facilitate:

• Access the resources of the core self

• Utilize the unconscious for activating internal healing resources
• Learn the distinctions in language of Speaking, Listening, Possibility, Declaration, Stand
and Transformation for creating a Shift.
• Learn skills to use language as a transformational tool for change.
• Develop the tool of “mindstrength,” the ability to calm your thoughts and emotions, even
in uncertain times.

References:

1. Dr. Jeffery Zeig - Founder and Director of the Milton H. Erickson Foundation, Phoenix,
Arizona,

Presenter: Alexander, Ronald

Practicum l theory and practice: Ericksonian hypnosis, mindfulness and somatic

experiencing therapies, an integrative mind body approach .

Ronald Alexander1.
1Departments of Humanities, Psychology, Medicine and Entertainment, UCLA, Los Angeles,

CA, United States.

Resources for healing, such as spontaneity, curiosity, trust, creativity and joy live in the somatic
core self. Accessing these resources facilitates the healing of painful affective experiences that
are often stored in the brain-mind neural pathways of somatic experience. Recent advances in the
fields of affect theory, neurobiology, neuroscience, mindfulness and mind-body healing position
the current thinking for the treatment of trauma in a new context. This new neurobiological
paradigm holds the view that trauma which is a neurobiological, brain-mind; mind-body
experience causes the activation of arousal in the sympathetic nervous system leaving the patient
in constant states of anxiety, fear, depression and pain. Advances in neurobiological thinking see
the importance of utilizing the symptoms of trauma to directly access the core underlying
affliction and with trance and mindfulness practice to re-regulate dys-regulated affective
experience from repressed (constriction) pain to opening up (expansion) a somatic healing flow
state.

For 2500 years, Buddhist meditation practices have developed what is referred to as “skillful
methods” for study and transformation of the mind-body process. These meditation and
visualization practices help to cultivate self-regulation through awareness training-developing
concentration, releasing painful affects and applying the principles of Buddhist psychology to
resolve afflictive factors of mind-body trauma.

This workshop will address brief solutions for treating trauma by utilizing Ericksonian hypnosis,
Buddhist mindfulness orientations, and somatic experiencing therapies. We will review the
clinical skills of tracking, pacing and utilization of the symptom as the pathway for accessing the
creative unconscious with trance for the rapid treatment of trauma. It will highlight Milton
Erickson’s use of storytelling, metaphor and rapid trance induction as well as the use of framing,
re-framing and de-framing for the immediate reorganization of transforming somatic-affective
experience into new healing rhythms in the body. These methods allow the body to open
healthier pathways for new somatic recoveries.

References:

1. Dr. Jeffery Zeig - Founder and Director of the Milton H. Erickson Foundation, Phoenix,
Arizona,

Presenter: Alexander, Ronald

Accessing the body’s wisdom: Transforming symptoms to healing resolutions with

Ericksonian hypnosis, mindfulness and somatic experiencing psychotherapy.

Ronald Alexander1.
1
Departments of Humanities, Psychology, Medicine and Entertainment, UCLA, Los Angeles,
CA, United States.

"Symptoms are unique forms of communication" …Milton Erickson

Milton Erickson the creator of the Ericksonian approach for mind body healing held the view
that psychosomatic symptoms were a direct gateway to the healing power of the creative
unconscious. For 2500 years, Mindfulness practices have developed what is referred to as
“skillful methods” for study and transformation of the mind-body process. These meditation and
visualization practices help to cultivate self-regulation through awareness training-developing
concentration, releasing painful affects and applying the principles of Buddhist psychology to
resolve afflictive factors of mind-body trauma.

Through the wisdom of these novel approaches to mind-body healing, one can learn to see these
symptoms as healing resolutions or psychological and spiritual learning’s for generating positive
therapeutic outcomes for unusual and difficult cases. This workshop will provide training in both
Erickson's revolutionary approach as well as leading edge skills in the fields of mindfulness and
somatic experiencing therapies for the rapid treatment of trauma, pain and other somatic
imbalances. By utilizing the mind-body method for reframing trauma, painful somatic-affective
experiences can be transformed into new healing rhythms in the body -- oftentimes with dramatic
and immediate results.

This workshop will include teaching Ericksonian hypnotic methods, somatic experiencing
therapies, mindfulness meditation training and positive psychological principles. It will be a
balance of theory and clinical demonstration.

Participants will learn:

• Framing, reframing, and de-framing old patterns and core beliefs for generating new
learning’s for creating new neural pathways for brain-mind reeducation and brain
plasticity
• Somatic styles for accessing and regulating flow state healing, Peak Performance and
Positive Psychology for promoting optimal states of creativity and wellness
• The function of pacing and leading for developing rapport and mirroring natural learning
rhythms

Presenter: Allen, Brian

The Golden Wattle Cookbook of Hypnosis - Some simple tried and tested recipes that
really work.

Brian Allen1.
1Private Practice , Brian Allen and Associates, West Perth, Australia.

Presentation Outline

1. A simple model for doing hypnosis

2. Your voice is your instrument - how to use it to best effect
3. The use of music
4. A fail safe induction
5. The affect or somatic bridge - a protocol and guidelines for its use
6. A phobia protocol
7. Healing of Memories script
8. Success Souffle - a recipe for success that serves any number of clients

Presenter: Allen, Brian

Dreams, destiny and you. Dreams : The language of the unconscious - the voice of the soul -
the enigma code of therapy.
Brian Allen1.
1Brian Allen and Associates, Brian Allen and Associates, West Perth, Australia.

Presentation outline

1. Functions that dreams fulfil

2. Life concerns inventory
3. Dream reverie
4. A formula for dream interpretation
5. 2 ways of understanding dream symbols
6. Relating the dream to your/your clients life

Presenter: Allen, Brian

Changing the word in the heart: When the word in the heart changes change becomes easy.
A unique four session hypnotic approach for the treatment of smoking alcohol and drug
addictions.

Brian Allen1.
1Private practice, Brian Allen and Associates, West Perth, Australia.

Topics covered include:

• Some current reseach findings on the effects of smoking and alcohol.

• 4 Things that improve success rates.
• Useful questions to ask in history taking.
• The role of triggers.
• 2 key intake questions.
• Denial - not just the name of the biggest river in Egypt but also the greatest cause of
death amongst smokers and drinkers - and what to do about it.
• Smoking and feelings.
• Smoking and unfinished business.
• Session protocols

Presenter: Aramideh, Jennifer

Do pediatric nurses change their communication behaviours following a training in

hypnoanalgesia?
Jennifer Aramideh1,2, David Ogez1,2, Terry Mizrahi1, Marie-Claude Charest1, Caroline Plante1,
Michel Duval1,3, Serge Sultan1,2,3.
1Department of Hematology-Oncology, CHU Sainte-Justine, Montréal, QC,

Canada; 2Department of Psychology, Université de Montréal, Montréal, QC,

Canada; 3Department of Pediatrics, Université de Montréal, Montréal, QC, Canada.

Introduction: Studies have shown the efficacy of hypnosis in decreasing patients’ pain and
procedural distress during medical procedures[1]. However, this intervention remains
underutilized[2]. To overcome this barrier, a brief training in hypnoanalgesia was offered to
pediatric oncology nurses[3]. No study has yet evaluated the effects of hypnotic techniques as
used by healthcare professionals while performing a medical procedure. The study aimed to
assess pre-post changes following a training in hypnoanalgesia in (1) nurses’ communication
behaviours during patient-provider encounters, (2) patient’s pain and procedural distress and (3)
the association of nurses' behaviour change with patient’s pain and procedural distress.

Methods: Six female nurses (33 ± 6 years) from a pediatric outpatient oncology clinic and 33 of
their cancer patients (16 boys, 17 girls, aged 10 ± 4 years) participated in this study with data
collection at 4 time-points (2 pre and 2 post-training). Nurses took part in a 4-day training which
emphasized both on theoretical and practical hypnoanalgesia components. To assess nurses’
mastery of techniques and children’s behavioural pain and distress, venipunctures were video-
recorded. Nurses communication techniques were rated using the Sainte-Justine Hypnotic
Communication Assessment Scale (SJ-HCAS)[4]. To assess children's pain and distress,
behavioural assessments (FLACC)[5] as well self-reported and reported evaluations
(VAS)[6] were used. Nurses’ motivation and satisfaction were assessed at the end of the study
using a questionnaire and an interview. Non-parametric tests were conducted on the SJ-HCAS
and on children’s pain and distress scales. A qualitative method was conducted on satisfaction
interviews’ transcripts.

Results: Results showed a significant change in hypnotic communication behaviours between

baseline and post-training scores (Median d=1.06), and a stability during the follow-up.
Children’s levels of distress and pain tended to decrease in association with nurses’
communication behaviours and their initial motivation. The interview analyses showed that the
training should focus more on nurses’ practices in an outpatient clinic as well as offer more
practical exercises.

Discussion: Nurses in pediatric oncology are faced with a lack of training in hypnotic
techniques. A brief formal training leads to an improvement in nurses’ hypnoanalgesia
techniques as well as a reduction of pain and distress in children.

References:

1. Tomé-Pires, C., & Miró, J. (2012). Hypnosis for the Management of Chronic and Cancer
Procedure-Related Pain in Children. International Journal of Clinical and Experimental
Hypnosis, 60(4), 432-457.
2. Yeh, V. M., Schnur, J. B., & Montgomery, G. H. (2014). Disseminating hypnosis to health
care settings: Applying the RE-AIM framework. Psychology of Consciousness, 1(2), 213-228.
3. Mizrahi, T., Sultan, S., Charest, M.-C., Aramideh, J., Charrette, M.-C., Streff, A., . . . Duval,
M. (2016). Training nurses in basic hypno-analgesia techniques to reduce procedural distress and
pain in children: A feasibility trial. Cogent Medicine, 3(1), 1165083.
doi:10.1080/2331205X.2016.1165083
4. Aramideh, J., Mizrahi, T., Charest, M.-C., Plante, C., Duval, M. & Sultan, S. (2017).
Development and inter-rater reliability of a tool assessing hypnotic communication behaviours
adopted by nurses caring for children with cancer: The Sainte-Justine Hypnotic Communication
Assessment Scale. Manuscript under revision.
5. Nilsson, S., Finnstrom, B., & Kokinsky, E. (2008). The FLACC behavioral scale for
procedural pain assessment in children aged 5-16 years. Pediatric Anesthesia, 18(8), 767-774.
6. Ortiz, M. I., Lopez-Zarco, M., & Arreola-Bautista, E. J. (2012). Procedural pain and anxiety in
paediatric patients in a Mexican emergency department. Journal of Advanced Nursing, 68(12),
2700-2709.

Presenter: Stefano Colombo, Ardigo, Sheila

Vous avez dit VAKOG ? Vivez-le

Stefano Colombo1, Sheila Ardigo1.

1
Enseignement, Société Médicale Suisse d'Hypnose, Genève, Switzerland.

Du plus profond des eaux du fleuve

l'énergie surgit en myriade de particules

pendant que les êtres, proches d'une épreuve,

sentent, au même moment, de la vie la bascule.

Elle caresse, de près ou de loin, les vents

qui, se faufilant entre les nuages,

amènent, sans trop le savoir, l'avant

et l'après de ce que nous appelons l'âge.

Ils plongent, ces vents, au travers de la surface

du Saint Laurent qui, espiègle, parfois déborde

de ses forces qui sont des émotions la préface

annonçant d'avec la raison leur discorde.

C'est alors que, dans le corps prenant racine,

au milieu des parcs et de la verte prairie

la vie fleurit, même au départ d'une ruine,

écrivant un livre, oh surprise, hors série.

Dans cet atelier clinique, nous allons partager l’expérience des cinq sens afin d’être davantage
dans le présent, avec soi-même et avec les autres.

Poésie, volupté, énergie et esthétique seront les lignes de la partition où se déposent les notes de
la Vie.

Presenter: Arnon, Zahi

Practical rapid inductions.

Zahi Arnon1.
1Behavioral Sciences, Psychology, Education departments , The Max Stern Yezreel Valley

College (YVC) , Yezreel Valley , Israel.

Practical Rapid inductions

Rapid inductions are very impressive, regularly used for stage hypnosis. In clinical setting we
usually use slow formal inductions, followed by deepening trance procedures. The rapid
inductions are not taught in basic hypnosis courses and thus not usually used in clinical settings.

Still sometimes we do need rapid inductions. It could be relevant for acute or crisis situations, in
cases of shortage of time, both in the clinic and in the hospital.

The standard inductions, regular and rapid, are usually verbal, based on language
communication. But in cases of psychological resistance one might need nonverbal rapid
inductions.
After 15 years of practicing hypnosis in private clinic, and 7 years in hospital setting, I collected
variety of practical rapid inductions, which will be demonstrated in the workshop.

The workshop was will include combination of verbal and nonverbal inductions, explanation,
video demonstrated, and exercised in the workshop.

Presenter: Baker, Su; O'Neil John

Hypnotic (and non-hypnotic) interventions in “Stage One” treatment of developmental

psychological trauma and dissociative disorders

Su Baker1, John A O'Neil2.

1Private practice, Montreal, QC, Canada; 2Department of Psychiatry, St. Mary's Hospital and

McGill University, Montreal, QC, Canada.

Developmental trauma is generally comprised of both trauma and neglect – trauma: bad things
happening to the child which should not happen; neglect: good things not happening to the child
which should happen – manifest as complex forms of posttraumatic symptoms and to disturbed
attachment patterns, compromising self-regulation.

Children often employ self-hypnotic or dissociative defences to cope with early trauma and
neglect, and maintain this defensive style into adulthood. Thus, hypnotic interventions are
especially appropriate for such patients.

Therapists can feel especially de-skilled when a patient, in the throes of the breakdown of
defensive barriers, begins therapy. This beginning of therapy, conventionally labelled “Stage
One,” may require years of work, and is central to the development of a trusting therapeutic
relationship. In the early phases of therapy, hypnosis aims both at transforming distorted
attachment patterns and at improving self-regulation so as to reduce overt symptoms.

This 90-minute workshop will focus on practical hypnotic (and some non-hypnotic)
interventions to help patients improve general self care (sleep, nutrition, safety, etc.), contain
flashbacks, ameliorate overwhelming emotions and sensations, develop grounding techniques,
overcome numbing, increase (or develop) internal communications among ego states, and
improve relationships. This will include the utilization of hypnotic places, e.g., special place,
work place, sleep place, and of specific techniques, e.g. ideomotor signalling.
[1][2][3]

References:
1. Daitch, C. (2007). Affect regulation toolbox: Practical and effective hypnotic interventions for
the over-reactive client. New York, NY: W.W. Norton & Co.
2. Phillips, M., & Frederick, C. (1995). Healing the divided self: Clinical and Ericksonian
hypnotherapy for post-traumatic and dissociative conditions. NY: W.W. Norton & Co.
3. Watkins, J., Watkins, H. (1997). Ego States: Theory and Therapy, New York, NY: W. W.
Norton & Co.

Presenter: Balay, Matthieu

La communication en hypnose, une histoire d'autorité.

Matthieu Balay1.
1
Département de communication, Université de Montréal, Montréal, QC, Canada.

L’histoire de l’hypnose se réfère souvent à des personnalités marquantes et prestigieuses:

Messmer, Braid, Bernheim, Erickson… L’examen de leur pratique, et particulièrement de leurs
inductions, révèle pourtant une variété hétéroclite de méthodes: le Marquis de Puységur reliait
ses patients à un arbre[1], le psychologue Georges Estabrooks reconnaît avoir utilisé un disque de
yodel[2] et Milton Erickson était réputé provoquer des transes avec une poignée de main[3].
Comment expliquer que des méthodes aussi différentes puissent induire un même état, ou tout du
moins un état du même ordre?

Au-delà des techniques utilisées, l’une des clés du succès d’une séance d’hypnose se situe
probablement dans la relation qui se crée entre hypnotiseur et hypnotisé. Si cette relation a été
étudiée par des praticiens et des psychologues, par exemple sous un angle psychanalytique [4], la
lecture qu’apportent d’autres discipline peut certainement enrichir notre compréhension de la
“séance d’hypnose”. La sociologie, l’anthropologie et les sciences de la communication offrent
un éclairage différent sur l’interaction entre hypnotiseur et hypnotisé.

L’un des premiers points à aborder est nécessairement celui du cadre, ce que Goffman appelle
également « schème interprétatif ». La façon dont celui-ci se construit et se modalise définit “la
structure de la vie sociale d’un individu” ou encore “ce qu’un acteur individuel peut abriter dans
son esprit”[5]. Plus prosaïquement, qu’est-ce qu’un individu attend d’une séance d’hypnose?
Comment ces attentes sont-elles créées, déçues ou renforcées?

L’examen des récits de séances d’hypnose du XVIIIème siècle à nos jours nous indique que
l’autorité du praticien est un facteur très important. Les sciences de la communication,
notamment les théories de la communication organisante, proposent différents modèles,
différentes réflexions en rapport avec la question de l’autorité[6][7].

Comment s’établit-elle lors d’une séance d’hypnose? Dans quel cas est-elle une circonstance
facilitatrice de la transe? Est-il possible d’envisager une hypnose sans autorité? Quelles sont les
applications concrètes de telles réflexions? Voilà les principales questions auxquelles cette
conférence tentera d’apporter des réponses.
References:

1. Michaux, D. (1991) L’émergence de la phénoménologie hypnotique au XVIIIème siècle.

Colloque de Cerisy. La suggestion, hypnose, influence, transe. Paris: Les laboratoires
Delagrange. p. 35 à 54.
2. Estabrooks, G.H. (1957) Hypnotism. New-York: E. P. Dutton & Co., inc.
3. Erickson, M. (1980) Hypnotic Investigation of Psychodynamic Processes: The Collected
Papers of Milton H. Erickson on Hypnosis. Manchester, NH: Irvington Publishers.
4. Bioy, A. (2005) La relation inter-individuelle en hypnose clinique et sa dynamique
thérapeutique. Bulletin de psychologie 2005/3 (Numéro 477). p. 391-393. DOI :
10.3917/bupsy.477.0391
5. Goffman, E. (1974) Les cadres de l'expérience (trad. 1991). Paris: Les Éditions de Minuit. p.
22
6. Benoit Barné, C., Cooren, F. (2009) The accomplishment of authority through
presentification: How authority is distributed among and negotiated by organizational members.
Management Communication Quarterly, 23, 5-31.
7. Cooren, F. (2013) Manières de faire parler: Interaction et ventriloquie, Bordeaux, France:
Bord de l'eau.

Presenter: Balcet Turban, Mary

Autohypnose et constellations familiales ericksonniennes.

Mary Balcet Turban1.

1
Rhone, Cabinet Balcet Turban, Oullins, France.

En utilisant les ressentis du corps, la physique quantique et les résonnances du champ

morphogénétique, la psychogénéalogie et notre connexion à l'univers, cet atelier permettra
d'aborder un des thèmes universels.

En entrant en contact avec nos ressources intérieures par le biais de l'hypnose, pourront alors se
manifester la relation avec nos ancêtres et notre famille, l'abandon, le manque d'amour, les
blessures de la vie, la colère, la culpabilité, l'injustice, la relation aux autres, la relation de couple,
la relation à son corps, les différents rôles de sa vie, les croyances limitantes....

Avec cette approche, nous pouvons ainsi développer les potentiels de nos patients.

Presenter: Bányai, Éva

Beneficial effects of adjuvant hypnosis on physical and psychological immunity of
intermediate and high risk breast cancer patients: results of an evidence based research.

Éva Bányai1, Edit Jakubovits2, Adrienn Vargay3, Zsolt Horváth4.

1Department of Affective Psychology, Eötvös Loránd University, Budapest,

Hungary; 2Department of Psychology, Károli Gáspár University of the Reformed Church in

Hungary, Budapest, Hungary; 3Doctoral School of Psychology, Behavioural Psychology PhD
Program, Eötvös Loránd University, Budapest, Hungary; 4National Institute of Oncology,
Budapest, Hungary.

The administration of hypnosis as a sole adjuvant therapy in cancer care and a controlled study
with a detailed analysis of its effect is still lacking. In order to fulfill the demands of evidence
based research, a prospective randomized clinical study is indispensable.

The purpose of the present research is to test the hypothesis that adjuvant hypnosis administered
during chemotherapy has positive effects on the immunological functions, on the coping capacity
(psychological immune system), on the disease-free survival, and on the quality of life of
patients diagnosed with intermediate and high risk breast cancer.

In our randomized study the effect of hypnosis is compared either with the effect of musical
assemblies or with the data of a control group without listening to hypnosis or music during
cytostatic infusions (4 AC and 12 PAC) and blood tests. The blood counts, the NK cell activity,
psychological immune competence of the patients, and the quality of life are measured before the
first AC and the first PAC treatments, at the end of the chemotherapy, then in every 12 months
for 3 years follow-up. The subjective experiences of the patients are also compared based on
content analysis of their reports. The research has been conducted since October of 2011, and the
presented results are based on the data of 150 patients.

The results show a marked beneficial effect of hypnosis on the blood tests of the patients,
especially on the flow cytometric measurements of NK cell activity. As opposed to the generally
reported decrease of NK cell activity as a consequence of chemotherapy, none of our groups
show this effect. Moreover, the NK cell activity in the hypnosis group is significantly higher
after the AC treatment than that of the other groups. This is correlated with a better goal
orientation of Ss in the hypnosis group and also with more intensive subjective experiences. The
results showing a long lasting beneficial effect of hypnosis on the quality of life are presented in
a separate paper by Józsa et al.in this congress. Data on survival, however, need much longer
follow-up period.

We can conclude that social support provided to our patients during chemotherapy served as a
defending factor against the immunosuppressive effect of chemotherapy. This beneficial effect
was stronger in the hypnosis group, proving that hypnosis is especially effective in mediating
social support.

The research was supported by the Hungarian Scientific Research Fund (OTKA K 109187)
Presenter: Giuseppe De Benedittis, Mark Jensen, Enrica Santarcangelo, Bányai, Éva

Researchers in hypnosis meet clinicians: Current issues and future directions

Giuseppe De Benedittis, Mark Jensen, Enrica Santarcangelo, Éva Bányai.

This roundtable panel discussion will present a summary and the conclusions from a day-long
research symposium held on August 22, 2018, just before the ISH 2018 World Congress on
Medical and Clinical Hypnosis. During the symposium, the world’s leading hypnosis researchers
and master clinicians will have met separately in the morning to discuss the current state-of-
science and state-of-art regarding the effects and mechanisms of hypnosis. In the afternoon, the
researchers and clinicians will have also met together to discuss how research findings can
inform more effective clinical work, and how clinical work can inform the identification of
hypotheses to be tested in research studies. In this roundtable panel discussion, Dr.
Santarcangelo will begin by summarizing the key conclusions from the morning meeting among
the researchers. Dr. Bányai will then summarize the key conclusions from the morning meeting
among the clinicians. Dr. Jensen will present a summary of the researcher-clinician discussion
that occurred in the afternoon. Finally, Dr. De Benedittis will moderate a discussion among the
panel members and audience on the conclusions, consensus statements (if any emerged), and
topics discussed during the symposium. The hope is that this discussion will yield ideas that can
support and inform future hypnosis research.

Presenter: Bass, Daniel

Using movies in Ericksonian Psychotherapy.

Daniel Bass1.
1Psychiatric Hospital, Rottweil, Germany.

Artist like screenplay writers, directors and actors have their unique way of approaching the
process of cinematically transforming “life” into frames and pictures and sounds and moods in
order to have the audience participate.

Movies are complex multisensory and multifaceted stories reflecting a specifically depicted
world and transporting messages and sometimes solutions.

In their unique way of using and combining the audience’s visual and auditory as well as verbal
and nonverbal skills, movies provide the viewer with the possibility of identifying with the
movie characters, and being at a distance at the same time.

Movie viewers get absorbed in a movie, empathize, recognize consciously or subconsciously

one’s own central topics in life. They provide the possibility of being catalysts for own
developmental processes.
This is an introductory workshop to the topic of using movies in Ericksonian psychotherapy.
Being made first and foremost for entertainment the transfer of movies into psychotherapy is an
experiential approach.

In this presentation participants will learn about the processes of watching movies and the
transfer into therapeutic processes. Various ways of eliciting therapeutic processes by using
movies will further be presented. By using two movie examples we will see how they can be
applied in therapy.

References:

1. Woltz, B., "E-Motion Picture Magic: A Movie Lover's Guide to Healing and Transformation".
Colorado: Glenbridge Publishing Ltd, 2005.
2. Solomon, Gary. "The Motion Picture Prescription". Santa Rosa, California: Aslan Publishing,
2005.

Presenter: Bigeon, Jean-Yves

L'arbre totem: Mobiliser des sensations ressouces.

Jean-Yves Bigeon1, Nathalie Bigeon1.

1Anesthesie Réanimation, Clinique du Millénaire, Montpellier, France.

French: Le mind mapping constitue un nouveau modèle de reflexion et d'analyse. Nous

souhaitons proposer notre expérience de cette technique. Elle nous a permis de conceptualiser un
outil d'hypnose optimisé pour nos patients de chirurgie bariatrique. Nous avons analysé les
problèmes spécifiques à la chirurgie bariatrique au travers du mind mapping et les ressources-
solutions qui en découlent.

Elle permet de répondre aux impératifs médicaux et facilite une alliance avec le patient. En
developpant des analogies avec un symbole de vie végétal - l'arbre totem - nous proposons au
patient de retrouver ou découvrir des sensations profondes qui le rassurent et lui permettent de
mobiliser de nouvelles ressources.

English: Mind mapping is a new model for thinking and analyzing. We wish to share our
experience in this field. We were able to create an hypnotic tool we thought would be optimal for
our bariatric patients. We analyzed the problems specific to bariatric surgery through a mind
mapping technique and we could then develop useful solutions and ressources for our patients.

This technique allows to stick to our medical requirements and facilitates the alliance with the
patient. We developped an analogy with a vegetal symbol - the totem tree - and we then could
offer our patients a way to discover or retrieve deep sensations which could be reassuring and
allowing them to mobilize new ressources
References:

1. Mind Map: dessine moi l'intelligence - Tony Buzan - EYrolle - BBC

2. Hypnose et Mind-Mapping (carte mentale) : pour une nouvelle approche globale créative du
patient, de sa thérapie - F. Garden-breche ; S. Desanneaux-Guillou
3. Hypnose et chirurgie bariatrique, présentation Congrès Hypnose Saint-Malo 2016, Dr Jean-
Yves Bigeon
4. Un accompagnement de poids pour le patient bariatrique, présentation Congrès Hypnose
Saint-Malo 2018, Dr Jean-Yves Bigeon, nathalie Bigeon

Presenter: Bigeon, Jean-Yves

Un accompagnement de poids pour le patient bariatrique.

Jean-Yves Bigeon1, Nathalie Bigeon1.

1Service Anesthésie Réanimation, Clinique du Millénaire, Montpellier, France.

French: L'obésité morbide s'accompagne de souffrances multiples. L'équipe chirurgicale

propose à tous les patients une réunion de présentation de l'hypnose, son intérêt et les ressources
qu'elle peut leur apporter. Libre aux patients de choisir une préparation hypnotique avant la
chirurgie. Les outils uitlisés seront alors communiqués à l'équipe d'anesthésie afin de permettre
au patient un lien rassurant. L'hypnose contribue à l'autonomisation et incite à être participatif.
Des techniques d'auto-hypnose sont enseignées systématiquement. Ces outils sont utiles dans un
parcours de réhabilitation précoce qui veut conférer au patient un rôle actif. L'hospitalisation et la
chirurgie sont celles du patient: il est invité à s'approprier son séjour et son traitement. Les
objectifs de l'accompagnement en hypnose : -La réduction du stress pré-opératoire - Une
meilleure gestion du post-opératoire - Une plus grande stabilité hémodynamique durant la
chirurgie - Une diminution du recours aux antalgiques post opératoires et peut-être per
opératoires - Une mise en mouvement précoce - Une projection dans leur nouvelle vie. Le patient
est invité à retrouver son thérapeute à distance de la chirurgie. Le but de ce suivi est de permettre
l'adéquation entre un nouveau corps, de nouvelles sensations et leurs représentations mentales.
Un travail est souvent indispensable pour armer ces patients fragiles face à l'image projettée et
celle que le monde leur renvoit.

English: Morbid obesity is often associated with multiple sufferings. All the patients are invited
to an hypnosis presentation meeting during which we explain the interest and the ressources
provided by hypnosis. The patients are free to follow an hypnotic training before the surgery.
The the themes and tools developped during these sessions are passed on the anaesthetic team
taking care of the patient.This will establish a reassuring thread for the patient welcome in the
theatre suite. The idea behind is to convert the patient into an active participant. training them to
practise auto-hypnosis provide even more ressources and are supposed to help them during the
fast-track process. The entire process must become the patient's property. the objectives of the
hypnotic education are: pre-op. stress suppression - A better control of the post. op recovery time
- A better haemodynamic stability - A reduction in analgesics during and after surgery - An early
mobilisation - A self projection in the future

References:

1. Hypnose et chirurgie bariatrique, Présentation - Lecture - Congrès Hypnose Saint-Malo 2016,

Dr Jean-Yves Bigeon
2. Effects of hypnosis on the relative parasympathetic tone measure by ANI
(Analgesia/Nociception Index) in healthy volunteers », Abstract 09AP04-3, Congrès
Euroanaesthesia 2017, Genève, Suisse
3. Risk of Suicide Appears to Increase After Bariatric Surgery, Junaid A. Bhatti, JAMA, Oct
2015

Presenter: Billot, Maxime

Hypnosis home care in elderly women population can relieve pain symptoms.

Maxime Billot1,2, Pauline Jaglin2, Chantal Wood3, Thierry Dantoine1,2, Achille Tchalla1,2.
1Sport Sciences Faculty, HAVAE laboratory, Limoges, France; 2Unité de Prévention, de Suivi et

d’Analyse du Vieillissement , pôle HU Personnes Âgées , Limoges, France; 3Centre de prise en

charge de la douleur chronique, pôle clinique médicale et gérontologie clinique, Limoges,
France.

Introduction: Prevalence of pain increases with aging to reach 26-86 % in 75-84 years old and
40-79 % in older than 85 years old [1]. It has been reported that pain could induce fatigue,
depression and decrease quality of life [2]. In order to avoid loss of mobility and sedentary,
special attention should be paid to limit pain side effects. Literature reported that hypnosis is a
relevant technique to decrease pain [3], notably for aging people [4]. In the current study, we
hypothesized that three sessions of hypnosis home care can induce substantial decrease of
subjective pain in elderly population. It was also expected that hypnosis diminish motor and
psychological pain interference.

Methods: Sixteen women of 81 (65-87) years old were included in the experiment. All
participants received three hypnosis home cares by a unique practionner within three months.
Participants were asked to realize auto-hypnosis sessions themselves from the first session.
Participants were asked to fill in the short form of Brief Pain Inventory questionnaire before and
after 3 months. In this questionnaire, relevant items were analysed such as (i) the worst pain felt
in the last week, (ii) pain average, (iii) interference of pain with general activity, (iv) interference
of pain with walking ability, (v) interference of pain with mood, (vi) interference of pain with
enjoyment life, (vii) interference of pain with sleep, and then (viii) the sum of all items score.
The analog scale rated from “0” (no pain or no interfere) to “10” (worst pain or completely
interfere).
Results: After three months of intervention, statistical analysis revealed a significant score
decrease for (i) the worst pain feelt in the last week (-24%, p < .001), (ii) pain average (-24%, p
< .001), (iii) interference of pain with general activity (-32%, p < .001) , (iv) interference of pain
with walking ability (-40%, p < .001) , (v) interference of pain with mood (-32%, p < .001), (vi)
interference of pain with enjoyment life (-36%, p = .002), (vii) interference of pain with sleep (-
38%, p = .054), and then (viii) the sum of all items score (-34%, p < .001).

Conclusion: Hypnosis home care intervention showed beneficial effects not only on pain
feeling, but also in the motor and psychological component. Our approached showed that older
adults can benefit from a home care hypnosis intervention to avoid early risk of sedentary and
loss of mobility.

References:

1. Helme RD, Gibson SJ. The epidemiology of pain in elderly people. Clin Geriatr Med. 2001
Aug;17(3):417-31
2. Jakobsson U, Klevsgård R, Westergren A, Hallberg IR. Old people in pain: a comparative
study. J Pain Symptom Manage. 2003 Jul;26(1):625-36.
3. Patterson DR, Jensen MP. Hypnosis and clinical pain. Psychol Bull. 2003 Jul;129(4):495-521.
Review.
4. Ardigo S, Herrmann FR, Moret V, Déramé L, Giannelli S, Gold G, Pautex S. Hypnosis can
reduce pain in hospitalized older patients: a randomized controlled study. BMC Geriatr. 2016 Jan
15;16:14. doi: 10.1186/s12877-016-0180-y.

Presenter: Bouillevaux, Isabelle

L’hypnose et les thérapies brèves en langue des signes avec les sourds : De l’enthousiasme
des débuts au retour à la réalité..

Isabelle Bouillevaux1.
1URASSM (Unité Régionale d'Accueil et de Soins pour Sourds et Malentendants), CHRU de

Nancy, Nancy, France.

Les sourds ont dans chaque pays leur histoire et leur langue, la langue des signes. Ils ont souvent
un accès aux soins difficile même dans les pays dans lesquels la législation oblige à une
accessibilité. Ils sont particulièrement sujets aux souffrances psychiques. Ils ont pourtant encore
moins accès aux soins psychiques, du fait de soins fréquemment non accessibles en langue des
signes, d’une méconnaissance des pathologies psychologiques ou psychiatriques et d’une
méconnaissance de l’offre de soins existante. Actuellement plusieurs thérapeutes expérimentent
des soins d’hypnose chez les sourds directement en langue des signes ou par l’intermédiaire d’un
interprète en langue des signes.

A partir de vidéos de séances d’hypnose de patients sourds, je vous propose de vous montrer, les
outils que j’utilise pour faire entrer les patient sourd en transe hypnotique, les similarités et les
spécificités de la transe chez les patients sourds, par rapport aux les patients entendants, et la
facilité d’utiliser certains outils de thérapie brève. A travers un exercice, vous pourrez
expérimentez une des ces techniques qui permet de développer vos capacités à réaliser de
l’hypnose non verbale (« le ballon d’Amandine »).

A partir d’une vidéo nous verrons également la possibilité de faire de l’hypnose par
l’intermédiaire d’un interprète en langue des signes et comment travailler en présence d’un
interprète en langue des signes.

Enfin, nous verrons en quoi l’utilisation de techniques et d’outils d’hypnose et l’utilisation de

certaines thérapies brèves s’avèrent complexes et nécessite un long travail d’adaptation, voir de
création.

Presenter: Bouillevaux, Isabelle; Jacques Marie Julie

Hypnose et médecine générale : De la proposition du médecin généraliste a la demande du

patient, comment travailler le mandat ?.

Isabelle Bouillevaux1, Marie Julie Jacques2.

1URASSM (Unité Régionale d'Accueil et de Soins pour Sourds et Malentendants), CHRU de

Nancy, Nancy, France; 2médecin généraliste installé, aucune, Nancy, France.

En médecine générale, le patient peut consulter de lui-même ou être adresser par un confrère,
peut être suivi depuis quelques mois ou depuis de nombreuses années. L’alliance thérapeutique
peut être nouvelle, en cours d’élaboration ou présente depuis longtemps, parfois même scellée
par un document officiel.

De fait, pour la prise en charge des patients, le médecin généraliste est en position haute, position
apprise par ailleurs tout au long de ses études. Le médecin peut proposer l’hypnose comme un
outil de soins à son patient. Arrive alors le moment de négocier un mandat et de modifier les
postures thérapeutiques. Le fait que le médecin généraliste propose lui-même au patient de faire
de l’hypnose modifie-t-il l’émergence d’une demande travaillable ? Le mandat et la posture
habituelle en médecine générale sont-elles un modificateur à l’élaboration d’un mandat
travaillable en hypnose? Comment peut-on modifier les postures et aider les patients à s’orienter
vers un mandat adapté ? La place centrale du corps dans la prise en charge des patients en
médecine générale permet-elle d’élaborer plus facilement un mandat ?

Deux médecins généralistes ayant des pratiques de premier recours pour des populations et dans
des cadres d’exercice différents vous proposent une réflexion à partir d’exemples rencontrés et
de jeux de rôle.

Presenter: Bouillon, Pierre

Schéma de préparation mentale pour athlète en trois étapes par l'hypnose.

Pierre Bouillon1.
1Naturothérapie, association RITMA, st-sauveur, QC, Canada.

Schéma de prépration mentale en trois étapes pour athlètes par l’hypnose

Il est bien convenu que la performance sportive d’un athlète se situe en grande partie au niveau
mental. Cest-à-dire dans sa capacité de concentration. Comment puiser au sein même de ses
ressources intérieurs faisant fit des irritants dans l’environnement et dans ses pensées
nocives. En tant qu’hypnothérapeute j’utilise ce formidable outil avec les athlètes avec qui je
tavaille pour maitriser les trois étapes sur le chemin qui mène vers l’état idéal pour performer.
C’est trois étapes se définissent comme suit, soit:

l'attitude, qui s’établie à l’entrainement.

l'état d'esprit, qui est le moment qui fait le pont entre l’entrainement et la compétition.

la conscience, qui s’applique lors de la performance en soit.

Presenter: Bouvier, Stéphane

Groupes d'apprentissage de l'auto-hypnose pour des patients en cancérologie.

Stéphane BOUVIER1.
1Anesthésie, Groupe Hospitalier Mutualiste, grenoble, France.

Depuis début 2017, au Groupe Hospitalier Mutualiste de Grenoble (France), les patients en
cours de chimiothérapie pour un cancer peuvent avoir accès à des ateliers qui leur permettent
d'apprendre l'autohypnose afin de pouvoir améliorer leur qualité de vie (fatigue,
anxiété,...).

Cet apprentissage s'organise par groupe de 3 à 6 patients sur un cycle de 5 à 6 séances

enregistrées.

Cette communication sera l'occasion de faire un retour d'experience sur la mise en place
de ces ateliers, les techniques utilisées,...

Et possiblement de discuter des premiers résultats d'une recherche clinique sur l'impact de cet
apprentissage sur la qualité de vie des patients.

Presenter: Brazy, Jacky

La souffrance du deuil : Une solution efficace pour obtenir une résilience rapidement.

Jacky Brazy1.
1Cabinet privé, GENEVE, Switzerland.

Le deuil a été très longuement étudié (1).

Qu’il soit normal, compliqué ou pathologique, il laisse des traces émotionnelles dans la mémoire
à l’origine d’un déséquilibre. Celui-ci va déstabiliser ou pas l’individu.

L’humain est un être de relations (2). Toute sa vie il va nouer et dénouer celles-ci au gré de sa
vie. Lorsqu’il quitte ce nœud pour partir dans une autre dimension, il laisse un vide autour de lui.
Cette situation déstabilisante pour tous s’exprimant sévèrement pour certains est souvent liée à
l’absence d’un dialogue qui n’a pas eu lieu surtout si le décès a été rapide ou inattendu. Or, celui-
ci est indispensable car il est libérateur et créateur de la résilience.

C’est par ce biais que l’hypnose est utile. Par son utilisation, en une seule séance l’avenir du
patient va se trouver bouleversé. Le travail préalable d’acceptation, de laisser partir et de choisir
la vie (3) ne permet pas à tous les individus de revivre normalement après. Il reste un «vide » à
combler. Il n’est plus nécessaire avec la méthode exposée ici.

Après recueil à l'anamnèse d'éléments pertinents qui serviront à la construction d'un « rêve »
(« rêve construit ») utilisé lors de la transe, l'hypnotiseur crée et raconte alors un film dans
lequel le sujet devient l’acteur principal où il s’exprime et se libère. Ici tout se passe dans son
inconscient et dans son corps, l’hypnotiseur n’étant qu'un spectateur « sourd ».

Ce « rêve construit » s’enregistre comme vrai dans sa mémoire et devient un souvenir « réel »
qui va permettre le travail de deuil et à la résilience de se réaliser.

C’est tellement vrai que plusieurs années après le patient est capable de le revivre entièrement
comme n’importe quel évènement réel.

C’est l’objet de l’exposé de la méthode qui va être présentée au travers de plusieurs cas
cliniques.

References:

1. Kübler-Ross, Elisabeth. On Death and Dying. 1ère edition. New York : The Macmillan
Compagny, 1969 ; Les derniers instants de la vie. Genève : Labor et Fides, 1975
2. Bioy, Antoine. Le deuil. In Hypnothérapie et hypnose médicale. p 332-336 Paris : Dunod,
2014
3. Racine, Louise. Le deuil. Accepter, laisser et choisir la vie. Montréal : Les éditions du CRAM,
2011
Presenter: Briqmane, Barbara

La maison intérieure, ou une hypnose analogique permettant de travailler la confiance en

soi.

Barbara Briqmane1.
1Centre de formation en hypnose éricksonienne et en thérapie brève, Prisme asbl, Charleroi,

Belgium.

Vous connaissez certainement le concept du portrait chinois. Si vous étiez un animal, une fleur,
un pays, une couleur, ... que choisiriez-vous. Et mieux encore, si on laissait Votre inconscient qui
sait mieux que vous, vous montrer ce qu'il choisirait... Votre psychisme est à l'image d'une
maison: un lieu, un espace de vie dans lequel chaque expérience, apprentissage, souvenir se
trouve. Notre inconscient parle avec un langage analogique, symbolique. Bien souvent, nous
restons circonspects face à certains de nos rêves, qui pourtant nous parle de nous.

En offrant des clés de symboles préétablis, l'inconscient va pouvoir nous permettre de mieux
nous comprendre et surtout de mieux communiquer avec lui et ainsi nous aider à résoudre, grâce
à nos ressources, des difficultés profondes qui parle toujours de notre lien de confiance de "nous"
à "nous", de "nous" à l'"autre", de "nous" au monde.

L'hypnose m'a appris que nous avons en nous toutes les clés pour résoudre nos difficultés et m'a
aussi appris que l'inconscient obéit toujours au conscient: Ce sont nos croyances limitantes qui
nous conditionnent en grande part, construites sur nos blessures, nos traumatismes non résolus.

L'hypnose que je me propose de démontrer parle de tout cela et ouvre sur le monde de nos
ressources inconscientes.

Presenter: Brugnoli , Maria Paola

Deep-introspective hypnosis: Taxonomy and techniques .

Maria Paola Brugnoli1.

1Research Team Neurobioethics, UNESCO Chair , Pontifical University Regina Apostolorum,

Roma, Italy.

A basic understanding of the different states and stages of hypnosis and its psychological and
neural correlates, is of major importance for all scientists and clinicians. Clinical hypnosis is a
modified state of consciousness. Our states of consciousness are not static: experiences
constantly move in and out of our awareness as our states of mind and environments change. In
recent years, the scientific study of human consciousness and hypnosis have been transformed
from a philosophic field, into a neuroscientific topic of research. At the level of brain
mechanisms, consciousness and hypnosis sciences now synthesize results from a broad range of
techniques, including electrophysiology, functional magnetic resonance imaging (fMRI),
electroencephalography (EEG), intracranial recordings and neuropsychology. The modified
states of consciousness, like clinical hypnosis, are psychophysical techniques that suppresses
conscious access to sensory events largely frame our insights, regarding the depth of unconscious
processing. Deep-introspective hypnosis is a form of self-passive-introspective concentration and
awareness of our body and mind: we look inside us introspectively. Suggested functions of the
default mode network include the support of internal mental processing detached from the
external world. The default mode network (DMN) is a network of brain regions that are active
when the individual is not focused on the outside world, but on an inner world, and the brain is
at wakeful rest. Practitioners of deep-introspective hypnosis, have long observed often healthier
dramatic emotional, cognitive, behavioral, and physiological changes, occurring during and as an
apparent consequence of deep-introspective concentration in hypnotic trance. Deep-
introspective hypnosis is the mental state of consciousness, in which the person is fully
immersed in the inner-self, by a feeling of energized focus. It can be cultivated by the practice
that includes introspection, contemplation and observation of bodily sensations, methodical
meditation and observations on inner-life experiences, like the activation of spiritual
consciousness and higher consciousness. Deep-introspective hypnosis is intended, like the
meditative states, to help individuals retrain their minds from habitually engaging in self-related
suffering (such as thinking about the past or future, or reacting to stressful stimuli) to more
present moment awareness: ‘here and now’.

References:

1. Brugnoli MP, Brugnoli A, Recchia L. A New Classification of the Modified States of

Consciousness: A peer-reviewed, referenced resource. LAP Lambert Academic Publishing,
2016. ISBN-13:978-3-659-85683-9.

Presenter: Brugnoli , Maria Paola

Laser-evoked potentials (LEPs) in chronic pain conditions during hypnotic analgesia .

Maria Paola Brugnoli1,2, Giovanna Squintani1, Angela Matinella1, Emanuela Pasin2, Alessia
Segatti1, Elisa Concon1, Enrico Polati2, Bruno Bonetti1.
1NEUROSCIENCE DEPARTMENT, UNIVERSITY OF VERONA, VERONA, Italy; 2DEP.

ANESTHESIA, INTENSIVE CARE AND PAIN THERAPY, UNIVERSITY OF VERONA,

VERONA, Italy.

Introduction / Objectives: Hypnotic analgesia represents one of the most effective

nonpharmacological methods for pain control. Hypnosis and distraction from pain might share
similar mechanisms, implying that brain responses to painful stimulation should be similarly
reduced in both situations. A large number of studies have provided evidence for the efficacy of
clinical hypnosis as a psychological intervention in the treatment either of acute or chronic pain.
However, literature data are conflicting, may show increase, reduction or no change in Event-
Related Brain Potentials amplitudes during hypnosis compared to control conditions. Here we
investigate effects of clinical hypnosis related to simply distraction during laser-evoked
potentials (LEPs) in patients with chronic painful diseases.
Methods: 10 patients with chronic pain were studied with LEPs on the dominant hand during: 1)
resting state; 2) clinical hypnosis, and 3) distraction technique. Pain induced by LEPs was
assessed with Numerical Rating Scale (NRS) and we analyzed N2/P2 complex amplitude change
during the three conditions.

Results: Patients under hypnosis showed significant N2/P2 amplitudes decrease compared to
resting state and distraction.

Conclusion: Hypnosis is a condition of modified states of consciousness, that may differ either
from mental relaxation or distraction from pain. N2/P2 amplitude reduction may depend on
different brain networks modulation, in particular frontolimbic pathways, which could modify
noxious stimuli input processing during hypnotic analgesia. Our results indicate that different
brain mechanisms might act in hypnosis and distraction during pain processing and that clinical
hypnosis is an important non-invasive therapy to relief pain.

References:

1. Giovanna Squintani , Maria Paola Brugnoli, Angela Matinella , Emanuela Pasin, Alessia
Segatti, Elisa Concon, Enrico Polati, Bruno Bonetti. Laser-evoked potentials (LEPs) in chronic
pain conditions during hypnotic analgesia, a pilot study. Ann Palliat Med. 2017 [Epub ahead of
print]

Presenter: Brugnoli , Maria Paola

The role of clinical hypnosis and self-hypnosis to relief pain and anxiety in severe chronic
diseases in palliative care. A 2-year long-term follow-up of treatment in a nonrandomized
clinical trial.

Maria Paola Brugnoli1,2, Giancarlo Pesce3, Emanuela Pasin2, Maria Francesca Basile2, Stefano
Tamburin1, Enrico Polati2.
1Dep Neuroscience, University of Verona, Verona, Italy; 2Dep. Anesthesia, Intensive Care and

Pain Therapy, University of Verona, Verona, Italy; 3Unit of Epidemiology & Medical Statistics
Dept of Diagnostic & Public Health, University of Verona, Verona, Italy.

Introduction / Objectives: The purpose of this investigation was to evaluate whether a long-
term intervention of 2 years with clinical hypnosis and self-hypnosis as an adjuvant therapy in
chronic pain and anxiety, in patients with severe chronic diseases and advanced cancer, is more
effective than pharmacological therapy alone.

Methods: We studied 2 groups of patients with severe chronic diseases who participated in a
nonrandomized clinical trial of early integration of clinical hypnosis in palliative care versus
standard pharmacological care. The study population consisted of 50 patients, 25 in the hypnosis
group and 25 in the control group. 14 men and 36 women participated in the study. Evaluations
with VAS (Visual Analog Scale) for pain and Hamilton Anxiety Rating Scale (HAM-A) for
anxiety and the evaluation of the use of opioids and analgesic medicines were conducted at
baseline and for a long-term follow-up (after 1 and 2 years).

Results: The two groups were homogeneous in the distribution of sex, age, type of diseases and
use of analgesic medicines at baseline. The patients suffered from 3 main types of severe chronic
diseases: rheumatic (n=21), neurologic (n=16) and oncologic (n=13). The VAS score at baseline
was similar in both the hypnosis group and control group (mean ± standard deviation, sd: 78 ± 16
and 77 ± 14, respectively). The average VAS value for the hypnosis group decreased from 81.9 ±
14.6 at baseline to 45.9 ± 13.8 at 1-year follow-up, to 38.9 ± 12.4 at 2-year follow-up. The
average VAS value for the control group decreased from 78.5 ± 14.8 at baseline, to 62.1 ± 15.4
at 1-year follow-up, to 57.1 ± 15.9 at 2-year follow-up. The variance analysis indicated that the
decrease in perceived pain was more significant in the hypnosis group patients than in the control
group, after 1 and 2 years' follow-up (p=0.0001). The average HAM-A Hamilton anxiety score
decreased from 32.6 at baseline to 22.9 and 17.1 respectively at 1-year and 2-year follow-up for
the hypnosis group, but it remained almost the same in the control group (29.8, 26.1, and 28.5 at
baseline, first and second year respectively). ANOVA showed that the difference between the
two groups was statistically significant (p<0.0001). Univariate analysis showed a 4-times greater
risk of increasing analgesic medicines and opioids in the control group (adj.IRR: 4.36; 95%CI:
1.59-12.0) after 2-years follow-up.

Conclusion: The patient group receiving hypnosis as an adjuvant therapy, showed a statistically
significant decrease in pain and anxiety and a significantly lower risk of increasing
pharmacological pain treatment in a long term follow-up after 1 and 2 years compared to the
control group. Clinical hypnosis can be considered an effective adjuvant therapy for pain and
anxiety control in severe chronic diseases and in palliative care.

References:

1. Brugnoli MP, Pesce G, Pasin E, Basile MF, Tamburin S, Polati E. The role of clinical
hypnosis and self-hypnosis to relief pain and anxiety in severe chronic diseases in palliative care.
A 2-year long-term follow-up of treatment in a nonrandomized clinical trial. Ann Palliat Med.
2017 [Epub ahead of print]

Presenter: Caillier, Marie

Apprentissage de l'hypnose et régulation émotionnelle: Une intervention pilote de groupe

au début de la période de rémission dans le cadre du cancer du sein.

Isabelle Merckaert1,2, Marie Caillier3, Florence Lewis2, France Delevallez2, Jean-Louis

Slachmuylder3, Darius Razavi1,2.
1Unité de Recherche en Psychosomatique et Psycho-oncologie, Université Libre de Bruxelles,

Brussels, Belgium; 2Clinique de Psycho-oncologie, Centre de Psycho-oncologie, Brussels,

Belgium; 3Centre de Psycho-oncologie, Brussels, Belgium.
Objectif: L’après-traitement d’un cancer du sein est une période où de nombreuses femmes se
trouvent confrontées à des difficultés de régulation émotionnelle. L’objectif de cette étude pilote
était de comparer les bénéfices en termes de régulation émotionnelle de deux interventions de
groupe destinées à des femmes ayant été traitées pour un cancer du sein. L’étude a comparé une
intervention de groupe de 8 séances combinant régulation émotionnelle, exposition à la peur de
la récidive et apprentissage de l’auto-hypnose à une intervention de groupe de 15 séances
combinant psycho-éducation, apprentissage de stratégies de coping et apprentissage de l’auto-
hypnose [1].

Méthode: Quatorze patientes expérimentant un niveau de détresse émotionnelle modéré à élevé

ont été rencontrées à la fin de leur traitement de radiothérapie et ont participé à l’intervention de
groupe de 8 séances (4 à 5 participantes/groupe). Les patientes ont été appariées selon leur score
total à l’HADS et leur âge à 14 patientes qui avaient participé précédemment à l’intervention de
groupe de 15 séances [1]. Avant et après l’intervention de groupe, la régulation émotionnelle des
patientes était évaluée à travers une tâche dynamique de régulation émotionnelle incluant une
alternance entre des exercices de relaxation et des phases d’exposition à des questions liées au
cancer (via la complétion de questionnaires). Les bénéfices des interventions ont été mesurés au
niveau de la détresse émotionnelle (HADS), des niveaux d’anxiété, de sérénité et d’optimisme
expérimentés habituellement par ces patientes ainsi qu’au niveau de leur peur de la récidive
(IPRC).

Résultats: Des analyses de variances multivariées (MANOVA) ont montré des améliorations
statistiquement significatives en ce qui concerne les niveaux de sérénité et d’anxiété quotidienne
chez ces patientes suite aux deux interventions. Leurs scores de sévérité, de détresse et totaux de
la peur de la récidive étaient également moindre. Les tests de Wilcoxon ont montré une
amélioration des niveaux d’anxiété, d’optimisme et de sérénité à différents moments de la tâche
de régulation émotionnelle mais seulement suite à l’intervention de groupe de 8 séances.

Conclusions: L’intervention de groupe de 8 séances semble aussi efficace que l’intervention de

groupe de 15 séances pour améliorer les niveaux d’anxiété et de peur de la récidive des patientes.
De prochaines études devraient évaluer la combinaison optimale des composants thérapeutiques
nécessaires à une meilleure régulation émotionnelles des femmes atteintes d’un cancer du sein
durant la phase d’après-traitement.

References:

1. Merckaert, I., Lewis, F., Delevallez, F., Herman, S., Caillier, M., Delvaux, N., ... & Scalliet, P.
(2017). Improving anxiety regulation in patients with breast cancer at the beginning of the
survivorship period: a randomized clinical trial comparing the benefits of single‐component and
multiple‐component group interventions. Psycho‐oncology, 26(8), 1147-1154.

Presenter: Cané, Liliana

Enhancing hypnosis with mindfulness, metaphor and Ericksonian relational strategies .

Liliana Cané1.
1Milton H. Erickson Institute of Montreal, Montreal, QC, Canada.

Mindfulness is a clinical strategy appropriated from eastern meditative tradition, that has proven
useful in the treatment of diverse pathologies. It implies procedures that trigger altered states of
consciousness that are both similar and distinct from the hypnotic trance. In this workshop, we
will explore these distinctions in the context of enhancing hypnosis for the treatment of
pathologies like anxiety, depression, post-traumatic stress and pain.

Metaphor has been integrated into the practice of hypnosis since Milton H. Erickson first utilized
it to capture the subject’s attention, fascinate it and dissolve resistances to the trance induction
and the therapeutic suggestions. Metaphors can be used to accompany the clients and enhance
their feeling of being understood in a subtle yet profound manner. An exercise will be proposed
to participants that will make them understand how to identify metaphors that are important for
the client, and how to use them to enhance the therapeutic relationship. The Power of
Ericksonian relational strategies of communications, specifically aimed at enhancing the quality
of relationship, concentrating the attention, interrupt resistances and rapidly creating a climate of
collaboration and trust will be presented.

Interweaving the principles and strategies of mindfulness, metaphor and strategic relational
communication, we will discuss clinical vignettes. A practical group demonstration of how to
lead a mindfulness/hypnotic session will help participants understand the role of the therapist in
enhancing client engagement in this therapeutic intervention. We will finally discuss the effect
of a well-orchestrated hypnotic session adjusted to the needs and characteristics of the patient.

This presentation will be given simultaneously in English and in French.

Presenter: Capek, Michael

How do clinicians think? Do we need a new paradigm?

Michael Capek1,2.
1Northern Moor Medical Practice, Manchester, United Kingdom; 2Primary Care Mental Heath,

Greater Manchester Mental Health Foundation Trust, Manchester, United Kingdom.

Consultations can be, and may be ought to be classified into 4 types. These are:

1. Low Physical-Low psychological (Health promotion)

2. High Physical-Low Psychological (Physical health problem)
3. Low Physical-High Psychological (Mental health problem)
4. High Physical-High Psychological (Psychosomatic problem)
Each type of consultation requires its own different way of thinking and approach to be able to
successfully manage the clinical situation. These will be described.

Presenter: Capek, Michael

Medically unexplained symptoms: The essentials for good management.

Michael Capek1,2.
1Northern Moor Medical Practice, Manchester, United Kingdom; 2Primary Care Mental Heath,

Greater Manchester Mental Health Foundation Trust, Manchester, United Kingdom.

Topics to be covered:

• Consultation classification into Health promotion, Physical health, Mental health

and Psychosomatic problem, and why these are important
• How mind and body can interact
• The psychological basis for psychosomatic conditions
• The physical manifestations of psychosomatic conditions[1]
• How to prevent physical investigation reinforcing the psychosomatic nature of the
condition.
• Moving the patient with a psychologically based physical symptom into acceptance of its
psychological nature (exercise)
• Hypnotic management of psychosomatic disorders (demonstration)

References:

1. Capek MEY Medically Unexplained Symptoms in The Handbook of Contemporary Clinical

Hypnosis Eds Brann L Owens J Williamson A; 229-245 Wiley, Chichester. 2012

Presenter: Capek, Michael

Self forgiveness.

Michael Capek1,2.
1Northern Moor Medical Practice, Manchester, United Kingdom; 2Primary Care Mental Heath,

Greater Manchester Mental Health Foundation Trust, Manchester, United Kingdom.

Humans are continua that extend from birth to death. We may only normally experience the
present but we are connected to the past by our memories and to the future by our hopes and
aspirations. We are born innocent. But life inevitably induces guilt, our own sense of self
induced trauma and without forgiving ourselves we feel that guilt in the present and we carry it
with us into the future. Current clinical practice is dominated by the problems of the present with
its emphasis on diagnosis and curing. But curing is not healing. Healing implies a trauma, a scar,
or a wound that is present over time but is resolved as though it had never been there at all. But
how do we heal? How do we forgive ourselves? By reverting to the innocent newborn child.

Presenter: Carlson, Torie

Changing hospital culture: Training program in medical hypnosis for paediatric staff.

Torie Carlson1,2, Leora Kuttner3,4, Kendra MacLeod5, Brooke Fletcher5.

1
Vi Riddell Children's Pain and Rehabilitation Centre, Alberta Children's Hospital, Calgary, AB,
Canada; 2Anaesthesia, Cumming School of Medicine, University of Calgary, Calgary, AB,
Canada; 3Pediatrics, University of British Columbia, Vancouver, BC, Canada; 4BC Children's
Hospital, Vancouver, BC, Canada; 5Alberta Children's Hospital, Calgary, AB, Canada.

Pain and distress need not be synonymous with hospital care. Needle procedures or recovery
from surgery or burns can be better managed. Hypnosis in medical settings is well-recognized
for providing quick and cost-effective treatment, particularly for acute and recurrent pain. It’s
significantly effective with children and teens, as it uses imagination and focused attention to
create rapid physiological, emotional and cognitive changes. Combined with pharmacological
and physical therapies it is highly effective with chronic pain and other common paediatric
problems, including anxiety. Research shows that children’s memories of painful experiences
can have long-term consequences for later pain experiences and acceptance of future health
care[1]. It’s imperative that paediatric providers minimize a child’s pain and discomfort.

In 2015, Alberta Children’s Hospital in Calgary Alberta, developed a four-phased intervention to

shift the hospital culture to reduce unnecessary suffering and address pain, distress and anxiety
more effectively, using skilled communication. Phase 1 provided an in-depth 1-day
communication workshop using hypnotically effective language for 75 clinician leaders to create
a base to carry this momentum through the hospital. Phase 2, a group of 30 key inter-professional
practitioners completed 6 days of training in paediatric hypnosis for pain and distress
management over a one-year period, which included supervised group practice. Phase 3, a two-
hour workshop was provided for local parents and online focusing on their pain/distress
communication and involvement in medical interactions. Phase 4, a second group of 32 inter-
professional practitioners was provided with the 6 days of training over 4 months including
weekly supervised group practice. An internationally recognized expert in paediatric hypnosis
provided the 4 phases of training with 3 onsite co-facilitators. Quantitative and qualitative results
of this effective 2-year hospital program will be discussed including how clinicians properly
trained in hypnosis find it to be a highly satisfying therapeutic option.

References:

1. von Baeyer, C. L., Marche, T. A., Rocha, E. M., & Salmon, K. (2004). Children’s memory for
pain: Overview and implications for practice. Journal of Pain, 5(5), 241-249.

Presenter: Carolusson, Susanna

Ego state therapy demonstration, theory and reflections.

Susanna Carolusson1,2.
1Carolusson & Carolusson AB, Göteborg, Sweden; 2 Swedish Society of Clinical Hypnosis,

Göteborg, Sweden.

Practise and theory; two sides of the art, left and right hemisphere in mutual development. If
you fancy developing your competence by experience and by watching demonstrations, this is
for you. My EST demonstrations will be discussed and explained from an integrative
nondogmatic perspective. In this workshop you will have the opportunity to ask, discuss and
hypothesize in a way that helps you intergrate the demonstrated ego state work with your
personal previous competence and theories and reach the learning objectives in your own way.

Presenter: Casali, Jacqueline

Hypnose Mode Actif Free : explorer et développer les mouvements spontanés en transe
hypnotique.

Jacqueline CASALI1.
1Physiothérapie, Institut de Formation en Kinésithérapie Marseille, MARSEILLE, France,

Metropolitan.

Un double renversement conceptuel vis-à-vis de la maladie dans nos sociétés s’est produit. Le
premier a mis la personne au centre du soin en faisant la proposition de passer de « se faire
soigner » à « se soigner » ; le deuxième porté par la salutogenèse propose de passer de « se
soigner » à « prendre soin de soi » ce qui dans cette écologie humaine rend le sujet encore plus
acteur. Il ne s’agit plus d’être dans une posture de défense vis-à-vis de la maladie mais dans une
posture de construction, de maintien de la santé.

L’hypnose médicale, particulièrement dans sa proposition thérapeutique d’utiliser les ressources

propres de la personne pour initier les changements par elle-même mis en œuvre est dans cette
même dynamique. L’hypnose outil de la psyché, produit chez le sujet des gestes essentiellement
mentaux. Développée par des professionnels de la psyché, elle propose implicitement
l’immobilité physique. Nou snous sommes interroger : Quels outils thérapeutiques de type actif
peuvent être déployés dans la pratique clinique de l’hypnose ? Ce questionnement augmenté par
notre expérience clinique nous a portée à conjecturer que : l’utilisation du mouvement en
hypnose est d’une part facilitatrice de transe, d’autre part vecteur de changement. La
proprioception, sens du mouvement, peut être exploitée, développée en hypnose médicale. Les
mouvements physiques sont utilisables comme supports d’accès, d’approfondissement de la
transe, et également comme process favorisant les changements.

L’atelier proposé est centré sur la pratique d’une séance d’hypnose en groupe sur le « mode actif
free » pendant une séance formelle d’hypnose, les mouvements induits par la transe sont
amplifiés par des suggestions utilisant des verbes d’action, et de façon originale se sont les
mouvements spontanés des personnes qui sont valorisés et non des mouvements codifiés par une
procedure, le thérapeute ou imposés par une machine.

Les contraintes environnementales, sociales, professionnelles particulières dans lesquelles sont

les personnes avec qui nous travaillons, nous ont invitées à proposer d’autres façons de faire de
l’auto-hypnose, leur donnant matière à agir dans les « espace-temps mous » où l’on subit le
quotidien.

Les bases théoriques sur lesquelles s’appuis cette façon d’être en hypnose seront exposées dans
une troisième partie de l’atelier.

References:

1. Alarcón A., Capafons A., Bayot A., Cardeña E. (1999), “ Preference between Two Methods of
Active-Alert Hypnosis: Not All Techniques are Created Equal.” American Journal of Clinical
Hypnosis Volume 41, 1999 - Pages 269-276 | Published online: 21 Sep 2011
https://doi.org/10.1080/00029157.1999.10404218
2. Banyai, E. I., & Hilgard, E. (1976). “A comparison of active-alert hypnotic induction with
traditional relaxation induction.” Journal of Abnormal Psychology,85, 218–224.
doi:10.1037/0021-843X.85.2.218, [Crossref], [PubMed], [Web of Science ®], [Google Scholar]
3. Bois D., Berger E., 1995. “Le fondamental en mouvement.” Baret-le-bas (France) : Le Souffle
d’Or. 165 p.
4. Eads B., Walk D M., 2015. “Alert Hypnotic Inductions: Use in Treating Combat Post-
Traumatic Stress Disorder” American Journal of Clinical Hypnosis Volume 58, Pages 159-170 |
Published online: 11 Aug 2015, https://doi.org/10.1080/00029157.2014.979276
5. Capafons A., Mendoza M.E., (2011) “Hypnose éveillée : une introduction au modèle de
valencia” traduit par Blanquine J., journal de psihoterapie, volume 4 numarul 1,
6. Capafons, A. (2004). “Clinical applications of ‘waking’ hypnosis from a cognitive-
behavioural perspective: From efficacy to efficiency.” Contemporary Hypnosis,21, 187–201.
doi:10.1002/ch.306, [Crossref],[Google Scholar]
7. Casali J., (2015) « Mouvements corporels et hypnose : une synergie », Mémoire entrant dans
le cadre de l'obtention du Diplôme d’Université D’Hypnose Médicale et formation à la pratique
de l’hypnose thérapeutique sous la direction du Pr Marc Raucoules-Aimé, Faculté de Médecine
de Nice Université Nice-Sophia Antipolis, 64p.
8. Wark D M., (2006), « Alert Hypnosis: A Review and Case Report ». American Journal of
Clinical Hypnosis Volume 48, Pages 291-300 | Published online: 21 Sep 2011,
https://doi.org/10.1080/00029157.2006.10401536
9. Iglesias, A., & Iglesias, A. (2005). “Awake-alert hypnosis in the treatment of panic disorder: A
case report.” American Journal of Clinical Hypnosis,47, 249–257.
doi:10.1080/00029157.2005.10403639,[Taylor & Francis Online], [Web of Science ®], [Google
Scholar]
10. Ribaud.C., (April 13, 2016) « Was invited to talk about and demonstrate the active-alert
hypnosis by the association ‘Objectif Hypnose’». Blog-Artikel Objectif Hypnose.
http://objectifhypnose.com/active-alerte-hypnose-utilisation-du-mouvement/ consulté le
28/12/2017 à 13h 36.
11. Roll J-P., 2003. « Physiologie de la kinesthèse La proprioception musculaire : sixième sens
ou sens premier ? » Intellectica, 36, 49–66.
12. Roy, M. O’Neill, M., 2012. « La salutogenèse : Petit guide pour promouvoir la santé ».
Presse de l’université de Laval. 140 p.

Presenter: Cava, José

Hypnosis and chronic pain: How to enhance the efficacy of hypnosis in chronic pain
treatment.

José Cava1.
1Codirector, Institute Erickson Madrid, Madrid, Spain.

Acute pain is different from chronic pain, as recent research shows. There are changes in the
brain caused by the persistence of pain that permanently modify various areas of the brain. The
duration of chronic pain and the changes in the daily life of the person and the frequent feelings
of helplessness and hopelessness, have a profound impact in the person´s emotions, beliefs,
expectancies and, in general, the person´s quality of life. Chronic pain does not respond well to
typical acute pain treatments and should be approached differently, with a more global and
integrated approach.

Hypnosis has been largely evaluated in the setting of chronic pain, with positive results, in
reducing daily pain intensity and suffering, and improving the person´s quality of life, as
controlled trials published over the past two decades confirm. Hypnosis can also enhance the
efficacy of other treatments, such as cognitive behavior therapy. However, response to hypnosis
treatments varies largely between individuals. Considering certain aspects as how to manage
patient expectations properly and ethically, or how to tailor hypnotic procedures to each case can
have a major impact in the final outcome.

In this workshop participants will learn different strategies and techniques that can be used that
can greatly enhance their efficacy in treating chronic pain patients. It will have a very practical
orientation, with exercises and demos.
Presenter: Chantrain, Christophe; Marini, Jennifer

Groupes de formation à l’autohypnose pour accompagner les enfants atteints d’un cancer
et leurs parents.

Jennifer Marini1, Charlotte Grégoire2, Marie-Elisabeth Faymonville3, Isabelle

Bragard2, Christophe Chantrain1.
1Pediatric Hematology Oncology, CHC-Espérance, Liège, Belgium; 2Health Psychology,

University of Liège, Liège, Belgium; 3Algology-Palliative Care , CHU Liège, Liège, Belgium.

Les progrès médicaux récents permettent de guérir la majorité des enfants atteints d’un cancer.
La maladie et son traitement restent toutefois une épreuve longue et difficile. Une approche
holistique à l’écoute des plaintes somatiques mais aussi des difficultés émotionnelles est
essentielle pour permettre à chacun de continuer à vivre et à s’épanouir. Depuis 2013, notre
service d’oncologie pédiatrique utilise l’hypnose dans différentes situations (douleur, anxiété,
vomissements, …). Récemment, nous avons mis en place une formation à l’autohypnose dédiée
conjointement aux enfants et à leurs parents.

Objectifs :

- Apprendre l’autohypnose et renforcer l’utilisation des outils hypnotiques à l’hôpital et à

domicile

- Favoriser la dynamique de groupe pour stimuler les échanges entre les participants et avec les
soignants

- Donner un répit à chacun et valider l’importance de prendre soin de soi

Méthodologie : 6 sessions mensuelles de 2x2h sont organisées pour les enfants suivis de leurs
parents. Différents thèmes (hypnose, stress, sommeil, confiance en soi, …) sont abordés dans les
2 groupes avec des exercices adaptés en fonction de l’âge. L’évaluation de la formation est basée
sur le vécu des participants et sur plusieurs échelles de qualité de vie mesurées avant et après la
formation.

Résultats : Neuf enfants âgés de 12 à 18 ans et 12 parents de ces enfants ont participés. La
fréquentation moyenne des groupes « enfants » et « parents » fut respectivement de 75% et 70%.
A partir de la 3ième session, deux enfants n’ont plus pu participer : l’un étant décédé, l’autre
étant en intensification de traitement pour rechute. En fin de formation, les enfants indiquent
qu’ils ont appris des stratégies utiles pour gérer leurs émotions, pour se respecter d’avantage et
être plus affirmés. Les parents soulignent les bienfaits des échanges entre parents confrontés à
différentes étapes de la maladie. Ils ont utilisés les exercices d’hypnose assez régulièrement,
seuls ou avec leur enfant.
Conclusion : Cette expérience pilote démontre la faisabilité et les effets positifs d’un
apprentissage de l’autohypnose pour les patients et les familles. L’approche conjointe entre
enfants et parents valide l’importance d’un moment de ressourcement pour chacun. Les
bénéfices à court et à long terme doivent être analysés plus en détails et à plus grande
échelle. Nous planifions de répéter la formation et de l’étendre aux fratries des enfants malades.

Presenter: Clediere, Jacqueline

"Learning to love yourself better" or "The extraordinary treasure-chest".

Jacqueline Clediere1.
1Emergences, Rennes, France.

During the first session of a therapy, frequently enough, patients tell me : « I don’t like myself ».
These patients are often longing for an « ideal love »: the kind of love that can be only given by
themselves.

Exercise: Demonstration

Inspired by Térésa Robles’ work, Ernest Rossi’s (the two hands as a symbolic representation of
« the integration of opposites» and Franck Garden-Breche’s Synchronicities, I offer to my
patients to experiment a technique (and we will practice it in this workshop) through hypnosis
based on two principles :

• 1st principle : Duality (which inhabits within us as well as nature).

• 2nd principle : Nature hates the void/emptiness (principle regularly reminded by Claude
Virot in his training sessions)

Goals:

• To learn to get rid of what hurts (behaviors, beliefs, « inheritences », fears…)

• And to use all this « free space », this « void/emptiness » available to settle instead « self-
respect », « love for oneself », the desire to take care of oneself, to make oneself feel
good, to « welcome» oneself.
• To fix a growing process (with a full respect for each other’s pace/rythm)
• To use a tool of self-hypnosis (as often as necessary)
• To experiment the movement, the cyclic flow, in its physical perspective, emotions and
sensations going with them.

Key words:

-Therapeutic Alliance ; Anxiety ; Depression ; Cancer ; Pace/Rythm ; Welcoming ; Process ;

Systemic Approach ; Empathy ; Selfcare ; Body-Mind Focusing ; Idealisation.
Presenter: Coldoff, Judy

Utilizing hypnosis to enhance traditional medical or psychological techniques: How to

empower your clinical practice.

Judy Coldoff1,2,3,4.
1College of Psychologists, Province of Ontario, Toronto, ON, Canada; 2 Approved Consultant,

American Society of Clinical Hypnosis, Chicago, IL, United States; 3Member, Ontario
Psychological Association, Toronto, ON, Canada; 4Past President and Fellow, Canadian
Federation of Clinical Hypnosis, Red Deer, ON, Canada.

This workshop is a simple, innovative way of integrating hypnosis treatment into an already
existing psychological or medical practice by:

a) utilizing the properties of the trance state, in combination with

b) the academic training and skills of a psychologist or physician, (or other licensed health
professional), to

c) make treatment decisions about how to apply these properties in the hypnosis-assisted
treatment of a variety of commonly presenting problems in a typical medical or psychological
practice.

Instead of a problem-based approach, as is traditionally done in advanced workshops, the present

workshop begins with the properties of the trance state and how they can be utilized to empower
traditional treatment to advantage e.g., dissociation, suggestability, metaphor, analgesia and
anesthesia, catalepsy, sensory alterations, time distortion.

With an understanding of these simple principles, the medical or psychological professional

can enhance traditional treatment methods by integrating hypnotic techniques that reduce
anxiety, facilitate recovery and promote healing.

Disclosure:

Some of these ideas were included in a full-day workshop I presented in Montreal in 2013 to the
Quebec Division of the Canadian Federation of Clinical Hypnosis. The workshop was recorded
and produced as a DVD called "So Now I Can Do Inductions...What Next?". I donated my time
and all other expenses were underwritten by myself (Dr. Coldoff), Dr. Stanley Blicker and the
Canadian Federation of Clinical Hypnosis. The DVD has been offered for sale since 2015, with
the proceeds to be donated to the Canadian Federation of Clinical Hypnosis. I will receive no
profit from the sale of the DVD. (FYI: we have not even recouped our costs at the present
time.)
The present workshop proposal is a refined and targeted exploration of some of these ideas and
has never been presented in its present form.

Presenter: Colombo, Stefano

Hypnose par photogramme par photogramme et TDHA.

Stefano Colombo1.
1Enseignement, Société Médicale Suisse d'Hypnose, Genève, Switzerland.

Après la « reverse hypnose » présentée au congrès de Paris en 2015, voici l’approche «

photogramme par photogramme » appliquée aux patients présentant une hyperactivité mentale
et/ou comportementale.

Le sujet « rapide » a trente-six idées dans la tête en même temps. Son cerveau est comme un
tarmac plein d’hélicoptères dont les roteurs tournent à toute vitesse.

Les interruptions d’activité en sont la règle, leurs conséquences aussi.

Nous verrons comment appliquer le « photogramme par photogramme » dans la transe afin
qu’une activité puisse être menée à bien sans interruptiions inutiles et dommageables. La
préaparation à un examen en est un bon exemple.

De même, quand le sujet ne réussit plus à exercer une activité comme jouer du piano, le
« photogramme par photogramme » sera utile pour débloquer la situation et inviter les doigts à
reprendre leur ballet sur les touches du clavier.

Le tout avec des enregistrements vidéo, le sens clinique et, at least but not last, le sens de
l’humour auquel je ne réussis pas à renoncer. Sorry !

Presenter: Côté, Rémi

Les premières techniques d’hypnose de l'école imaginationniste et de son principal

instigateur, Hénin de Cuvillers, telles que pratiquées au début du dix-neuvième siècle.

Rémi Côté1.
1Hypnose clinique, hypnose-cllinique.ca inc., Montréal, QC, Canada.

Après avoir brossé le tableau historique des forces sociales [2] qui ont mené à la création des
conceptions scientifiques de l’hypnose en 1820 par Hénin de Cuvillers [5], nous explorerons ses
écrits pour en analyser les fondements épistémologiques, théoriques et techniques. Philosophe
érudit et rationaliste, principal protagoniste de la mouvance imaginationniste et créateur du
concept d’hypnose[3][4], Hénin de Cuvillers ne croyait pas à l'existence d'un fluide magnétique
animal ou universel agissant comme un effet placebo. Il adhérait plutôt aux conclusions de la
Commission Royale de 1784[1] qui, après la première recherche en «simple aveugle», démontrait
l’influence de l’imagination dans la phénoménologie du magnétisme.

L’examen de ses écrits nous révèlera comment Hénin de Cuvillers se différenciait de Mesmer et
de Puységur dans l’utilisation de ses techniques d’hypnose qui misaient sur l’influence réelle de
l’imagination, plutôt que sur une croyance assimilable à une superstition trompeuse.[6]

C’est dans ce contexte que nous expérimenterons les principales techniques élaborées par Hénin
de Cuvillers, telles que l’abéaston ou l’hypnoscopie.[7][8]

Nous examinerons comment la technique d’abéaston, inspirée d'une posture de l'ancien yoga,
incorporait l’imagerie positive à une symbolique apaisante et une posture immobile et
détendue pour induire la transe hypnotique par des mécanismes psychologiques et
physiologiques qui lui sont propres. Nous poursuivrons par l’expérimentation de sa technique
d’hypnoscopie, qu’il utilisait pendant l’état de transe hypnotique pour activer librement
l’imagination. Pour corroborer l'authenticité de ces techniques, nous évoquerons les passages de
ses écrits témoignant de «voyages par l’imagination» ou encore de rencontre avec des proches
disparus, ou des séances de guérisons finement annotées par ses proches collaborateurs.

En conclusion, nous poserons un regard global sur l’étendue de la contribution des

imaginationnistes et de leur principal instigateur, le Baron d’Hénin de Cuvillers. Bien que ses
écrits fussent longtemps oubliés, nous proposerons des pistes de recherche à emprunter pour
suivre les traces de ce véritable créateur de l’hypnose scientifique et médicale de l'ère moderne.

References:

1. Franklin, B (1784) Rapport des commissaires chargés par le Roi, de l'examen du magnétisme
animal, imprimé par ordre du Roi à Paris à l’imprimerie royale.
2. Goldman, Alvin (1999) Knowledge in a Social World; Oxford University Press.
3. Gravitz Melvin A., Gerton Manuel I. (1984) Origins of the Term Hypnotism Prior to Braid,
American Journal of Clinical Hypnosis Vol. 27, Iss. 2
4. Gravitz, Melvin A. (1993) Etienne Félix d'Hénin de Cuvillers: A Founder of Hypnosis,
American Journal of Clinical Hypnosis, 36:1, 7-11
5. Hénin de Cuvillers, Étienne-Félix d' (1820). Le magnétisme éclairé́ . Barrois, Paris.
6. Hénin de Cuvillers, Étienne-Félix d' (1821). Le magnétisme animal retrouvé dans l'antiquité.
Barrois, Paris.
7. Hénin de Cuvillers, Étienne-Félix d' (1822). Archives du magnétisme animal. Tome 2-4
Barrois, Paris.
8. Hénin de Cuvillers, Étienne-Félix d' (1823). Archives du magnétisme animal. Tome 5-8
Barrois, Paris.

Presenter: Courtis, Sylvie

Hypnose et musique: La transe lucide. Le sens vibratoire et les acouphènes..

Sylvie Courtis1.
1Milton Erickson du Québec, Canton de Hatley, QC, Canada.

HYPNOSE ET MUSIQUE :

La transe lucide

Le sens vibratoire et les acouphènes

Contenu de la présentation : le sens vibratoire et les acouphènes en séance d’hypnose.

Sylvie Courtis, musicienne, musicothérapeute et hypnoclinicienne, propose une présentation de

ses recherches sur le son et les acouphènes.

La recherche de ce que ces vibrations entrainent comme manifestations chez un patient atteint
d’acouphènes et aide celui-ci à mieux comprendre ce qu’est un son, une résonnance, une
vibration.

Lors d’une séance, l’hypnose est induite par une improvisation musicale au violoncelle.
L’induction par le sens vibratoire, sert d’exploration des sensations corporelles lors de l’écoute
musicale sur instrument acoustique.

Une rééducation sur la façon d’écouter et d’entendre les sons par d’autres canaux sensoriels que
l’ouïe, peut aider les patients à tolérer leurs acouphènes.

Le visionnage d’un power point où sera relatée l’expérience d’un cas clinique sera proposé lors
de cette présentation.

Une induction hypnotique avec improvisation au violoncelle sera proposée in situ.

Presenter: Cyna, Allan

Hypnosis for preterm labour and labour induction.

Allan Cyna1,2,3.
1Anaesthesia, Women's and Children's Hospital, Adelaide, Australia; 2Acute Care Medicine,

University of Adelaide, Adelaide, Australia; 3Anaesthesia and Pain Medicine, Nepean Hospital,
Sydney, Australia.

Hypnosis to inhibit a preterm labour and induce labour have been used in our institution for over
a decade. The use of control switch wire visualisation has been have adapted to induce labour
and treat pretermin labour non pharmacologically.
Suggestions are made for the mother in hypnosis to visualise a lead or wire running from the
uterus that controls when labour starts. The woman then uses a head nod or ideomotor finger
signal to indicate when the lead is visualised. She is then requested to follow the lead, tubing or
wire to the control box where she will see switches, buttons, or levers. When visualising the
switch to turn on labour she is asked to pull, push, or press the switch. When she has noticed a
change, she is asked to signal that this has occurred. The trance is then terminated and the
woman questioned on what exactly was visualised.

Presenter: Cyna, Allan

Hypnosis to assist the management of burns in children .

Allan Cyna1,2,3.
1Anaesthesia, Women's and Children's Hospital, Adelaide, Australia; 2Acute Care Medicine,

University of Adelaide, Adelaide, Australia; 3Anaesthesia and Pain Medicine, Nepean Hospital,
Sydney, Australia.

Negative suggestions such as ‘sting’, ‘hurt’, ‘itch,’ ‘worry’are frequent in clinical practice and
may impact on patient perceptions and behaviours. . [1] There is an increasing body of evidence
showing that using such language increases analgesic requirements, the experience of pain and
anxiety. It appears that telling patients that a procedure ‘will hurt’ increases the likelihood that
the perception referred to will be experienced as pain.[2] Fortunately, the reverse is also true, and
telling patients that there are ways to improve their comfort, such as taking a deep breath or
blowing away anything you don’t like” can make things more comfortable. A learnable hypnotic
framework for effective clinical communication has been suggested that might assist patient care
in burns dressing changes and other potentially painful procedures on the ward. [1] This structure
includes: Listening; Acceptance; Utilisation; Reframing and Suggestion (LAURS). The LAURS
concept emphasizes the use of reflective listening. This involves ensuring that, the patient’s
words are heard, they are listened to for meaning, the patient knows they have been heard and
finally confirming with the patient that they have been understood. This involves a checking in
process. For example, during burns dressing changes, if the patient moves slightly the nurse or
doctor might say “sorry” if assumed that pain was experienced. If the patient is asked instead,
“did you feel something?” the response may be “yes that hurts!” or a response such as “I thought
I felt something”. Rather than asking about pain, the clinician might ask, “Is it bothering you?”
“Are you comfortable?” or “Is it OK to carry on?" In addition talking about finishing rather than
starting when about to perform a potentially painful procedure can decrease anxiety and pain.
For example, rather than warn patients about an impending dressing change, staff can enter the
room and ask if its OK to finish putting the clean dressings on gently so that everything can heal
and recover more comfortably?”

References:

1. Cyna A, Andrew M, Tan S. Communication skills for the anaesthetist. Anaesthesia 2009; 64:
658-665.
2. Krauss BS. “This may hurt”: predictions in procedural disclosure may do harm. The BMJ
2015; 350: h649

Presenter: Cyna, Allan

The hypnotic management of needle phobia in children.

Allan Cyna1,2,3.
1Anaesthesia, Women's and Children's Hospital, Adelaide, Australia; 2Acute Care Medicine,

University of Adelaide, Adelaide, Australia; 3Anaesthesia and Pain Medicine, Nepean Hospital,
Sydney, Australia.

Needle phobia can be extremely debilitating and for some patients this can mean hospital
avoidance and the avoidance of medical treatment even if they need it.

Many clinicians are unaware of the potential powerful therapeutic effects of hypnosis, although
effective communication is becoming increasingly recognised as an important and essential part
of clinical anaesthetic practice.[1]

Anaesthesiologists and other clinicians learning the art of hypnosis are finding hypnosis
particularly therapeutic for those with needle phobia and children presenting for anaesthesia.

A five year old patient who came in for a drip every month and needed an anaesthetic every time
was taught switch wire imagery to turn of sensation, pain and movement in his arm by
visualising a wire going down his arm that was attached to a switch that he could turn on and off
when he wanted. By using this hypnosis technique he no longer needed pharmacological
anaesthesia that was required prior to the hypnotic intervention. hypnotic techniques elicit
changes in perception, mood and behaviour that facilitate patients co-operating with their
careoften in extremely stressful circumstances.[2][3]

References:

1. Cyna AM, Andrew MI, Tan SGM, Smith AF, editors. Handbook of Communication in
Anaesthesia and Critical Care. Oxford: Oxford University Press; 2011.
2. Cyna AM, Tomkins D, Maddock T, Barker D. Brief hypnosis for severe needle phobia using
switch-wire imagery in a 5-year old. Paediatr Anaesth. 2007 Aug;17(8):800-4.
3. Olness K, Gardner GG: Some guidelines for uses of hypnotherapy in pediatrics. Pediatrics
1978, 62(2):228-233

Presenter: De Benedittis, Giuseppe

The (re)discovery of the unconscious: What we have learned from neuroscience.

Giuseppe De Benedittis1.
1Dept. of Neurosurgery , University of Milan, Milano, Italy.

The discovery that an extraordinary part of our mental life occurs outside of our awareness is
generally credited to Sigmund Freud, although historically it is far ahead.

The unconscious mind is generally considered in general psychology as the shadow of the "real"
conscious mind, but there is significant evidence that the unconscious is no less flexible,
complex, intentional than its conscious counterpart. Numerous unconscious systems regulate
attentive, perceptive, emotional, mnestic, evaluative and motivational processes. These cognitive
processes manifest themselves at the unconscious level and influence behaviour and emotions
(affects).

Neuroscience is only now beginning to understand the neural correlates of these processes and
their dynamic interactions with conscious processes. For example, how impulses, thoughts and
conscious desires become unconscious (e. g., repression, dissociation) and, on the other hand,
how impulses, motivations and unconscious desires become conscious (e. g., lapses and/or
Freudian missing acts).

There are no brain structures and circuits specifically dedicated to the elaboration of unconscious
thinking, but all regions of the brain participate in conscious and unconscious thinking. What is
the relationship between unconsciousness and consciousness? The deep roots of consciousness
and self-consciousness are believed to reside in a large set of brain structures aimed at neural
mapping of the body and homeostasis in an unconscious way. This would be the Unconscious
"Proto-Self" (Damasio, 2003), from which the conscious experience would emerge. In this
perspective, one can conclude that the actions of the unconscious mind precede and affect the
emergence of the conscious mind.

Presenter: De Benedittis, Giuseppe

The blue book of hypnosis: An easy-to-read reference guide to hypnosis.

Giuseppe De Benedittis1.
1Dept. of Neurosurgery , University of Milan, Milano, Italy.

Based on international experience, the Blue Book of Hypnosis is an advanced project that is a
reference guide to the end user (i. e., the patient, general practitioner, psychologist or other
professional figures interested in the medium, but without specific skills). The project,
organization and layout of the guide, unique in its kind at our knowledge, has been first
published in Italy by experts recognized in the various fields of application of hypnosis and
could be easily adapted internationally. The purpose of the guide is to provide the reader easy
access to relevant, evidence-based information. The Blue Book addresses and covers the most
important topics related to hypnosis applications and techniques. Nevertheless, it is easy to read
and not burdened with too many technical informations and redundant bibliographic apparatus.

The Blue Book is organized into three main sections: I. Introduction to hypnosis. II. Clinical
applications (e. g., chronic pain, psychiatric disorders, psychosomatic diseases, etc.) with brief
description of the most effective hypnotic techniques employed and the level of efficacy
(evidence based). III. Directory of the most qualified operators certified by national and/or
international societies of hypnosis, organized by alphabetical order, geographical origin and area
of expertise.

The Blue Book can fill a gap in the culture and practice of hypnosis worldwide. It is presented as
an open, modular project, adaptable to multimedia platforms (e.g., online), in order to better
provide and disseminate a high standard of reliable information on hypnosis.

Presenter: De Benedittis, Giuseppe

Living with and beyond cancer. What we have learned from hypnosis: Myths and facts.

Giuseppe De Benedittis1.
1Dept. of Neurosurgery, University of Milan, Milano, Italy.

Psycho-Oncology is the discipline that deals with the role of psychosocial factors related to
neoplastic disease, as well as psychological techniques that can positively influence the onset,
progression and remission of cancer.

There is a strong evidence that psychodynamic factors can play a significant role in the
pathogenesis and progression of cancer, supported by numerous theories, psychodynamically and
non-psychodynamically oriented.

The "easy" problem of Psycho-Oncology concerns the role of personality factors and cognitive-
emotional correlates of the cancer event. In this context, hypnosis plays a valuable and privileged
role as a "stand-alone" palliative therapy in the treatment not only of cancer pain, but also of the
numerous problems related to cancer and its treatments (e. g., chemotherapy), such as control of
anticipatory nausea, anxiety, depression, near-to-death issues, etc. Hypnosis can significantly
improve the Quality of Life (QoL) of cancer patients, also implementing compliance with
demanding surgical and medical treatments.

The "hard" problem concerns the role that psychological techniques and, in particular hypnosis,
can play in effectively modulating cancer onset and progression, improving not only the Quality
of Life but also the survival rate, and leading, in some cases, to the spontaneous remission of the
disease.

The evidence is sparse, anecdotal and controversial, but encouraging, especially if

hypnotherapy is integrated into standard treatments and not opposed to them.
A clinical case will be presented to demonstrate that hypnosis can allow you to live with and
beyond cancer. Surviving cancer (cancer survivorship) can be a goal pursued with the hypnotic
approach.

A group demonstration aimed at modulating cancer progression in virtual patients will conclude
the workshop.

Presenter: Deyaert, Michael

Préparation hypnotique pré-interventionnelle en consultation pré-anesthésique.

Michael Deyaert1.
1Anesthésie et réanimation, Clinique Synergia Luberon, Cavaillon, France.

Introduction: La préparation hypnotique pré interventionnelle en consultation pré anesthésique

(CPA) est réalisée par une bulle hypnotique. Le concept est né d'une expérience particulière, lors
d'un concert de Marc Lavoine. La consultation pré anesthésique est un passage obligatoire en
France, avant une prise en charge par un médecin anesthésiste-réanimateur (MAR).

Objectives: Améliorer la qualité de la CPA et diminuer le stress péri opératoire du patient.

Methode: Pendant la CPA, la plupart des patients sont plus ou moins stressés et appréhendent
l'anesthésie, la chirurgie, ou le soin postopératoire, la perte de contrôle de soi-même et surtout la
douleur ou les effets secondaires. Notre rôle en tant que soignant est de soigner, c'est une
évidence, mais également d'accompagner les patients dans le processus de soin. Il est de notre
rôle de leur apporter du positif, du bien-être, de la bienveillance et de l'espoir d'un futur proche
plus agréable. C'est pour cette raison que nous proposons la bulle hypnotique à nos patients en
CPA. La CPA peut se passer en hypnose conversationnelle. A la fin de la CPA, on demande au
patient s'il a tout bien compris et s'il est à l'aise. Très souvent le patient sourit à ce moment là.
Nous faisons de même en lui demandant sa couleur préférée. Il est surpris et la première
dissociation est faite. Nous précisons au patient que l'on peut faire une petite préparation
hypnotique afin d'apporter un plus à son anesthésie, une première expérience avec l'autohypnose.
Nous mettons en place une transe brève en demandant au patient de s'imaginer dans une bulle
protectrice avec une membrane particulière et transparente. Le patient comprend qu'il est ici mais
également ailleurs. Nous lui expliquons que cette bulle est un exercice qu'il peut revivre et refaire
à sa convenance. Nous incitons les patients à trouver un moment de tranquillité chez eux, le
même jour si possible. Ainsi le souvenir de l'exercice en CPA est encore frais et nous
essayons d'enthousiasmer le patient à le refaire quelques fois pour mieux vivre l'expérience et
faciliter la mise en place au moment du passage au bloc opératoire.

Conclusions: Les avantages de cette approche sont multiples: agrémenter la CPA, prendre du
temps avec le patient avec des suggestions positives en le mettant à l'aise, auto-préparation, le
patient devient un acteur actif dans son parcours de soin et augmente son estime de soi, permet
l'interchangeabilité des MAR au bloc opératoire, l'implication des équipes paramédicales et
médicales dans le processus de soin avec moins de stress au bloc opératoire, plus de sérénité.

Presenter: Docquier, Marie-Agnès; Potie, Arnaud

Mastectomie avec accompagnement hypnotique: À propos d'un cas et l'expérience d'une

équipe .

Arnaud POTIE1, Fabienne ROELANTS1, Christine WATREMEZ1, Marie-Agnès DOCQUIER1.

1Anaesthesiology department, Cliniques universitaires St Luc, Brussels, Belgium.

Le but de la conférence est de partager notre expérience d’une chirurgie de mastectomie avec
hypnose. Le parcours du patient : du diagnostic à la chirurgie avec hypnose. L’importance de la
consultation préopératoire (sélection des patients) et d’établir une alliance thérapeutique.
L’utilisation de la réalité virtuelle hypnotique pendant la réalisation de l’anesthésie
locorégionale, et les technique de maintien de l’hypnose durant la chirurgie. Et partager les 10
ans d’expérience d’une équipe multidisciplinaire dans l’accompagnement hypnotique pour une
chirurgie oncologique mammaire.

References:

1. Arnaud Potié, Fabienne Roelants, Audrey Pospiech, Mona Momeni, and Christine Watremez.
Hypnosis in the Perioperative Management of Breast Cancer Surgery: Clinical Benefits and
Potential Implications. Anesthesiology Research and Practice , 2016. Review Article

Presenter: Drouet, Nicolas

L'hypnopraxie : Une hypnothérapie sans protocole ni suggestion ?.

Nicolas Drouet1,2, Guy CHEDEAU1, Assya TODOROV1.

1Institut Milton Erickson de Région Lémanique, Presinge, Switzerland; 2Clinique de Chartreuse,

VOIRON, France.

L'hypnopraxie®, présentée pour la première fois au congrès mondial des psychothérapies en

2005 (GC)[1], associe l'hypnose éricksonienne et la phénoménologie décrite par différents
auteurs, en particulier Michel Henry (la phénoménologie de la chair et de la vie)[2]. Les
phénoménologues décrivent un inconscient affectif, le pathos, qui habite la chair. Les affects sont
la force d'orientation au monde, ils se manifestent par les praxies, c'est à dire la manière d'être au
monde, aux autres et à soi. L'inconscient pathétique incarné conduit donc la vie par les
« éprouver » qui affectent l'être dans son intimité profonde. Ceux-ci sont déterminés par les
visées intentionnelles propres à chacun. Cette construction phénoménologique modifie
radicalement l'approche du patient en hypnothérapie. Puisque les affects gouvernent la vie de
l'être, l'hypnopraxie® vise à remettre du mouvement dans les affects du patient pour l'amener à
transformer son attachement à ses certitudes et à ses praxies. Le patient est l'expert de lui-même :
le thérapeute ne peut pas connaître l'intimité profonde du patient, qui ne se dévoile qu'en partie et
de manière involontaire. Saisir les praxies du patient nécessite une approche linguistique de son
discours, ainsi que le relevé de ses mouvements et micro-mimiques faciales. Toutes ces
manifestations de l'inconscient incarné résultent des affects. Lors de la séance thérapeutique, soit
en mode conversationnel, soit lors d'une transe formelle, le thérapeute apporte le cadre nécessaire
au travail intime du patient en dehors de tout protocole formalisé. Il entre en relation avec
l'inconscient du patient en lui renvoyant ses propres visées intentionnelles, ses praxies, et ses
manifestations corporelles. Le thérapeute utilise les structures verbales du patient. Il peut même
chuchoter à l'oreille du patient : cette proximité facilite la mobilisation des affects du patient pour
l'amener au changement. Le patient fera ce qu'il a besoin de faire avec les paroles prononcées par
le thérapeute : les verbes à l'infinitif laisse toute liberté au patient d'y mettre le sens et le contenu
qu'il veut. En hypnopraxie®, c'est donc le patient qui dirige la séance en indiquant au thérapeute,
au moins en partie, l'orientation qu'il prend : il ne se laisse enfermer ni dans un protocole ni dans
des suggestions données par le thérapeute.d

Après un exposé de la théorie résumée ci-dessus, des extraits vidéos de séances, ainsi que la
participation de l'auditoire, en apporteront une démonstration pratique.

References:

1. Guy Chedeau, Monique Masset, Guillaume Finti. De l'hypnose à l'hypnopraxie®, entre âme et
conscience. Edition Hypsos, 2011, ISBN 978-2-7466-3842-6
2. Michel Henry. Incarnation, une philosophie de la chair. Editions du Seuil, 2000, ISBN 978-
2020418119

Presenter: Drouet, Nicolas

Hypnopraxie et troubles des conduites alimentaires.

Nicolas Drouet1,2, Guy CHEDEAU1.

1Institut Milton Erickson de Région Lémanique, Presinge, Switzerland; 2Clinique de Chartreuse,

VOIRON, France.

Les troubles des conduites alimentaires sont des demandes fréquentes de prise en charge en
hypnothérapie, que ce soit dans le cadre d'une anorexie mentale, d'une boulimie compulsive, ou
d'une hyperphagie boulimique. Or, la phénoménologie, notamment celle exposée par Michel
Henry (phénoménologie de la chair et de la vie)[1], décrit un inconscient pathétique incarné, dont
le moteur d'orientation au monde, aux autres et à soi est constitué des affects. Ces affects se
manifestent par des praxies, comme, par exemple, chercher à maîtriser son corps lors d'une
anorxie mentale, ou se libérer de manière compulsive lors d'une boulimie compulsive, ou se
remplir sans limite dans une boulimie hyperphagique. L'hypnopraxie®, présentée la première
fois en 2005 par Guy Chedeau[2], est une hypnothérapie qui intègre des notions de
phénoménologie dans une base d'hypnose éricksonienne. L'analyse phénoménologique des
troubles des conduites alimentaires modifie radicalement la prise en charge des patients en
hypnothérapie. L'hypnopraxie® vise à mobiliser les affects du patient pour l'amener à « transe-
former » son attachement à ses praxies. La prise en charge en hypnopraxie® diffère en de
nombreux points de la prise en charge en hypnose éricksonienne. L'hypnopraxie®, associée à un
soutien éducationnel en nutrition et en activité physique, apporte des résultats intéressants.

La vidéo présentera des éléments de phénoménologie de la vie, et les particularités de l'approche

hypnopraxique® en hypnothérapie. Ces propos seront largement illustrés par des descriptions de
cas et de séances d'hypnopraxie® de patients souffrant de troubles des conduites alimentaires.

References:

1. Michel Henry. Incarnation, une philosophie de la chair. Editions du Seuil, 2000, ISBN 978-
2020418119
2. Guy Chedeau, Monique Masset, Guillaume Finti. De l'hypnose à l'hypnopraxie®, entre âme et
conscience. Edition Hypsos, 2011, ISBN 978-2-7466-3842-6

Presenter: du Chéné, Thibault

How can the wisdom of hypnosis facilitate a paradigm shift in the diagnoses of chronic
pain? .

Thibault du Chéné1.
1Constance Lethbridge Rehabilitation Center, CIUSSS Centre-Ouest-de-l’île-de-Montréal,

Montreal, QC, Canada.

How can the practice of hypnosis facilitate central pain desensitization and provide another
example of the mind/body connection? After careful medical assessment, is it possible that
certain chronic pains are brain induced through complex learned neural pathways without
necessary nociceptive source?

Using John Sarno, MD has an historical starting point, I will argue that psychophysiological
disorders are not just possible but probable. Low Back Pain (LBP) is now the #1 cause of
disability globally. It is most common in mid-life. In high-income countries, it is linked to
socioeconomic status, job satisfaction, and the potential for monetary compensation. High use of
passive treatments like imaging, opioids, spinal injections, surgery, and rest are prescribed rather
than the judicious and directed use of education, exercise, and psychotherapy. The consequence
to this is that our health care system is currently operating by making more money from its
failures than its successes.

Hypnosis can be a vehicle that can help us communicate the limitations of our current paradigm
and outline a new one that is based on a more integrated mind/body connection. What
implications do these phenomena have in the diagnosis and treatment of LBP when there are no
specific identifiable spinal abnormalities or nociceptive source?
Presenter: Dubos, Bruno

L'hypnose par le corps et son utilisation dans les processus chroniques.

Bruno Dubos1.
1ille et vilaine , libérale privée, Rennes, France.

Nous avons tous, durant notre apprentissage de l'hypnose et grace à notre expérience, développé
des compétences et des stratégies pour construire avec nos patients un contexte favorable à la
mobilisation de leurs ressources et de leur créativité pour induire des changements. Ces
compétences mobilisent notre capacité à utiliser le langage d'une façon si particulière pour
induire l'état de transe hypnotique, du moins pour une bonne partie de nos patients...Pourtant
nous connaissons tous "ces moments de solitude" ou rien ne change et ou toutes nos stratégies
échouent les unes aprés les autres. En effet, certains de nos patients ont perdu leur créativité. Ils
sont arrêtés et appauvris du point de vue de leurs ressources. c'est le cas pour bon nombres de
patients installés dans un processus chronique.

Il existe pourtant d'autres moyens de rentrer en relation avec ces patients si décourageants, en
utilisant ce qui est immédiatement à notre portée et toujours mobilisable: le corps.

Cet atelier, avec le support d'une vidéo (sous titrée en anglais), vise à développer chez le
thérapeute, sa capacité à observer le corps de son patient, de repérer les ressources qui y sont
inscrites, ses ancrages émotionnels, et de les utiliser. L'utilisation du corps du patient peut être
mobilisé pour induire une transe hypnotique (souvent de façon simple et rapide) mais aussi pour
permettre au patient de se remettre en mouvement physiquement, émotionellement, et de
retrouver la capacité à trouver des solutions.

Presenter: Dumas, Regis

Hypnose et osteopathie: Un mariage heureux.

Regis DUMAS 1.
1Président de la CFHTB et Président Forum mai 2017 1100 Participants , Hypnose Auvergne

France , CHAMALIERES 63400, France, Metropolitan.

En tant que Président de la Confédération Francophone d'Hypnose et de Thérapies Brèves (

CFHTB), j'ai déjà enseigné dans plusieurs pays cette pratique depuis plus de 10 ans, à
l'invitation d' écoles et d'instituts d'hypnose,.
Je me propose lors de cet atelier d'initier les participants à une technique efficace, facile
d'apprentissage et atraumatique que j'utilise au quotidien dans mon cabinet de médecin
généraliste depuis plus de 15 ans, et qui mèle, le plus harmonieusement possible Ostéopathie et
Hypnose qui agissent en synergie.

Je montrerais et vous expérimenterais en quoi l’hypnose potentialise l’ostéopathie et permet

bien souvent de « débloquer » des situations tant psychiques qu'organiques ? .

INDICATIONS multiples, mêlant harmonieusement l'esprit et le corps :

* Douleurs et blocages vertébraux : rachis cervical et dorso lombaire...

* Pathologies musculo tendineuses périphériques( épaules, chevilles, genoux...)

* Migraines et céphalées...

* Traumatismes sportifs...

* Le mal - être corporel lié à l'anxiété et à la dépression ,de ceux qui sont brisés,en ont "plein le
dos" ou plein "les bottes" et portent le poids du monde sur leurs épaules...

OBJECTIFS :

* Constater l'efficacité de cette pratique lors de démonstrations avec des volontaires

* Améliorer l'alliance thérapeutique et le rapport collaboratif avec le patient

* Ré-habiliter le toucher,et l'accompagnement dans le geste

* Ré-apprendre toujours et encore à mieux écouter et observer ...

* Dans le respect du patient .

Les participants, vont ressentir au cours d'exercices pratiques, comment cette approche
kinesthésique et sensuelle , facilitant l'alliance thérapeutique , et utilisant tous les outils de
l’hypnose (catalepsie, dissociation, discours facilitateur, miroir, appel aux ressources, ...) ,
permet d’obtenir un relachement confortable et un lacher prise , avec des résultats reproductibles
, initiant un changement profond et durable.

Cet atelier , intégrera plusieurs exercices que chacun pourra utiliser directement dans son cabinet
.
Matériel utile : Power point , 1 simple table pour s'allonger lors des démonstrations
Mots clés :
Synergie ostéopathie Hypnose apprentissage, le toucher et l'écoute, atelier pratique

References:
1. Président de la CFHTB Confédération Francophone Hypnose et Thérapies Brèves
2. Président Forum CFHTB Clermont Fd 10 au 13 mai 2017 1100 Participants

Presenter: Elkins, Gary; Roberts, Lynae

It’s only a matter of time: Hypnotizability and therapeutic effects of hypnosis .

Jim Sliwinski, Lynae Roberts, Gary Elkins.

.

In a 12-week, randomized controlled trial with 187 participants, 93 women were randomized to a
clinical hypnosis treatment group to study the effect of a hypnosis intervention on
postmenopausal hot flashes. Hot flash diaries were collected at seven timepoints, physiological
hot flash measurement and questionnaires on depression, anxiety, and sleep quality were given at
three timepoints, and hypnotizability was assessed at endpoint.

For those receiving the treatment, we analyzed results week-by-week on measures of hot flash
frequency, hot flash severity, depression, anxiety, and sleep quality among participants who
scored low, medium, high and very high in hypnotizability.

Using the Elkins Hypnotizability Scale (EHS), our sample had 11.0% lows, 28.1% middles,
47.6% highs, and 13.4% very highs. Results of hot flash frequency show that symptoms
improved from baseline to follow-up for participants at all levels of hypnotizability, with lows
showing the same amount of reduction at week 3 that very highs saw at week 1. Overall,
participants at all hypnotizability levels experienced significant symptom improvement after one
visit and the trend continued throughout the study period. This trend of improvement was more
extreme for highs and very highs.

Measuring hypnotizability is important for planning a course of treatment and predicting how
quickly patients will see maximum effects, but these results suggest that almost anyone can
benefit from therapeutic hypnosis on the symptoms assessed here.

Presenter: Elkins, Gary

Mindful hypnotherapy: The basics for clinical practice .

Gary Elkins1.
1Department of Psychology and Neuroscience, Baylor University, Waco, TX, United States.

Stress and anxiety are common problems that are associated with physical symptoms such as
sleep disturbances, pain, and psychological symptoms such as depression. There is a pressing
need for reasonably brief treatments that can reduce stress and improve quality of life.
Mindfulness meditation involves focusing attention on present-moment experiences and non-
judgmental awareness among other components. Hypnosis also involves focusing attention, and
its unique potential to foster change can be adapted to different therapeutic modalities. Mindful
Hypnotherapy was developed to integrate the methods and values of mindfulness with the
methods and theoretical concepts underlying hypnotic relaxation therapy. This workshop will
present the findings from research into mindful hypnosis to enhance the reduction of anxiety,
stress and depression and improve quality of life. In the initial study, individuals with stress
received an 8 session Mindful Hypnotherapy intervention that included hypnotic induction and
practice toward: (1) Present moment awareness; (2) non-judgmental awareness of sensations; (3)
awareness of thoughts and feelings; (4) mindful self-hypnosis; (5) Mindful Hypnotherapy for
Loving-Kindness and Compassion; (6) Acceptance and Awareness of values; (7)
Individualization of mindful hypnotherapy practice; and (8) Integration of daily mindful self-
hypnosis practice . The findings supported the significant benefits of Mindful Hypnotherapy,
relative to wait-list control, on average stress, anxiety, and depression. The mindful
hypnotherapy was well received with high participant satisfaction. The findings from this initial
demonstrate the feasibility, credibility and potential benefit of mindful hypnotherapy. The
results of the research program support the practice of combining hypnosis with mindfulness as a
way of enhancing therapeutic outcomes. Participants will learn the theory underlying Mindful
Hypnotherapy, clinical skills for use in practice, and understand the empirical findings on this
innovative intervention.

References:

1. Elkins, G, & Olendzki, N. (In Press). Mindful Hypnotherapy: The Basics for Clinical Practice.
New York, NY: Springer Publishing.
2. Yapko, M.D. (2011) Mindfulness and Hypnosis: The Power of Suggestion to Transform
Experience. New York, NY: W.W. Norton Company
3. Elkins, G. (2016) Handbook of Medical and Psychological Hypnosis: Foundations,
Applications and Professional Issues. New York, NY: Springer Publishing
4. Alladin, A. (2016). Integrative CBT for Anxiety Disorders: An Evidence-Based Approach to
Enhancing Cognitive Behavioural Therapy with Mindfulness and Hypnotherapy, New York,
NY: Wiley-Blackwell

Presenter: Fathi, Mehdi

Hypnoanalgesia for elective laparoscopic cholecystectomy.

Mehdi Fathi1.
1Anesthesa, Mashhad university of medical sciences, Mashhad, Iran (Islamic Republic of).

Background: Over the past two decades, hypnosis has been widely studied; however, no
systematic attempts have been made to determine the average size of hypno analgesic effects or
establish the generalizability of these effects from the laboratory to the clinic.This study evaluate
the effectiveness of hypnosis in pain management ,nausea ,vomiting and hospitalization .
Method: Between February 2012 and September 2013, 60 laparoscopic cholecystectomy with
ASA class 1,2 and range of above 18 years were performed under hypno anesthesia
.Postoperative data of this study were compared to patients that in group of control (n = 60) .
Both groups took midazolam ,propofol and atracurium for general anesthesia and intubated . The
patients in group of hypnosis heard the indoctrination of hypnotism 15 minutes before induction.
After extubation, corresponding list was filled by anesthesiologist assistant.

Results: Patients in the study group compared to control, postoperative pain has decreased, total
dose and duration of narcotic pain medications after surgery, dropped out.The time of first
analgesic dose was later in group that was treated with hypnotism . The study groups did not
reduce the severity of nausea and vomiting after surgery. Well as the total amount of analgesic
dosage and recovery time are also under hypnosis group had no significant difference with the
control group.

Conclusion: The research indicated that hypnotic suggestion was effective in reducing
postoperative pain, , the amount of narcotic pain medications and duration of postoperative
hospitalization. But in reducing of the severity of nausea and vomiting after surgery, the total
amount of dose non narcotic pain medications and as well as recovery time is unaffected.

References:

1. Textbook of Miller anesthesia

Presenter: Fathi, Mehdi

Hypnosis as an alternative to general anesthesia for orthopedic hand surgery: A case

report.

Mehdi Fathi1.
1Anesthesia department, mashhad university of medical sciences, Mashhad, Iran (Islamic

Republic of).

The effectiveness of psychological techniques such as patient education, cognitive and

behavioral interventions, relaxation techniques, hypnosis, therapeutic suggestion interventions,
and emotion-focused interventions has been assessed through the outcomes of postoperative
pain, perioperative anxiety, quality of life, and recovery in adults. In this case presentation, we
introduce using of hypnosis as an approach to pain control in hand surgery.

Presenter: Fathi, Mehdi

Hypnoanalgesia for dilatation and curettage pain control.

Mehdi Fathi1.
1Anesthesia, Mashhad medical university of medical sciences, Mashhad, Iran (Islamic Republic

of).

Abnormal uterine bleeding (AUB) is one of the common causes that make women refer to
gynecologists prior to the menopausal age.

Hypnosis is an attentive, receptive brain state based on focal concentration, which is necessary to
achieve the state of heightened receptivity for suggestions

The patient was a 51-year-old woman referred to the Hajar hospital with severe
menometrorrhagia that had lasted for 20 days. After primary examinations, ultrasonography was
performed and an endometrial thickening (19 mm) was observed. Coexisting diseases were
rheumatoid arthritis, systemic lupus erythematosus, which persisted for 10 years, insulin
dependent diabetes mellitus, hypertension, hyperlipidemia and coronary artery disease, as
confirmed by the coronary angiography. In her medical history, she had two cases of uterine
curettage under general anesthesia and C-section in her second delivery. She used aspirin 80 mg
and prednisolone 10 mg on a daily basis and methotrexate 20 mg on a weekly basis. She had
reported delirium following the previous sedation by ketamine.

In the operation room, standard monitoring included electrocardiography, pulse oximetry and
noninvasive blood pressure were implemented and vital signs were recorded. No analgesic or
sedative drugs were used as premedication. Then hypnosis was performed by an expert
hypnotist, who was an anesthesiologist and hypnosis trainer in Iranian scientific society of
clinical hypnosis with more than twenty years of experience in the field of hypnoanalgesia.

The hypnotic state was deepened by a challenging method, an approach to focus the patient’s
concentration on an important aspect of her desires. After witnessing sufficient signs of trance,
the surgery was initiated. Dilatation of vaginal canal and curettage biopsy of uterine were
performed. Vital signs changed to BP = 125/95 and HR = 72 during the surgery and the patient’s
facies was relaxed.

At the end of the surgery, the patient was conditioned for postoperative analgesia. The surgeon
and patient were satisfied with the procedure. The patient reported no pain during the operation.
The 48-hour follow-up did not show any sign of pain in the patient. No analgesic drugs were
needed in the postoperative period. Also, biopsy examination indicated endometrial hyperplasia.

Presenter: Fathi, Mehdi

Efficacy of conversational hypnosis and propofol in reducing adverse effects of endoscopy.

Mehdi Fathi1.
1Anesthesa, Mashhad university of medical sciences, Mashhad, Iran (Islamic Republic of).

Background: As pain and nausea is usually associated with endoscopy procedure, its
management is important to alleviate patients’ anxious in this regard.

Objectives: The present study aimed to examine the effectiveness of conversational hypnosis in
reducing anxiety and endoscopy-related complications as well as its role in increasing the
satisfaction of patients exposed to endoscopic procedures.

Patients and Methods: The participants of upper GI endoscopy procedure were randomly
assigned to an experiment group (with conversational hypnosis intervention, n = 93) and a
control group (n = 47). The participants’ hemodynamic indexes (HR, blood pressure, pulse
oximetry), anxiety, satisfaction level, and complications resulted from the procedure were
monitored and included in the self-administered questionnaire.

Results: The results indicated that the participants in experiment group had a significant
reduction of anxiety in the posttest. The adverse side effects such as vomiting, nausea, and
hiccups in the experimental group was less than the control group, though this difference was not
significant (P = 0.54).

Conclusions: The results suggested that conversational hypnosis technique could reduce anxiety
as well as the sedation process in invasive procedures such as endoscopy.

Presenter: Fathi, Mehdi

Principals of hypnoanesthesia: Hypnotic suggestion for intra and postoperative pain

control .

Mehdi Fathi1.
1Anesthesia, Mashhad university of medical sciences,Iranian scientific society of clinical

hypnosis, Mashhad, Iran (Islamic Republic of).

Introduction: Pain is an individual somatosensory – emotive experience.This emphasizes that

we must deal with pain case by case because patients personality is different .Their cognition
about pain,their competence and their life styl and attitude would effect their pain perception and
pain tolerance.Then many of psychological intervention can help pain sensation.Ther are some
well known interventions for this manner including cognitive therapy ,mental
relaxation,biofeedback and hypnosis.

Hypnosis is an attentive receptive brain state .Its principle components are

absorption,dissociation and reduce peripheral awareness.Hypnoanalgesia has defined as guided
imagery that may lead to dissociation to pain sensation or distortion of pain perception.Hypnotic
suggestions induce hypnotic state and then hypnotherapist guides them to association of manners
that associated to calmness,painless or sensation of other senses far as pain like pressure instead
of pain.This suggestion may control pain during surgery.

Method: My presentation would including some brief movies about surgeries that I have done
them without anesthesia just only through hypnosis and they show intra and postoperative
analgesia.

Results: Many reports are about wide variety of surgeries that had done under hypnotic state
without using anesthesia drugs.(Cesarian section,labour abdominal surgery,orthopedic operation
and so on ).

Conclusion: Suggestion can lead to induce postoperative painless period.It needs to induce
conditioning state during surgery and suggest patient to be pain free on postoperative period.

Presenter: Faymonville, Marie-Elisabeth

Dissociation and hypnotisability: Quantification of hypnosis subjective experience.

Audrey Vanhaudenhuyse1, Didier Ledoux2, Olivia Gosseries3, Athena Demertzi3, Steven

Laureys3, Marie-Elisabeth Faymonville1.
1Algology and Palliatif Department, GIGA Consciousness, University Hospital of Liège &

University of Liège, Liège, Belgium; 2Intensive Care Department, GIGA Consciousness,

University Hospital of Liège & University of Liège, Liège, Belgium; 3Neurology Department &
GIGA Consciousness, University Hospital of Liège & University of Liège, Liège, Belgium.

Background: Hypnosis research is facilitated by the development of scales used for the
measurement of hypnotizability. The usual way to assess hypnotizability is to apply protocol
encompassing induction and suggestions and to sum the number of suggestions that an individual
successfully experiences. The experimenter observes reactions of subjects along defined criteria
and scores the level of hypnotizability as “low”, “medium”, or “high”. These protocols are time
consuming, limited to behavioral responses and do not consider phenomenal subjective
experience of participants. We tested volunteers with a standardized hypnotizability scale and we
performed a neutral hypnosis session where volunteers scored absorption, dissociation and time
perception on Visual Analogic Scales (VAS).

Method: 62 subjects were included (27±11y; 38 women). Hypnotizability was assessed with the
Stanford Hypnotic Susceptibility Scale, Form C (SHSS:C1) and 3 self-assessment scales
evaluating absorption, dissociation and time perception. The procedure used for the 3 items scale
started with a hypnotic instruction encompassing a 3 minutes induction procedure involving
muscle relaxation and eyes fixation. Subjects were invited to experience a neutral hypnosis.
Hypnotic state was maintained during 15 minutes. Immediately after the session, subjects self-
assessed absorption and dissociation on VAS scale and have to estimate the time elapsed since
they have started hypnotic exercise. Kruskall-Wallis tests were calculated regarding
hypnotizability level as scored by the two scales. We used Chi-Squared test for the post hoc
comparisons, with a p-values < 0.0167 were considered as statistically significant after applying
a Bonferroni correction.

Results: 27 were scored as high (range: 8-11), 22 medium (range 5-7) and 13 low (range: 1-4)
according the SHSS:C. Dissociation was significantly different across the 3 categories (high,
medium, low) of the SHSS:C (p<0.05). Dissociation score also different when low and high
subjects were directly compared (p=0.0118). No difference was found when absorption and
temporal disruption scores were used to compare SHSS categories (p>0.05).Conclusion: This
study provides a proof of concept of the use of one subjective rating of subjects to decide if they
are more or less hypnotizable. Future studies are needed on larger sample to validate the
efficiency of self-esteemed dissociation score to characterized hypnotisability of subjects.

Presenter: Faymonville, Marie-Elisabeth

Efficacy of a hypnosis-based intervention to improve well-being during cancer: The

differences between prostate and breast cancer patients.

Charlotte Grégoire3, Marie-Elisabeth Faymonville2, Isabelle Bragard3, Vanessa Charland-

Verville6, France Delevallez5, Isabelle Merckaert5, Darius Razavi5, Aline Gillet7, Florence
Lewis5, David Waltregny1, Hubert Nicolas4, Audrey Vanhaudenhuyse2.
1Urology Department, University Hospital of Liège, Liège, Belgium; 2 Algology and Palliatif

Department, GIGA Consciousness, University Hospital of Liège & University of Liège, Liège,
Belgium; 3Psychology Department, GIGA Consciousness, University Hospital of Liège, Liège,
Belgium; 4Urology Department, CHR Citadelle, Liège, Belgium; 5Unité de Recherche en
Psychosomatique et en Psycho-oncologie, University of Bruxelles & Institut Jules Bordet,
Bruxelles, Belgium; 6Neurology Department & GIGA Consciousness, University Hospital of
Liège & University of Liège, Liège, Belgium; 7Medicine Faculty, University Hospital of Liège,
Liège, Belgium.

Introduction: Breast and prostate cancer both have negative consequences on patients’ quality
of life (depression, anxiety, sleep difficulties, fatigue). Studies showed the efficacy of hypnosis-
based interventions to decrease emotional distress and fatigue in breast cancer patients [e.g. 1,2]
but none investigated these effects on prostate cancer patients. We aim to assess the efficacy of
such intervention to improve breast and prostate patients’ well-being and to compare these
effects between these populations.

Methods: 68 women with breast cancer and 25 men with prostate cancer accepted to participate
in a group intervention combining self-care techniques and hypnosis exercises. Each group met
for 6 2h sessions and had to complete homework assignments. Each participant received 6 CDs
with the hypnosis exercises in order to foster at-home practice. Emotional distress, sleep
difficulties, fatigue and quality of life were measured through questionnaires before and after the
intervention.
Results: A multivariate analysis of variance showed that there were significant effects for
anxiety, depression, sleep difficulties, fatigue and quality of life in women with breast cancer.
None of these effects was significant in men with prostate cancer. We compare the 2 populations
at baseline and showed differences: anxiety, sleep difficulties and fatigue were more severe in
women. In addition, women were younger and received chemotherapy, radiation therapy and
hormonal therapy more often than men.

Conclusion: The intervention was efficient to improve breast cancer patients’ emotional distress,
fatigue, sleep difficulties and quality of life, but did not help prostate cancer patients for any of
these variables. The fact that men’s quality of life was better at baseline could explain why they
did not improve as much as women did. This difference in quality of life may be linked to the
fact that prostate cancer patients are often reassured by their oncologist about their prognosis and
the severity of their disease. Whereas breast cancer patients generally need to endure several
heavy treatments with a great impact on quality of life, many men in our sample only attended
one surgery and did not receive any complementary treatment. In conclusion, it seems that the
hypnosis-based intervention proposed still needs to be studied in order to understand how and
when it has to be administered, especially among men with cancer.

References:

1. Bragard, I. et al. A Nonrandomized Comparison Study of Self-Hypnosis, Yoga, and

Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy to Reduce Emotional Distress in Breast Cancer Patients. Int. J.
Clin. Exp. Hypn. 65, 189–209 (2017).
2. Bragard, I. et al. Group interventions to reduce emotional distress and fatigue in breast cancer
patients: A nine-month follow-up pragmatic trial. Br. J. Cancer in press

Presenter: Feix, Ricardo

Espontaneous anomalous phenomena at the hypnotherapist office: Ethical and

transpersonal clinical approach to the cases of three challengers patients in deep trance.

Ricardo Feix1,2.
1Instituto Milton Erickson Brasil Sul, The Milton Erickson Foundation Phoenix Arizona USA,

Porto Alegre, Brazil; 2Medical coordination board , AsBH Associação Brasileira de Hipnose,
São Paulo , Brazil.

Introduction: Dr. Feix first presents the definitions and the theoretical concepts of anomalous
phenomena, somnambulic persons, deep trance in agree with The APA (American Psychological
Association).

The author describes three challenging cases of high-hypnotizable somnambulic patients from
his own medical practice.
Objectives: The main objective is to introduce the hypnotherapists to the fantastic challenger
world of the anomalous phenomena, para normality or psi experiences.

Objective 2 is to differentiates spiritual emergency, psychotic crisis and normality.

Methods: This work consists in a study of case, whom the primary source is the medical office
records written by the author during real hypnotherapic sessions.

Results: During the deep trance those patients expressed anomalous experiences like: automatic
writing, deep memories, psi related experiences and mystical experiences.

Conclusion: Dr. Feix discusses technical, spiritual and ethical issues and the management of
those challenging cases requires a special multilevel sophisticated care.

This work needs an integrated transpersonal quantic intervention.

References:

1. CARDEÑA, LINN, KRIPPNER, Varieties of Anomalous Experiences; Just floating on the

Sky: A comparison of Shamanic and hypnotic phenomenology.
2. REED, GRAHAM: The Psychology of anomalous experiences.
3. WILBER K.: Quantum questions, mystical writings of the worlds greatest physician.
4. SHELDRAKE R.: The presence of the past.
5. SOGYAL RIMPOCHE: The Tibetan book of living and dying.
6. GROF, STANILLAV, GROF, CHRISTINA: Spiritual emergency; The Psychology of the
future.
7. AN, STEVENSON: Children who remember previous lives.
8. TEN DAN, HANS: Deep healing. A practice out line of past life therapy.
9. WOOLGER J. ROGER: Other lives, other selves; Home page, papers for download .
10. PEKALA R.J., KUMAR V.K., CUMINGST: Types of high hypnotically susceptible
individuals and reported attitudes and experiences.
11. STEPHEN GILLIGAN, SIMON DVORAH: Walking in two worlds.
12. KEENEY, BRADFORD: Bushman Shaman awakening the spirit through ecstatic dance.
13. WINAFRED BLAKE LUCAS: Regression therapy.
14. BALDWIN J. WILLIAM: Spirit releasement Therapy.
15. TOM LINSON, ANDY: Vol 1, Vol 2 and Vol 3: Exploring, healing, transforming the Eternal
Soul.
16. JUNG, C.G.: Psycology and the occult; Psychology East and West.

Presenter: Forester-Miller, Holly

An intervention model for self-hypnosis classes for enhancing the quality of life of cancer
patients .

Holly Forester-Miller1.
1Medical Hypnosis Consultants, PLLC, Durham, NC, United States.

Presentation Outline:

In this interactive workshop the presenter will offer a very brief overview of her study published
in the July 2017 special issue of the American Journal of Clinical Hypnosis, “Self-Hypnosis
Classes to Enhance the Quality of Life of Breast Cancer Patients”. [1]

She will then outline the intervention model used for the 4 session self-hypnosis classes and
teach participants key components of the model.

The presenter will teach participants the 3 self-hypnosis induction techniques used in the
intervention model with cancer patients.

She will present on the use of language and highlight implicative words in the same manner
taught to the cancer patients.

The presenter will demonstrate and discuss the methods used to help the cancer patients form
useful hypnotic suggestions related to their treatment modality and their potential symptoms or
side effects. Numerous examples will be provided and the participants will work on developing
suggestions.

References:

1. Forester-Miller, H. (2017). Self-Hypnosis Classes to Enhance the Quality of Life of Breast

Cancer Patients. American Journal of Clinical Hypnosis, 60:18-32.

Presenter: Frankenhuis, Carla

Hypnosis for children with irritable bowel syndrome (IBS) or functional abdominal pain
(FAP).

Carla Frankenhuis1.
1Praktijk voor medische hypnose, PMH, Amsterdam, Netherlands.

Hypnosis brings lasting relief to children with IBS or FAP, a small study suggests.

Researchers led by Dr. Arine M. Vlieger, of St. Antonius Hospital in the Netherlands and
Professor Dr. Marc Benninga of the Academic Medical Centre Amsterdam, found that of 52
children with IBS or FAP,who had six hypnosis sessions with therapist, Carla Frankenhuis and
practiced self hypnosis at home, two-thirds were free or mostly free of abdominal pain,
compared to 20 percent of children who were given standard therapy alone.

The results were published in the American Journal of Gastroenterology.

Five years later, 68 percent of children in the hypnosis group were still largely free of abdominal
pain, compared to 20 percent of children who received standard care.

The results of the last study have been published in 2017. In this study 260 children with
IBS/FAP (8-18 years) had individual hypnotherapy with a therapist or home based treatment
with cd’s.

1. Review and describe our clinical research in the efficacy of hypnosis for functional
abdominal pain or irritable bowl syndrome.
2. Present our current study
3. Describe and demonstrate the protocol
4. Give the participants an opportunity to practice

References:

1.
https://jamanetwork.com/searchresults?q=hypnotherapy&allJournals=1&SearchSourceType=1&
exPrm_qqq={!payloadDisMaxQParser%20pf=Tags%20qf=Tags^0.0000001%20payloadFields=
Tags%20bf=}%22hypnotherapy%22&exPrm_hl.q=hypnotherapy

Presenter: Freedman, Oksana

The power of hypnosis to reduce the attentional blink.

Oksana Freedman1, Arien Mack1.

1Psychology, The New School University , New York, NY, United States.

When two targets are presented in a RSVP stream of visual stimuli, the second target is likely to
be missed if it occurs between 200ms and 500ms after the first. This is the Attentional Blink
(AB). We explored whether post-hypnotic suggestion can reduce the AB when it directs attention
exclusively to the targets. We compared the AB in 12 highly hypnotizable participants (group 1)
to 10 less hypnotizable Ps (group 2) and 10 control Ps (group 3). Group 1 and 2 received a post
hypnotic suggestion to attend only to numbers in the RSVP stream (17-19 letters and 2 numbers)
between two sets of 60 trials, while group 3 did the same tasks with no suggestion. In the two
groups receiving post hypnotic suggestion a hypnotic trance was induced using a modified
Elman’s hypnotic technique (Elman, 1970).

All three groups showed an equivalent AB in the first set of trials. Importantly, we found that
group 1 showed a significantly smaller AB in the second set of trials than in the first (p=.018)
and a significantly smaller AB relative to groups 2 and 3 who showed no reduction in AB in the
second set. The AB analysis revealed main effect for suggestion (F (1,22) = 5.413, p = .012).

This demonstrates the power of hypnosis to unconsciously amplify the attentional filter, making
it more selective so that it can more successfully gate out irrelevant information.

Presenter: Fuerst, Annette

Strong with Tulani.

Annette Fuerst1.
1Fürst Class, Esselborn, Germany.

"Strong with Tulani" is a multisensoric crossmedia approach for children to help them getting
mentally and emotionally strong in an ever faster changing time and environment. Not only for
children that already have problems but also for children in school and kindergarden.

The little brown monkey Tulani serves as identifaction figure for the children and also as central
theme around different topics like social competence, self-esteem, illness, separation of the
parents.

The approach combines:

- Tulani as plush toy
- Stories including direct instructions for parents and other attachment figures
- Audio tracks of the stories and exercises
- Interactive videos
- A board game

This combination of different media is unique and completely new. Children nowadays face lots
of challenges and Tulani helps them to learn the necessary skills in a playful and easy way. At
the same time parents, teachers etc. get clear instructions without having to read lots of books.

Presenter: Fuerst, Annette

Hypnosis and mental training for refugees in Germany.

Annette Fuerst1.
1Fürst Class, Esselborn, Germany.

In 2015 many refugees came to Germany. Official authorities and lots of volunteers worked hand
in hand to manage the challenge. At the beginning the most important things were to find
housing, medical aid and the official steps for seeking asylum in Germany.

The much more challenging work has started now. Many refugees have psychological problems.
Some of them are traumatized, some of them show symptoms of depression or anxiety. There are
not enough therapists to cope with the number of patients.

And then there are the typical problems once you enter a different culture. Many questions arise:
How are the rules in Germany? How to be successful in school or at university? How can I cope
with uncertainty while waiting for the BAMF to decide on my asylum application?

Working with volunteers, translators and beeing the author of "Traumatisierten Flüchtlingen
helfen" ("Helping traumatized refugees - a guideline for volunteers and teachers, the foreword
written by Dr. Gunther Schmidt) I asked myself what else there could be done to help refugees to
cope with the challenges in Germany. First of all not all refugees are traumatized but may have
other psychological problems. As there are not enough therapists they have to wait a long time
for help. Secondly many refugees have great difficulties to admit they could have psychological
problems.

Working with hypnosis and mental training, I therefore decided to offer information on stress
management in different languages first. For many people it is easier to admit to themselves they
have problems with stress and stressmanagement and accept help there. The second step was to
find out which topics are the most important. Based on those topics it is now all about offering
mental training and hypnosis to help people on their way to a successful life in Germany.

The idea of this is not to replace therapy but to help people to reach their goal: Find a new home
in Germany and lead a successful life.

Presenter: Fuerst, Annette

Both at the same time: How to treat ambivalence.

Annette Fuerst1.
1Fürst Class, Esselborn, Germany.

"I would like to take better care of myself, but...." - Do you also often hear that sentence from
your clients? Stuck in the ambivalence trap - and sometimes it’s not only our clients...
The reasons they come up with are very good. Their arguments might even lead to the therapist
being caught in the same trap.

Torn between two sides - e.g. being "egoistic" or taking care of others. They think they have to
decide. Either one way or the other. Right or left. 0 or 100. Caught in their system of beliefs, they
try to solve the task to decide which way to go. Most of the time they choose to think it over and
over again without coming to a solution. In the end they even feel torn between thinking and
feeling.

What if there was a technique that provides the solution "both at the same time"? There is! In this
workshop I will show a hypnotherapeutic approach combining an ideomotoric approach with
time progression. There is no need to decide on one side! The ideomotoric component makes
allowance for the inner pace of our client. Therefore the unconscious sends the signal when to
start the time progression and experience a future with both aspects at the same time.

Presenter: Fukui, Yoshikazu

Relationship between conscious and nonconscious attitude toward hypnosis and

hypnotizability: Using single target implicit association test .

Yoshikazu Fukui1, Shin-ichi Oura2,3, Takahiro Imaida2, Tomomi Nakatani2.

1Department of Human Science, Konan University, Kobe, Japan; 2Graduate School of

Humanities, Konan University, Kobe, Japan; 3International and Psychological Support

Association, Osaka, Japan.

Introduction: It is well known that attitudes and images regarding hypnosis determine
hypnotizability. In fact, positive attitudes regarding hypnosis have a significant positive
correlation with hypnotizability. Furthermore, expectancies regarding what happens during
hypnosis also have a significant positive correlation with hypnotizability. However, the
correlation between the two variables is low. This could be because previous studies measured
hypnotizability experimentally as an objective behavioral indicator, whereas attitudes and images
regarding hypnosis have been measured using questionnaire surveys. Therefore, Fukui & Oura
(2016) developed a Single Target Implicit Association Test（ST-IAT） to measure
nonconscious attitudes regarding hypnosis and examined its reliability and validity. Results
suggested that even though many people consciously showed a positive attitude toward hypnosis,
most of them nonconsciously had negative attitudes. Then, Fukui & Oura (2017) examined the
correlation between nonconscious attitudes regarding hypnosis measured by using the hypnosis
ST-IAT. Results confirmed that there was a positive correlation between nonconscious attitudes
regarding hypnosis and hypnotizability.

Objectives: The purpose of this study is to examine the relationship between conscious and
unconscious attitudes regarding hypnosis and hypnotizability.
Method: Thirty-three university and graduate students (10 men and 23 women, Mean age 29.12
years, SD = 13.36) participated in the study. In order to measure hypnotic susceptibility, an
experiment was conducted using the Harvard Group Hypnosis Sensitivity Scale Form A. The
hypnosis ST-IAT was used to measure nonconscious attitudes towards hypnosis and the
questionnaire survey was conducted to measure conscious attitudes toward hypnosis.

Result: Scores of conscious and nonconscious attitudes toward hypnosis were calculated such
that the higher was the score, the more positive were attitudes regarding hypnosis and its
correlation with hypnotic susceptibility was examined. Results indicated that nonconscious
attitudes toward hypnosis had a moderately significant positive correlation with subjective and
objective experience scores of hypnotic susceptibility. In contrast, the correlation between
conscious attitude toward hypnosis and hypnotizability was not significant. There was also no
significant correlation between conscious and nonconscious attitude toward hypnosis.

Discussion: This study examined the relationship between conscious and nonconscious attitudes
toward hypnosis and hypnotizability. Results indicated that nonconscious attitudes toward
hypnosis measured by the ST-IAT predict hypnotizability to a certain extent, whereas conscious
attitudes toward hypnosis measured by questionnaires were not related to hypnotizability. These
findings suggest that it is inappropriate to use questionnaire surveys that might consciously
distort the attitudes toward hypnosis.

Presenter: Gagnon, Richard

L’utilisation des parties saines, compétentes et fonctionnelles du patient pour engager la

guérison d’ordre vital.

Richard Gagnon1.
1Clinique de Psychologie Cap-Rouge, Québec, QC, Canada.

La guérison d’ordre vital réfère avant tout aux résultats engendrés par la régulation naturelle de
l'organisme: un processus naturel dont les mécanismes d'action physiologiques et psychologiques
s’apparentent à ceux qui impulsent l’effet placébo. L'atelier se veut donc une activité
thérapeutique qui exploite ce volet d'intervention régulièrement laissez pour contre. Aussi, afin
de bien saisir les tenants et les aboutissants de cet alignement thérapeutique, le déroulement de
l'atelier s’inscrit comme suit :

Diffusion d’une vidéo démontrant la faculté intrinsèque de tout un chacun à bâtir de nouveaux
réseaux neuronaux ;

Présentation du cadre théorique visant à différencier la « guérison d’ordre mental » de la

«guérison d’ordre vital » ;

Établissement des mécanismes d’action qui dispose l’organisme à fabriquer

des «endomédicaments » ( à impulser l’effet placebo );
Présentation de l'hypnose d’accueil et d’acceptation impliquée dans l’opération voulant court-
circuiter les processus mentaux et la conduite d’évitement, afin d’exploiter la fenêtre
thérapeutique qui se présente dans la scène du corps au travers les manifestations sensorielles :
une démarche où « l’apaisement du flot de pensées », le « ne rien faire » et le « laisser faire »
servent les mécanismes d’action sous-jaçents à l’activité des parties saines, compétentes et
fonctionnelles engagées dans le processus du réaménagement .

Presenter: Garandeau, Olivier

De la trace à la transe: Au delà du dessin automatique, suivre la transe en auto et hétero-

hypnose.

Olivier Garandeau1.
1Finistère - France, Institut Milton H. Erickson de Quimper-Finistère, QUIMPER, France.

Comment se laisser entrer en transe et percevoir son rythme propre, sa danse intérieure, se laisser
porter et cheminer vers l'objectif attendu, soit accompagné, soit seul, en autohypnose, avec une
simple feuille et un simple crayon?

Bien plus que le simple dessin automatique: la "transe graphique"

Découvrir dans les méandres libres, se désintéressant vis-à-vis du résultat, une façon d'entrer
dans l'attente indéfinie, s'ouvrir aux possibles tout en gardant ce fil d'Ariane si utile à celui qui a
besoin d'être rassuré. S'autoriser à explorer ce monde de l'hypnose, en toute sécurité: pour le
quitter, apaisé, il suffit de relever le stylo, et lorsqu'on y retourne, c'est encore mieux.

L'auteur montrera des applications très concrètes en soin et guidera la pratique de ceux qui le
souhaiteront.

Cette méthode est également pour le soignant une façon extrèmement rapide et efficace
d'effectuer de l'autohypnose, notamment entre deux consultations: se soigner soi-même pour être
mieux auprès de nos patients.

Il s'agit aussi de développer, pour le patient comme pour le soignant, sa créativité en développant
ses ressources et ses perceptions.

Presenter: García de Sola, Adolfo

Hypnosis as a catalyst in group therapy of psychosis.

Adolfo García de Sola1.

1Mental Health Service, Valme Hospital (National Health System), Seville, Spain.
Although it has not been a widespread field, hypnosis has been used in many ways in the
treatment of psychosis, from its beginnings to the present day.

Specifically, we are going to comment on the usefulness of hypnosis and its knowledge
framework in a type of special psychotherapy that we have been developing for six years in a
Mental Health Center belonging to the National Health System of Spain.

Dealing with psychosis, more conventional psychotherapeutic approaches often do not have
much success and medication, but help, not get optimum results and causes significant side
effects. There seems to be support to the use and research in other therapies and treatments.

Methods that seek to alter the state of consciousness with a therapeutic purpose have a long and
extensive history throughout different cultures. Approaches have been very different, some more
discreet and others more spectacular, as well as the degree of deepening in the labor of trance
used for them.

On the other hand, therapeutic work with psychotic people needs a thorough knowledge of
psychopathology and a strong training in psychotherapy. Professional experience is essential.

In essence, we prefer better to talk about actions on the state of consciousness than only
hypnosis, because the field is wider. Our interventions are flexible, always following carefully
the development of the session, the suggestions of the patients or the rhythm they mark. It's very
important to hear the patients. Flexibility is essential.

There are some key recommendations to consider: for example, and for obvious reasons closely
related to paranoid symptoms, do not use prevailing orders, no require the patient to do
something without being able to resist the order. In my experience is better, on principle, to make
use of inductions related with relaxation instruction.

There are also some lines that help to open the way through other different states of
consciousness than ordinary, such talking about dreams or presented feelings when patient is
hallucinating or delirious, to recall situations in which you felt particularly well, getting in and
out of the induction, etc.

In this approach, the concept of 'dissociation' is fundamental for understanding and the
management of consciousness states and hypnosis as a healthy instrument.

Results are presented and discussed from the outlook of improvement and adaptation to the daily
life.

References:

1. García de Sola Márquez, A. Groupes pour patients psychotiques: des outils hypnotiques
adaptés. Hypnose et Thérapies Brèves. 2015; 37: 35-40.
2. García de Sola A. (2014). Communication and consciousness states: examples in a
psychotherapeutic group with psychotics, Proceedings of the 12th International Symposium
Communication in the Millennium, p. 426-445

Presenter: García de Sola, Adolfo

La creation d'un espace hypnotique de groupe.

Adolfo García de Sola1.

1Service de Santé Mentale, Hopital de Valme. Système National de Santé, Seville, Spain.

1. Présentation du rapporteur et les participants.

2. Début de la session par un processus d'induction
3. Explication des bases de fonctionnement des groupes et les outils utilisés.
4. Participation active et interaction avec les personnes qui assistent à l'atelier.
5. Résultats trouvés dans les groupes thérapeutiques
6. Conclusions et mise en commun
Depuis six ans, nous avons développé dans un service de santé mentale appartenant au système
de santé publique d'Espagne, une expérience de groupe basée sur le cadre conceptuel de
l'hypnose et les états de conscience en général.
Au cours de cette période, nous avons travaillé avec des personnes atteintes de psychose, près de
90% avec un diagnostic de schizophrénie. Les résultats montrent un grand intérêt.
En outre, depuis deux ans, nous avons appliqué ces paramètres aux personnes ayant un autre type
de diagnostic, essentiellement dysthymie et troubles de la personnalité.
L'atelier proposé est totalement expérientiel. Au cours du développement d'une séance
hypnotique de groupe, nous expliquerons et discuterons les bases de cette nouvelle approche.
Nous allons exposer les différentes techniques utilisées au courses de séances, donnant une
importance primordiale au processus d'induction, qui devient l'axe principal de nos interventions.
Nous allons expliquer et expérimenter les divers phénomènes hypnotiques qui conduisent à un
climat spécial où la communication interpersonnelle s'écoule de manière plus libre et plus
ouverte et dans laquelle la reconnaissance des différents niveaux de conscience qui se produisent
simultanément dans la vie quotidienn , améliore le sens de la liberté et rend plus facile de parler
de questions qui concernent le présent, le passé et un avenir possible
Souligner que le concept de «dissociation» est essentiel pour expliquer les actions que nous
faisons et notre façon de travailler vers l'amélioration.
Le développement d'une session de groupe à partir de la technique que nous présentons n'est
jamais le même que l'autre. Les gens ont la possibilité de garder les yeux fermés ou ouverts, de
se déplacer dans la pièce, d'interagir les uns avec les autres, de chanter, de rêver, etc. La seule
règle explicite au cours de la session est que lorsqu'une personne parle, les autres attendent de
finir ce qu'il dit et à y participer.
Au cours des dernières minutes de la séance, nous chercherons la participation active de ceux qui
ont participé à l'écoute de leurs opinions, propositions et expériences similaires.

References:
1. García de Sola, A. (2014). Communication and consciousness states: examples in a
psychotherapeutic group with psychotics, Proceedings of the 12th International Symposium
Communication in the Millennium , p. 426-445 Pdf file, CD.
2. García de Sola, A. (2015) Groupes pour patients psychotiques : des outils hypnotiques
adaptés. Hypnose et Thérapies Brèves, 37

Presenter: Garneau, Colette

Immigration choisie et enjeux émotionnels: Comment puis-je renaître en terre inconnue et

me reconnaître? Apprendre à mobiliser ses ressources d'intégration au coeur de ses
souvenirs racines.

Colette Garneau1.
1CITAC, PARIS, France.

L'immigration choisie comporte à la fois des découvertes et opportunités stimulantes mais aussi
des étapes de deuils. Le chroniqueur, animateur de télévision et humoriste québécois d'origine
sénégalaise Boucar Diouf disait de son arrivée et intégration au Québec "C'était dur... Car c'est
toutes tes références identitaires qui disparaissent. Tu vis une deuxième naissance, mais sans tes
parents pour t'accompagner". La pratique de l'hypnose et de l'auto-hypnose accompagne le
patient dans la transition et les nombreux changements auxquels il est confronté bien qu'il ait
choisi d'immigrer. Des témoignages vidéo permettront aux participants de découvrir différents
parcours, les difficultés rencontrées et les ressources personnelles mobilisées qui leur ont permis
de sortir d'un sentiment de division afin de se relier et de s'unifier. Québécoise d'origine, j'ai moi-
même choisi d'immigrer en France il y a 20 ans. Mon intervention se veut aussi un témoignage
de mon expérience personnelle et profesionnelle sur ce sujet.

Presenter: Giudicelli, Don-Pierrre

Hypnoanesthesie et monitoring de la fonction cérébrale au cours de la ponction d’ovocytes .

Don-Pierrre Giudicelli1, Sylvie Girardot1, Anne Durand1, Caroline Maudry1, Marine Ceja1,
Carine Vuillet1.
1Anesthesie, Clinique du Val d'Ouest, Ecully, France.

Introduction : L’hypnose est définie comme un état modifié de la conscience. Son utilisation est
de plus en plus large au bloc opératoire, De multiples études ont montré que la transe hypnotique
s’accompagnait de modifications du profil EEG. En anesthésie il est possible d’utiliser un
monitoring de la fonction cérébrale utilisant un algorithme permettant d’apprécier la profondeur
de l’anesthésie. Le but de cette étude était de déterminer l’effet de la transe hypnotique sur les
paramètres EEG au cours des ponctions d’ovocytes sous hypnosédation dans notre structure.

Patients et méthodes : Après accord du comité local d’éthique, les patientes volontaires pour
une Hypnoanesthesie pendant le prélèvement d’ovocytes sont soumises à une technique
hypnotique avec mesure simultanée des valeurs quantitatives du spectre EEG (Patient State
Index (PSI) moniteur Sedline MASIMO). Les valeurs sont enregistrées toutes les minutes avant
l’induction, pendant l’acte et jusqu’au réveil complet. Le sujet de la transe hypnotique est laissé à
l’appréciation de l’IADE réalisant cette induction en accord avec la patiente.

Le protocole anesthésique est identique pour toutes les patientes avec titration à la demande de
propofol et alfentanyl selon leurs réactions.

Nous comparerons les données du PSI avant induction, pendant la transe (valeur minimale
obtenue) et après réveil complet du sujet.

References:

1. Kissin l. Depth of anesthesia and bispectral index monitoring. Anesth Analg 2000
2. Effet de l’induction hypnotique sur l’évolution de l’index Bispectral chez l’adulte Honorine
Delivet, Myriam Bellon, Souhayl Dahmani Anesthésie, hôpital Robert-Debré, Paris,
J.anrea.2015.07
3. BIS monitor findings during self-hypnosis. Burkle CM1, J Clin Monit Comput. 2005
Dec;19(6):391-3. Epub 2006 Jan 25.
4. Faymonville M.-E., Maquet P., Laureys S. Comment l’hypnose agit sur le cerveau. La
Recherche n° 392, décembre 2005, p. 44

Presenter: Glazer, Dov

Opioid-free pain control systems and methods for dental practitioners.

Dov Glazer1.
1Dentistry, Touro Infirmary, New Orleans, LA, United States.

Description:

The primary factor in patient satisfaction with a dental practice is a pain free experience. Not
only psychologically and physically comfort during the office visit, but also postoperatively.
Thus the popularity of Opioids and other Class II and Class III narcotics. Pharmaceutical
companies have been promoted these drugs as safe, effective and non-addictive. But according
to the CDC, from 2000 to 2015 more than half a million people died from drug overdoses. 91
Americans die every day from an opioid overdose. In some cases, the first time patients received
a prescription for an opioid drug was from their dentist. Our profession is now addressing this
crisis. In this presentation you will learn about pain management methods and techniques that
are Opioid-free, safe, effective, and a natural boost to your professional relationship with your
patients.

Outline:

Background and stats of the Opioid crisis

The Gate Control Theory of Pain

Word sterilization - cleaning up “painful” vocabulary

The pain in the main is plainly in the brain

Patients don’t care how much you know, they want to know how much you care

Management of chronic orofacial pain, e.g TMJ disorders

Management of acute pain, e.g, toothache, herpetic lesion, extractions,

Five-minute relaxation exercise

Effective utilization of Nitrous Oxide

Pharmacology of the classes of pain medications

Preferred Peripherally-Acting Analgesics

Preferred Local anesthesia

Preferred CNS- acting analgesia

The value of experiencing pain

The tragedy of CIPA - Congenital Insensitivity to Pain with Anhidrosis

Effective pain management for the successful dental practice

References:

1. Dabney Ewin, MD
Presenter: Goldfus, Tobi

Charging up the "Inner Selfie": Using hypnotherapy to activate internal resource states
with young people for a healthy balance of social media/cyberspace use with connection in
real life.

Tobi Goldfus1,2,3,4,5.
1American Association of Clinical Hypnosis (ASCH), Professional Organization, Bloomingdale,

IL, United States; 2National Association of Social Workers, Professional Organization,

Washington, DC, United States; 3American Board of Examiners in Clinical Social Work,
National Credentialing Organization for Board Certified Diplomat, Marblehead, MA, United
States; 4Greater Washington Society for Clinical Social Work, Professional Organization,
Garrisonville, VA, United States; 5International Society of Hypnosis (ISH), Professional
Organization, Berwyn, PA, United States.

Social Media and cyberspace has become intricately woven into our daily lives (globally), where
many adolescents/young adults spend many absorbed hours every day. They often prefer to text,
scroll, troll, view, post and socialize online; over real life connections or time for unplugged self-
reflection. While many current studies are finding that excessive time online has been found to
increase smptoms of depression, anxiety, isolation and compulsive behaviors, studies also show
that healthy use and balance of social media/cyberspace comes from internal strengths (or a
strong Inner Selfie) and can reflect traits of resiliency required to meet life's challenges. This
workshop invites the online presence and experience into the therapeutic relationship from the
assessment stage to the end of treatment, using the Social Media Assessment Form, the 7 Stages
of Smart Phone Attachment, and the identification of developmental tasks and ego states being
practiced and mastered online. Online hypnotic phenomena and its strong pull challenges us to
create interventions that disrupt that trance yet embraces its presence and value. Techniques
focused on goals for healthy boundaries and ego states, such as the Inner Selfie Technique using
the young client's mobile device, short cyber-friendly "trancettes" (hypnosis) and other down-
regulating methods that meet the pace of the young cyber savvy client willl be presented. Digital
balance that reflect positive internal boundaries are supported and guided by the therapist's
understanding, support and acceptance of their cyberspace experience as they individuate and
mature in today's technological world. Experiential exercies, videos, case examples and
contrasting online and therapeutic hypnotic phenomena will be demonstrated.

References:

1. Goldfus, T (2017). From real life to cyberspace and back again: helping our young clients
develop a strong inner selfie (a clinician's guide). Zeig, Tucker & Theisen, Inc.
2. Turkle, S. (2015). Reclaiming conversation: the power of talk in a digital age. Penguin Press.
3. Underwood,M.& Ehrenreich, S.. (2017). The power and the pain of adolescents' digital
communication: cyber victimization and the perils of lurking. American Psychologist, 72 (2)
144-158.
4. Pells, R. (2017). Moderate use of social media 'builds' resilience and wellbeing in young
people, report suggests (education policy institute, UK).The Independent.

Presenter: Gomez, Bruno

Inception et métaphores imbriquées : Comment faire du changement une évidence .

Bruno GOMEZ1.
1AFEHM, CFHTB, Paris, France.

Objectifs : Stratégie thérapeutique : Faciliter le changement en installant d’abord les étapes de ce

changement puis secondairement les métaphores imbriquées facilitatrices lors des différentes
étapes d’une hypnose à « paliers » par inductions itératives (inception).

Contenu : Même quand il est rendu plus aisé à la suite d’une première action thérapeutique, le
changement est parfois difficile, entravé par la peur et l’inconfort temporaire qu’il induit.

Il est alors possible de faciliter ce changement en recourant à des « hypnoses dans l’hypnose »
qui permettront d’installer le changement comme une évidence avant même les métaphores
imbriquées permettant de lever la peur et l’inconfort.

Réalisable en une seule séance reproductible par enregistrement.

Presenter: Gomez, Bruno

Induire par saturation des sens (et éviter ainsi les difficultés du lâcher-prise).

Bruno GOMEZ1.
175, AFEHM (CFHTB), Paris, France.

EXPLICATION PREALABLE :

Beaucoup de nos patients sont dans la sécurité et le contrôle.

Ils sont donc souvent très inquiets d’une perte de ce contrôle et d’une prise de pouvoir par le
thérapeute lors de la séance d’hypnose.

Un quelconque « lâcher-prise » devient dès lors extrêmement difficile de leur part.

Après explication lors de l’entretien préalable, une saturation multi-sensorielle avec participation
active du patient permettra une induction sans détente ni relâchement préalable tout en évitant le
stress du lâcher-prise et de la perte de contrôle.
Ce n’est qu’après avoir atteint un état de « conscience élargi » que les suggestions permettront
d’installer de fait le relâchement et la détente.

La stabilisation pourra ensuite s’effectuer simplement par ancrage, permettant le déroulement

confortable et sécurisé de la partie thérapeutique de la séance.

En cas d’enregistrement de la séance, l’induction sera aisément réalisable par le patient en auto-
hypnose guidée.

SEANCE PRATIQUE DE DEMONSTRATION :

Démonstration d’une induction par saturation de trois sens, avec facilitation par positionnement,
synchronisation voix/respiration, modulation de tonalité vocale et ancrage.

EXERCICES PRATIQES PAR GROUPES DE 2 à 3 PERSONNES.

ECHANGES ET CONCLUSIONS

Presenter: Gorman, Maureen

The power of permission.

Maureen Gorman1.
1Psychology, Private Practice, Dartmouth, NS, Canada.

This workshop is part presentation, part discussion, and part experiential; giving participants an
opportunity (a) to learn the basic principles of Erickson's use of language, suggestions and
metaphor; (b) share experiences and offer additional "permission-granting" language; and (c) to
practice using and receiving the "power of permission".
Presenter: Gouin, Nicolas

La posture du magicien.

Nicolas Gouin1.
1Loire Atlantique, RIME44, REZE, France.

Pendant des années, l’hypnose à souffert d’un certain discrédit sur le plan scientifique. En dépit
de son efficacité, le caractère parfois mystique qu’elle dégageait la reléguait au mieux comme
une curiosité non scientifique au pire comme du charlatanisme pur et simple. Milton Erickson a
grandement contribué à redonner à l’hypnose ses lettres de noblesse.

Aujourd’hui, elle est reconnue par la communauté scientifique. Pourtant, les patients que l’on
croise restent fascinés par la dimension magique de l’hypnose (souvent beaucoup plus que par la
dimension scientifique). Ils connaissent généralement mieux Messmer (le fascinateur) que
Mesmer (le magnétiseur animal).

En bons ericksoniens, il peut nous sembler opportun de chercher à utiliser cette dimension
magique « culturelle » qui reste présente dans l’esprit de nos patients et assumer ainsi une
posture de magicien.

Avec néanmoins une certaine nuance: certains font de la magie « noire », nous nous faisons de la
magie « blanche »!

Je vous propose dans cet atelier de vous montrer qu’en « mettant en scène » des associations de
phénomènes hypnotiques, vous pouvez créer des techniques « sur mesure », adaptée à la
demande du patient, tout en ayant une dimension poétique, métaphorique, voire
d’émerveillement!

Il s’agit de jouer avec l’idée de magie qu’il y a en chacun de nous.

Imaginez un patient souhaitant résoudre un problème traumatique. Vous lui proposez en transe
une tâche hypnotique combinant (quasi) simultanément plusieurs phénomènes hypnotiques :
mouvements idéomoteurs, hallucinations kinesthésiques et distorsion temporelle par exemple…
A quoi est-ce que ça pourrait ressembler?

Un autre présente un vécu dépressif et vous l’amenez à vivre une expérience hypnotique
combinant progression dans le futur, écriture automatique et hallucinations visuelles.

Les possibilités sont infinies: elles ne dépendent plus que de votre imagination…

Je vous présenterez quelques techniques qui utilisent une succession de phénomènes hypnotiques
de façon stratégiques tout en assumant une dimension artistique et créative.

Ensuite vous pourrez essayer d’expérimenter ces techniques entre vous.

Et enfin, en connaissant le « truc du magicien », chacun pourra utiliser sa propre créativité pour
inventer ses propres techniques par association de phénomènes hypnotiques.

References:

1. John H. Edgette et Janet Sasson Edgette: manuel des phénomènes hypnotiques en

psychothérapie
2. Robin Battino, Thomas L. South: Les méthodes éricksoniennes
3. Milton H Erickson, L’intégrale des articles de Milton H Erickson sur l’hypnose, tome 1, de la
nature de l’hypnose et de la suggestion
4. Richard Crowley, Joyce Mills: Métaphores thérapeutiques pour les enfants et l’enfant intérieur

Presenter: Guilloux, Christine

Thérapie narrative, médecine narrative... Soi-même comme un autre ?.

Christine GUILLOUX1.
1IMHE Ile-de-France et SFH, Paris, France.

Des histoires, il en est de toutes les couleurs, celles de l'arc-en-ciel bien sûr et celles-là les poètes
savent les chanter, mais des vertes et des pas mûres, des grises et des noires sans oublier les
blanches...

Le patient s'absente, tourne en rond, englué dans les histoires familières, "dominantes", qu'il se
répète inlassablement, qu'il ressasse, rumine, regurgite... La Thérapie narrative de Michael
White, l'invite à les "externaliser", les dé-construire, s'en dés-identifier et à construire des
histoires alternatives... Il est une multitude d'histoires possibles à créer et des histoires préférées.

Des histoires, il en est en soi, dans sa vie, son parcours, ses épreuves. Récit de vie,
autobiographies, mais aussi fictions, oeuvres d'imagination. La vie est une histoire dont nous
sommes l'auteur.

L'étudiant en médecine applique des protocoles, recourant à de nombreuses technologies,

pratique une médecine de plus en plus basée sur des preuves, une médecine scientifique. La
Médecine narrative, impulsée par Rita Charon, l'invite à écouter le témoignage et l'expérience de
patients et à la retranscrire, à étudier des textes littéraires qui traitent de la maladie et du malade
et de l'approche de la mort et à développer une compétence narrative. Il est une multitude
d'histoires de la maladie et du malade à recueillir, à accueillir.

Des histoires, des récits pour quelle présence au monde ? La métaphore littéraire pour quelles
interactions ? Nous questionnerons l'identité narrative et explorerons les apports de la thérapie
narrative et de la médecine narrative à notre rôle et à nos pratiques d'hypnothérapeute.
1 – Présentation de l’identité narrative, des deux approches et de l'expérience de médecine
narrative à l'Université René Descartes, à Paris
2 – Débat avec la salle
3 – Exercices d’écriture inviduelle
4 – Commentaires et analyse « à la manière de » la médecine narrative
5 – Perspectives pour nos pratiques de soignants
6 – Références bibliographiques

References:

1. Rita Charon, La médecine narrative, Rendre hommage aux histoires de maladie

2. Collectif, François Goupy (sous la direction de), La médecine narrative

Presenter: Guler, Nazmine

Hypnosis efficacy for the prevention of anxiety during a coronary angiography .

Nazmine GULER1.
1Emergency Department, MERCY'S HOSPITAL, METZ, France, Metropolitan.

Brief Summary: The purpose of this study is to confirm the utility for hypnosis in the coronary
angiographic examination. The technique would be an alternative to prevent the consumption of
anesthesic drugs.

Methodology: Efficiency comparative study, randomized, simple-blind (angiography operator in

blind), mono-center, routine clinical care Only one medical check per patient.

Expected Benefits: Since the coronary angiography is an invasive procedure without general
anesthesia affecting a noble organ, this procedure could be anxiogenic and even psychologically
traumatic emergency. Not practice under general anesthesia prevents potential risks for the
patient, but anxiety, non-comfort and pain are existing. We think that hypnosis could improve
the patient care psychologically and physically and for any invasive procedure. In this case,
fewer or no sedative drugs and pain medication will be necessary, and it would decrease their
potential iatrogenesis, the patient care will be improved. It will be an alternative for patient to
decrease their drugs consumption.

Trial Duration: Expected study start: first semester of 2016 Inclusion duration: 12 months
Duration per patient: 1 mois Total study duration: 18 months (including the data analysis et the
report of results)

Primary objective: To compare the initial anxiety state before the coronary angiographic
performing scheduled for adults with no earlier coronary angiography, according to they will
undergo a hypnotic session or not before the examination, with posthypnotic suggestions of self-
hypnosis to make during the coronary angiography.
Secondary objective: To compare between the two groups of patients:

• the pain during and after the coronary angiography

• the hemodynamic factors heart rate, blood pressure before and after the examination
• the comfort of operator
• the use of sedative drugs, pain medication and local anesthesia
• the outbreak of major and minor complications

Presenter: Guler, Nazmine

Hypnosis in the closet. L'hypnose dans le placard.

Nazmine GULER1,2.
1Emergency Department, MERCY'S HOSPITAL, METZ, France, Metropolitan; 2Pain

department, MERCY'S HOSPITAL, METZ, France, Metropolitan.

Explanation of the different steps in creating a hypnosis consultation and brief therapies in a
public hospital where the director does not believe in hypnosis.What resources to use and what
not to do or do? Experience at Mercy Hospital in France.

Explication des différentes étapes dans la création d'une consultation d'hypnose et de thérapies
brèves dans un hôpital public où le directeur ne croie pas à l'hypnose. Quelles ressources utiliser
et les choses à ne pas faire ou faire? Experience at Mercy Hospital en France.

Présentation d'un tableau peint par une des patientes qui explique les conditions de consultation.

Presenter: Guler, Nazmine

Hypnosis in an emergency department: Less medication and saving time.

Nazmine GULER1, Sandrine WEBER1.

1Emergency Department, MERCY'S HOSPITAL, METZ, France, Metropolitan.

Practice of hypnosis in emergency and prehospital (in the ambulance) at the Center Hospitalier
Régional de Metz-Thionville since 2012 for the management of acute pain and stress, mainly
during the realization of technical gestures: sutures in The child and the adult, reduction of
articular dislocations, installation of thoracic drain, realization of lumbar puncture, installation of
peripheral venous catheter...
In pre-hospitalization, helps manage the stress of myocardial infarction during transport and
before the realization of coronary angiography, pain and stress for injured road ... and for all
acute pain.

In medical regulation at the Center 112, work on hypnotic communication.

A strong message transmitted to the annual congress of the French society of emergency
medicine supported by its president Professor Pierre-Yves Gueugniaud and also the president of
Samu-Urgences de France (urgent medical service), Dr François Braun, through a workshop
whose goal is to convince emergency physicians to train.

In 2017, the French Society of Emergency Medicine (SFMU) positioned itself and recommended
hypnosis as a complementary technique in Emergency Care with recommendations writing.

In the emergencies, the practice of hypnosis is facilitated by the reduction of the resistances of
the patients, technique quick and easy to implement.

It brings a well-being to the patients and a better comfort to the emergency doctor in his daily
work.

Presenter: Hartman, Woltemade

Body trance: A combined hypno-somatic approach with traumatized clients.

Woltemade Hartman1.
1Psychology, University of Johannesburg, Johannesburg, South Africa.

It is a known fact that trauma causes internal chaos created when a devastating moment is frozen
in time. It impedes psychological growth and it disconnects us from ourselves and others. When
overwhelmed by threat and despair, we are frozen in fear and our instinctive survival energies
are “all dressed up with no place to go”. Although humans, like animals, possess regulatory
systems to cope with trauma, these systems are often overridden by neo-cortical inhibition. In
humans this restraint leads to the formation of a constellation of symptoms, including
dissociation as a defense mechanism, pain, patterns of cognitive dysfunction, anxiety responses
and an overall sense of intrusion and despair. In this workshop the focus will be placed on ways
how to allow the highly aroused survival energies bound up in traumatized individuals to be
discharged and completed by combining hypnosis and the somatic experiencing approach to
trauma resolution. Ways how to prevent and resolve traumatic symptoms and how to recreate
rebalance, self-regulation, wholeness, coherence and “flow” will be demonstrated through live
demonstrations

Presenter: Hubert, Gil

Prise en charge précoce par hypnose d’un syndrome de seconde victime après une erreur
d’injection en salle de réveil.

Gil Hubert1.
1service anesthésie, CH Oloron, Oloron, France.

En anesthésie, la culture sécuritaire a pour but d’éviter des incidents au cours de la prise en
charge des patients avec en particulier des check-list.

Malgré toutes ces précautions, des erreurs médicales surviennent encore, souvent après un
enchainement de dysfonctionnements. L’équipe soignante va alors tout faire pour éviter un
dommage chez le patient ; et elle y arrive souvent.

Mais parallèlement à cela, les soignants impliqués dans ces événements peuvent être traumatisés
et développer un syndrome de seconde victime[1][2][3].

L’hypnose, dans l'esprits de soignants, est un outil indispensable pour améliorer la prise en
charge des patients.

A propos d’un cas clinique, nous allons illustrer que l’hypnose peut aussi être utile pour la prise
en charge d’un soignant, devenu patient, en souffrance aiguë, après une situation de soin ayant
généré un stress majeur et un syndrome de seconde victime.

References:

1. Wu medical error the second victim BMJ 2000

2. Scott qual saf health care 2009
3. Arzalier-daret anesth reanim 2016

Presenter: Ivanova, Anastasia

To give birth easily and naturally? Synergistic effect of interaction between hypnosis,
psychology and medicine in preparation for birth.

Anastasia Ivanova1.
1
psychology, Perinatal Medical Centre, Moscow, Russian Federation.

This practical work-shop is the result of the experience we obtained while working with 600
pregnant women (trained individually and in groups) and teaching the basics of hypnosis to 150
doctors and midwives in Russia.

There will be 3 parts of the workshop. In the first part, we will present some statistical results of
our work and discuss the methodical aspects of preparing pregnant women using hypnosis. At
the moment, our method of preparation for childbirth helps the vast majority of women to have
nonmedicated birth: as a result of attending our classes, 88% of women do not use epidural
anaestesia, 92 % women have natural vaginal birth (8% end up with c-section), 89 % give birth
without use of syntethic oxytocyn. These results are impressive as compared to the world rate of
medical interventions which is twice or three times higher in every section. We will analyze
these results and discuss all the aspect of our hypnotherapeutic work which helps women.

In the second part, the participants will have the opportunity to learn and practice some hypnotic
tools for assessing the level of preparation for childbirth and motivation for natural childbirth as
well as hypnotic ways to identify and overcome the fear of childbirth.

In the third part, we will discuss the 3 most frequent complications which usually require the use
of medical intervention: the acute untolerable pain, discoordinated labour activity and failure to
progress. We will analyze the causes of these complications and present a few practical
techniques that will help to cope with them by the use of hypnosis or, in rare cases, in
combination with a small dose of medications.

Some video demonstrations will be included in our workshop.

References:

1. Ginsburg Michael

Presenter: Ivanova, Anastasia

Hypnobirth: Using synergy of hypnosis, psychology and medicine in preparation for non-
medicated birth.

Anastasia Ivanova1.
1psychology, Perinatal Medical Centre, Moscow, Russian Federation.

This lecture is the result of the experience we obtained while working with 600 pregnant women
(trained individually and in groups) and teaching the basics of hypnosis to 150 doctors and
midwives in Russia.

We will present some statistical results of our work and discuss the methodical aspects of
preparing pregnant women using hypnosis. At the moment, our method of preparation for
childbirth helps the vast majority of women to have nonmedicated birth: as a result of attending
our classes, 88% of women do not use epidural anaestesia, 92 % women have natural vaginal
birth (8% end up with c-section), 89 % give birth without use of syntethic oxytocyn. These
results are incredible as compared to the world rate of medical interventions which is twice or
three times higher in every section. We will analyze these results and discuss all the aspect of our
hypnotherapeutic work which helps women.
Presenter: Jean, Françoise

Auto hypnose énergétique.

Françoise JEAN1.
1Rhône, Imelyon, Lyon, France.

Les émotions sont ressenties et vécues à travers le corps.

Prendre conscience de son ressenti corporel permet d’agir sur celui-ci et de libérer les blocages
émotionnels enfouis dans les tensions internes.

L’hypnose est un outil particulièrement adapté dans l'approche psychosomatique, par son action
au niveau du corps et de l’esprit.

Dans cet atelier, nous aborderons les liens entre émotions, ressentis corporels, tensions
musculaires et blocages énergétiques.

Nous verrons comment utiliser l‘autohypnose pour libérer ces blocages, avec une approche
simple par le corps.

Les mouvements idéomoteurs seront détaillés afin de favoriser la compréhension du processus

hypnotique.

Par l’apprentissage de techniques simples d’hypnose énergétique, nous pouvons offrir à nos
patients, enfants, adultes ou personnes âgées, un mieux-être corporel modifiant ainsi le vécu
douloureux de leur situation physique ou psychique.

Ces techniques peuvent s’appliquer autant en ville qu’à l’hôpital.

Presenter: Jensen, Mark

Listening for effective hypnotic suggestions: Using open questions and reflective listening to
boost treatment efficacy .

Mark Jensen1.
1Rehabilitation Medicine, University of Washignton, Seattle, WA, United States.

This workshop will provide a description and demonstration of a strategy for identifying
effective hypnotic suggestions for helping clients more effectively achieve their treatment
goals. It will begin with a brief presentation of research findings demonstrating the central role
that client’s “self-talk” (i.e., self-suggestions) plays in facilitating or suppressing goal
attainment. The facilitator will then demonstrate the use of two strategies (open questions and
reflective listening) to identify the helpful self-suggestions (to be nurtured) and less than helpful
self-suggestions (to be gently altered). Participants will then be encouraged to practice the
strategies to increase their confidence in being able to use the technique in their practice.

Presenter: Jensen, Mark

The role of brain activity in symptom management: Enhancing response to self-hypnosis

training .

Mark Jensen1.
1
Rehabilitation Medicine, University of Washignton, Seattle, WA, United States.

Introduction and objectives: Evidence indicates that brain oscillations – in particular theta
oscillations – play a role in response to hypnosis. The purpose of this pilot study was to evaluate
the possibility that two interventions hypothesized to increase slower brain oscillations (e.g.,
theta) may enhance the efficacy of hypnosis treatment.

Methods: Thirty-two individuals with multiple sclerosis and chronic pain, fatigue, or both, were
randomly assigned to one of two interventions thought to increase slow wave activity
(mindfulness meditation or neurofeedback training) or no enhancing intervention, and then given
five sessions of self-hypnosis training targeting their presenting symptoms. As this was a pilot
study not powered to detect statistically significant effects, an a priori cutoff of a medium effect
size or larger was used to identify trends warranting further investigation in future research.

Results: Both mindfulness meditation training and neurofeedback designed to enhance theta
oscillations showed trends for enhancing the benefits of hypnosis treatment over and above the
effects of hypnosis alone, although the two treatments appeared to enhance difference outcomes
(e.g., mindfulness enhanced the effects of hypnosis on pain acceptance, neurofeedback enhanced
the effects of hypnosis on pain and sleep quality). Mindfulness and neurofeedback training had
different effects on brain oscillations.

Conclusions: The findings support the potential for both neurofeedback and mindfulness to
enhance response to hypnosis treatment. Research using larger sample sizes to determine the
generalizability of these findings is warranted.

Presenter: Jiang, Yanfei

Hypnotic regulation of overgenerality of autobiographical memory in depressed

individuals.
Yanfei Jiang1, Aibao Zhou1.
1School of Psychology, Northwest Normal University, Gansu Lanzhoy, People's Republic of

China.

Abstract introduction: Autobiographical memory is an individual’s memory their own life

events, and has been proved to be accompanied by a warm, intimate emotion at the time of
extraction. It is the basis of self-building to maintain or change the self. Depressed individuals
often find it impossible to describe situations with self-related memory, and their rate of memory
retrieval is relatively slow, exhibiting overgenerality. The overgenerality of autobiographical
memory is a relatively stable cognitive feature of depressed patients. Following simple
antidepressant treatment, memory overgenerality does not recover despite remission or cure of
depressive symptoms. When combined with psychotherapy, however, to treat depressive
symptoms, the overgenerality phenomenon of depressed individuals can be improved
simultaneously. objectives: The study sought to explore the regulation effect of hypnosis on the
overgenerality of autobiographical memory for depressed individuals in order to find a more
flexible and diversified treatment. methods: A total of 58 university students voluntarily
participated in the study after providing informed consent. Of the participants, 34 were
depressed, with an average age of 19.85 ± 1.13 years and Beck Depression Inventory (BDI) (13
items) score > 7 and 24 were healthy with an average age of 20.37 ± 1.27 years and BDI (13
items) score < 4. No other physiological or psychological issues were involved. methods: In this
study, the experimental and control group were consecutively designed and tested. Group
hypnosis intervention was performed on both groups of participants, and the rate and content of
autobiographical memory were measured before and after the hypnosis. Finally, 20 university
students who participated in the study were briefly interviewed. The Williams AMT paradigm
was selected to measure the rate and content of autobiographical memory with 15 emotional clue
words (5 positive, 5 negative, and 5 neutral words). The Harvard Group Scale of Hypnotic
Susceptibility, Form A (HGSHS-A) (Chinese version) was used to test the hypnotic
suggestibility of the two groups. results: The study found that for both groups, the memory recall
rate was significantly faster after hypnosis（F（1，55）=10.52，p<0.001，η2=0.161）. The
specificity scores of the healthy students before hypnosis were significantly higher than those
after hypnosis（p<0.01）, while the difference in specificity scores was not significant for
depressed participants（p >0.05）; the specificity scores of positive emotions before hypnosis
were significantly higher than after（p<0.01）, while for neutral emotions and negative
emotions, this difference was not significant （p >0.05）. Among the 58 participants, 3 were
high-suggestive individuals and the remaining 55 were low-suggestive. A total of 15 depressed
university students indicated in the interview that they could easily enter the hypnotic state and
that they felt relaxed during the memory test after hypnosis and found it easier to retrieve
memory. conclusion: Studies have shown that hypnosis can effectively regulate the retrieval rate
of autobiographical memory in depressed individuals, meaning that depressed individuals can
quickly extract their own relevant scene memory under hypnotic regulation. In the regulation
process of autobiographical memory, hypnotic suggestibility has relatively small impact on
individuals, meaning that individuals with low hypnotic suggestibility can also rapidly extract
their own relevant scene memory under hypnotic regulation. Keywords: Hypnosis, Depression,
Autobiographical memory, Overgenerality, Adjust

References:
1. Williams, J., Healy, H. G. and Ellis, N. C. (1999). The effect of imageability and predicability
of cues in autobiographical memory. The Quarterly Journal of Experimental Psychology: Section
A, 52(3), 555-579.
2. Williams, J. M. and Broadbent, K. (1986). Autobiographical memory in suicide attempters.
Journal of abnormal psychology, 95(2), 144.
3. Williams, J. M. G., Barnhofer, T., Crane, C., Herman, D., Raes, F. and Watkins, E., et al.
(2007). Autobiographical memory specificity and emotional disorder. Psychological Bulletin,
133(1), 122-148.
4. Williams, J. M. G., Barnhofer, T., Crane, C., Herman, D., Raes, F. and Watkins, E., et al.
(2007). Autobiographical memory specificity and emotional disorder. Psychological Bulletin,
133(1), 122-148.
5. Balocchi, R., Paoletti, G., Santarcangelo, E. L., Scattina, E., Sebastiani, L., Macerata, A.,
Varanini, M. (2008). Hypnotizability dependent autonomic modulation during a low attentional
task. Computers in Cardiology, 35, 973-976
6. Balocchi, R., Paoletti, G., Santarcangelo, E. L., Scattina, E., Sebastiani, L., Macerata, A.,
Varanini, M. (2008). Hypnotizability dependent autonomic modulation during a low attentional
task. Computers in Cardiology, 35, 973-976
7. De, B. G. (2015). Neural mechanisms of hypnosis and meditation. Journal of Physiology-Paris
8. Demertzi, A., Vanhaudenhuyse, A., Noirhomme, Q., Faymonville, M. E., Laureys, S. (2015).
Hypnosis modulates behavioural measures and subjective ratings about external and internal
awareness. Journal of Physiology-Paris
9. Menicucci, D., Ghelarducci, B., Santarcangelo, E. L. (2007). Role of relaxation and specific
suggestions in hypnotic emotional numbing. International Journal of Psychophysiology Official
Journal of the International Organization of Psychophysiology, 63(1), 125-132

Presenter: Jourdren, Jeanne-Marie

Revenir à l'essentiel, le corps, pour cheminer sur le chemin de la vie.

Jeanne-Marie Jourdren1.
1Cabinet Libéral, Lannion, France, Metropolitan.

Le corps traduit toute notre histoire et peut-être bien au delà. Il reflète toutes nos capacités et
toutes nos émotions. La façon dont nous bougeons est la fidèle traduction de notre monde
intérieur. La fluidité du mouvement n’est que le signe d’une souplesse de notre monde intérieur.

Le corps ne connait pas la temporalité. Il a acquis des compétences sensitives, motrices et

émotionnelles tout au long de la vie. Chacun réalise ses compétences à sa façon, chacun le fait à
son rythme même si à chaque étape de vie, certaines acquisitions sont essentielles. Le
développement sensori-moteur est plus précoce chez certains mais si le système sensoriel et
moteur est efficient, tout le monde acquiert les mêmes compétences à quelques variations près.

Plus les expériences seront variées et émotionnellement bien vécues, plus les compétences seront
ancrées corporellement et accessibles à tout moment de la vie.
La posture, les mains et la voix traduisent à merveille les trésors de notre monde intérieur.
Comme tous trésors, certains sont bien cachés. Parfois, après un traumatisme, le patient ne peut
les trouver seul. Un thérapeute peut être parfois bien utile pour l’accompagner.

Les mains et les pieds ont une fonction essentielle pour apprendre ou recommencer à avancer sur
le chemin de vie. Parce qu’ils nous relient au monde extérieur, ils sont de précieux outils pour
catalyser les ressources sensorielles et motrices indispensables à l’évolution sur ce chemin.

Connaitre et activer les fonctions sensorielles et motrices spécifiques des mains et des pieds
permet d’aider nos patients à retrouver la force et l’équilibre pour continuer d’avancer.

L’atelier présente des techniques corporelles alliant exercices d’hypnose et de motricité. Simple
d’utilisation, elles peuvent trouver des applications dans de nombreux cadres thérapeutiques.
Chaque participant pourra se les approprier à sa manière, les utiliser selon son inspiration et sa
créativité.

Presenter: Józsa, Emese

Long lasting beneficial effects of hypnosis on the the quality of life and post-traumatic
growth of intermediate and high risk breast cancer patients: Results of an evidence based
research.

Emese Józsa1, Orsolya Zsigmond2, Éva I. Bányai1.

1Department of Affective Psychology, Eötvös Loránd University, Budapest,

Hungary; 2Behavioural Psychology PhD Program, Eötvös Loránd University, Budapest,

Hungary.

Although studies demonstrate that hypnosis improves the quality of life of cancer patients, a
longitudinal study of its effect is still lacking.

The aim of the present paper is to show that hypnosis administered during chemotherapy and
blood tests to intermediate and high risk breast cancer patients can have a long lasting beneficial
effect on the quality of life (QOL) and post traumatic growth (PTG) of patients, even years after
the end of the intervention.

In a randomized, controlled study (see Bányai et al’s paper in details), the QOL of 3 groups of
patients (listening to 1. hypnosis or 2. music; 3. not listening to hypnosis or music) was measured
by the WHOQOL-100 questionnaire after the surgery, at the end of the two phases of
chemotherapy and at 12, 24 and 36 month follow up.

The results show, that although there was no significant difference between the groups before
chemotherapy, during the intervention phase patients of both the hypnosis and music groups
showed more dynamic changes in the QOL than those of the control group without intervention.
In spite of the evident negative effects of chemotherapy on the QOL of cancer patients, in the
intervention groups we detected positive changes as well already after the first phase of
chemotherapy. These positive changes, however, did not prove to be long lasting in case of the
music group, since after the 12 month follow they almost disappeared. In the light of this it is all
the more striking, that at the 36 month follow up patients of the hypnosis group still judged their
general health and quality of life significantly better, than at the first measurement point. This
long lasting beneficial effect of hypnosis on QOL seems to be related to a marked PTG of
patients. PTG was measured by theoretical content analysis of patients’ psychological interviews
(at the end of chemotherapy treatment and at 36 month follow up) and with the post traumatic
growth questionnaire of Tedeschi and Calhoun. Both measures of PTG show the beneficial effect
of hypnosis on a long run.

We can conclude that hypnosis has a beneficial effect in breast cancer patients not only
immediately after its administration, but its positive suggestions can become internalized and
cause a post traumatic growth, resulting in a better quality of life even years after the end of the
intervention.

The research was supported by the Hungarian Scientific Research Fund (OTKA K 109187).

Presenter: Jung, Anita

Melodic Rhythms of your Heart: Attuning by Tuning Mind and Body.

Anita Jung1,2,3.
1Approved Consultant, American Society of Clinical Hypnosis, Austin, TX, United

States; 2Counseling and Consultaton, Jung Wellness Institute, Austin, TX, United States; 3Board
Member, Central Texas Society of Clinical Hypnosis, Austin, TX, United States.

Music and rhythm find their way into the secret places of the soul. – Plato

The Greek philosopher Pythagoras was among the first to recognize the healing powers of
music. Milton Erickson, the musician of mind, body and soul, was the first to structure
communication for greatest effect so that clients could change many aspects of their life, not
merely their presenting symptoms. Just as the cadence of voice and patterns of speech form the
music of Ericksonian communication, repetition and rhythm create the emergence of a trance
state in music, film, and in poetry. The utilization of all three within a hypnotherapy model
functions as a catalyst accentuating the nuances of seeding, guiding associations, deepening
trance, shifting perceptions, and inspiring change. In a combination of Ericksonian concepts
giftwrapped in landscapes of music, poetry, and film participants will master how to interrupt
and transform symptomatic states to create memorable and mindful resilience. Methods for
discovering, recognizing, and utilizing rhythmic components inherent in hypnotherapeutic
processes will enhance the participant’s self-awareness and guide the client’s awareness towards
healing and positive expectancy of outcomes. Participants will explore how to invite dissonance
and harmony to assist clients in making the right decisions for their life in any given moment.
Through lecture, experiential techniques, video and audio vignettes participants will experience
how to change perceptions, transform symptomatic states, understand how to isolate the
functions of music to intensify hypnotic sensations, and how to use rhythm as a communication
tool to guide associations and deepen trance. The latest research will examine the role of
epigenetics, the link between melody and the mind that suggests that listening to and playing
music alters how our brains, and therefore our bodies, function.

These ideas and practices are relevant in a variety of healthcare environments. The presenter’s
primary clinical experience has been in private and community outpatient settings dealing
primarily with behavioral health, psychiatric services, performance and spiritual enhancement,
and chronic pain challenges.

References:

1. • Conrad, C., Niess H., Jauch K., Bruns C., Hartl W., Welker L. (2007). Overture for Growth
hormone: requiem for interlukin-6. Crit Care Med.
2. • Stanford University Medical Center (2007, August 5). Music Moves Brain To Pay Attention,
Study Finds. ScienceDaily. Retrieved April 29, 2008, from http://www.sciencedaily.com¬
/releases/2007/08/070801122226.htm
3. • Limb, C.J., Braun, A. (2008). Neural Substrates of Spontaneous Musical Performance: An
fMRI Study of Jazz Improvisation. PLoS ONE 3(2): e1679.
4. Zeig, J.K. (2006). Confluence: The Selected Papers of Jeffrey K. Zeig. Volume I. Phoenix,
AZ: Zeig, Tucker, & Theisen, Inc.
5. Iacoboni, M., (2008) Mirroring People: The New Science of How We Connect with Others.

Presenter: Jung, Anita

Soulful explorations with hypnosis and live music.

Anita Jung1,2,3, Oliver Rajamani2.

1Approved Consultant, American Society of Clinical Hypnosis, Austin, TX, United

States; 2Counseling and Consultaton, Jung Wellness Institute, Austin, TX, United States; 3Board
Member, Central Texas Society of Clinical Hypnosis, Austin, TX, United States.

Music and rhythm find their way into the secret places of the soul. – Plato

Experiential opportunity to deepen your learning, tune in to a state of comfort and well-being,
and participate in a musical trance journey. The central theme for this musical, hypnotherapeutic
induction centers around accessing a deeper state of consciousness, cultivating mindful
awareness, and rejuvenating your mind, body and soul. Your exploration into your inner,
constantly changing reality during a state of deep trance allows you to connect to inner vibrations
and find a still point within yourself while evoking inspirational landscapes, sounds, and images.
This demonstration includes live music with various instruments played by Oliver Rajamani, a
renowned international Music and rhythm find their way into the secret places of the soul. –
Platomusician and performer whose music has been influenced and inspired by elements of folk,
nomadic, and spiritual traditions of India, the Middle East, and Texas. Accessing deep states of
consciousness with music as an active participant plays an important role on this journey.

The demonstration is designed to allow new practitioners of hypnosis to experience a trance state
in a safe setting while being motivated to explore current perceptions and gaining a new
understanding of how hypnosis can be utilized. Experienced practitioners of hypnosis are invited
to invite a deep state of trance and experience first-hand on how to utilize music as an active tool
to induce various states of consciousness.

References:

1. • Conrad, C., Niess H., Jauch K., Bruns C., Hartl W., Welker L. (2007). Overture for Growth
hormone: requiem for interlukin-6. Crit Care Med.
2. • Stanford University Medical Center (2007, August 5). Music Moves Brain To Pay Attention,
Study Finds. ScienceDaily. Retrieved April 29, 2008, from http://www.sciencedaily.com¬
/releases/2007/08/070801122226.htm
3. • Limb, C.J., Braun, A. (2008). Neural Substrates of Spontaneous Musical Performance: An
fMRI Study of Jazz Improvisation. PLoS ONE 3(2): e1679.

Presenter: Kaiser, Pamela; Kohen, Daniel

Designing state-of-the-art hypnosis trainings: Remodeling curriculum and refining faculty

development.

Pamela Kaiser1,3, Daniel P. Kohen MD, FAAP, ABMH2,3.

1Former Associate Clinical Professor, Pediatrics, University of California, San Francisco,

Medical School, San Francisco, CA, United States; 2Professor of Pediatrics (Retired), University
of Minnesota, Minneapolis, MN, United States; 3Co-Founders & Co-Directors, U.S. National
Pediatric Hypnosis Training Institute (NPHTI), Minneapolis, MN, United States.

This workshop is designed for attendees interested in creating a freshened, more dynamic, and
“cutting edge” hypnosis training curriculum. Using a handout-checklist, you will put together a
practical outline for creating innovative curricular modifications in format, structure, and content
in order to maximize learners’ confidence in integrating hypnosis skills into their work. For your
consideration, a methodology for a remodeled curriculum and a plan for refining faculty
development will be offered. This design approach is based on the eight-year experience of the
of the U.S. National Pediatric Hypnosis Training Institute (NPHTI). The presenters, Dr. Kaiser
and Dr. Kohen, are the co-founders and co-directors of NPHTI.

Specific areas to be described and demonstrated include: 1) the application of current adult and
social-learning research and practices for targeted experiential large and small group learning
shown to maximize adult learning, memory, and attitudinal change, 2) examples of state-of-the-
art design principles for visual presentations and incorporation of faculty clinical video-
recordings, 3) individualized learning choices and emphasis on personalized, goal-oriented
sessions, 4) incorporation of Erickson’s and Yapko’s perspectives into the curriculum, 5)
utilization of evaluations by part icipants and faculty, and 6) advances in faculty selection and
ongoing faculty development.

Presenter: Kaiser, Pamela

Pediatric spontaneous hypnosis and self-regulation metaphors via play materials and
milieu objects .

Pamela Kaiser1,2.
1Former Associate Clinical Professor, Pediatrics, University of California Medical School, San

Francisco, CA, United States; 2Co-founder & Co-director, U.S. National Pediatric Hypnosis
Training Institute, Minneapolis, MN, United States.

Children and teens are often uncomfortable with formal conversation in therapy. They are more
likely to engage in a more casual, relaxed, easy-going ambience where therapeutic
communication oscillates with dabbling with play materials. In contrast to toys as digression
from therapy, a carefully conceived collection of toys and room (milieu) objects can facilitate a
child’s narrowed absorption and imagination, thus, becoming vehicles for spontaneous
hypnosis. Further, the creation of metaphors is a convenient, dynamic and resourceful extension
of such play materials.

Dr. Kaiser, a clinical psychologist, pediatric nurse practitioner, and developmental specialist has
incorporated hypnosis with her work with children and teens in a variety of health settings for
thirty years. She has designed this highly practical, interactive, and fun workshop which will
focus on facilitating spontaneous hypnosis and developing metaphors for self-regulation through
the use of carefully chosen play materials and office objects. Following an overview of pediatric
self-regulation and types of metaphoric vehicles, the workshop will emphasize skill development
in “milieu metaphors”, i.e. an innovative method of designing hypnotic metaphors that
incorporate the distinctive features of toys and objects within a clinical setting.

Multiple examples of therapist- and child-generated transformative metaphors will be

demonstrated via toys, case vignettes, videos, and drawings. Attendees will also enjoy dynamic
and collaborative learning through various experiential activities intended to build their
creativity, confidence, and competence with these techniques. Everyone is also invited to bring a
trance-inducing toy or object and briefly describe its’ potential as a therapeutic metaphor. A
resource list of toys will be provided.

References:

1. Kaiser, P. (2011). Childhood anxiety, worry and fear: Individualizing hypnosis goals and
suggestions for self-regulation. American Journal of Clinical Hypnosis, 54: 16 - 31.
2. Kaiser, P. (2014). Childhood anxiety and psychophysiologial reactivity: Hypnosis to build
discrimination and self-regulations skills. American Journal of Clinical Hypnosis : 56: 4: 343-
367.

Presenter: Kasos, Eniko

Altered state of consciousness: Comparing active-alert hypnosis and sport.

Eniko Kasos2, Krisztian Kasos2, Emese Józsa1, Attila Szabó3, Katalin Varga1.
1Department of Affective Psychology, Institute of Psychology, Eötvös Lorand University,

Budapest, Hungary; 2Doctoral School of Psychology, Institute of Psychology, Eötvös Lorand

University, Budapest, Hungary; 3Institute of Health Promotion and Sport Sciences, Eötvös
Loránd University, Budapest, Hungary.

Introduction: Altered state of consciousness (ASC) is a basic state of the human experience [1], it
can be elicited during hypnosis and occur in a wide range of situations spontaneously for
example during physical activity. The flow or zone experience has been associated with sport,
and described with similar characteristics as the ASC achieved during hypnosis. Several studies
showed that athletes performed significantly better, when experiencing flow but even if one does
train to compete experiencing “the zone” results in an energized focus and enjoyment[2]. Better
understanding ASC during active-alert hypnosis is important in itself, but comparing it with sport
as opposed to traditional hypnosis can highlight the influence of the hypnotic induction and how
movement and physical activity affects subjective experience.

Method: The present study examined the altered state of consciousness of four groups:1)
participants of individual active-alert hypnosis (as the control for the altered state), 2)
participants of a spinning class, 3) solitary runners and 4) university students during class acting
as control for the waking state), with the use of Pekala’s Phenomenology of Consciousness
Inventory[3]. The study compared the participants’ experiences on the 5 subscales of the PCI
most commonly associated with ASC, altered experience, altered state of awareness, rationality,
self-awareness and volitional control.

Results: When comparing altered experience and altered state of awareness, scores of the groups
running, spinning and active-alert hypnosis were significantly different than the control condition
(p<.001), which suggests, that there is an ASC experienced during sport. The influence of the
hypnotic induction is emphasized by the results on the following two subscales. Runners scored
higher in the rationality subscale than both the control and the active-alert condition, while
spinners scored higher than the active-alert condition (p<.001). The active-alert group scored
lower than all other groups on self-awareness (p<.001). On the volitional control subscale, the
active-alert and the running condition did not differ significantly, but the spinning and the
control group scored significantly higher (p<.001), which might be the result of differences in the
individual versus group setting.

Discussion: Participants’ subjective experience showed that ASC achieved during hypnosis
differed in certain characteristics from experiences during sport activity. This highlights the
importance of hypnotic induction and offers a better understanding of active-alert hypnosis.
Results also indicate that participants can achieve ASC during physical activity and one does not
have to be an athlete to experience it. These results are significant, because it can influence how
athletes train and prepare for competitions as well as it should impact how trainers communicate
especially during active training.

References:

1. Farthing, G. W. (2008). Módosult tudatállapotok. In É. I. Bányai & L. Benczúr (Eds.), A

hipnózis és hipnoterápia alapjai. (pp. 149–167). Budapest: ELTE Eötvös Kiadó, Budapest,.
2. Csikszentmihalyi, M. (1990). Flow. The psychology of optimal experience.
3. Pekala, R. J., Steinberg, J., & Kumar, V. K. (1986). Measurement of phenomenological
experience: Phenomenology of Consciousness Inventory. Perceptual and Motor Skills, 63, 983–
989. https://doi.org/10.2466/pms.1986.63.2.983

Presenter: Kasos, Krisztian

Electrodermal laterality and hypnosis.

Krisztian Kasos1,2, Eniko Kasos1,2, Szabolcs Zimonyi2, Andras Kolto2, Katalin Varga2, Anna
Szekely2.
1Doctoral School of psychology, Eötvös Loránd University, Budapest, Hungary; 2 Institute of

Psychology, Eötvös Loránd University, Budapest, Hungary.

Unilateral measures of electrodermal activity traditionally yield inconclusive and contradictory

results in hypnosis research[1][2][3][4]. With a few exceptions, bilateral monitoring of electrodermal
activity (EDA) has been neglected in the field, despite the invaluable information it provides
regarding arousal, lateral EDA asymmetries and hemispheric dominance[5][6][10]. Recent results
point to unique changes in terms of EDA lateralization during the hypnotic induction of active-
alert hetero-hypnosis[6]. Changes in EDA laterality also associate with some of the
phenomenology of the active-alert hypnosis as measured by the Phenomenology of
Consciousness Inventory (PCI)[6][8]. The question arises whether similar changes in EDA
asymmetry may be found during a standardized group hypnosis session and whether those
changes associate with subjective experience.

The present study measured EDA from both left and right wrists of 46 hypnotically naïve
participants in a group setting. Their hypnotic susceptibility was measured by the Harvard Group
Scale of Hypnotic Susceptibility Form A[7][9] in that same session. After the standard hypnosis
session participants filled out questioners regarding their subjective experiences, and received
their subjective and observer hypnotizability score.

Changes in EDA laterality showed a significant interaction of hypnotizability and time,

participants with different level of hypnotizability displayed markedly different changes in
laterality during the induction, p = .02. High hypnotizables displayed a shift to the left side in the
first few minutes and a gradual shift towards the right side, while low hypnotizable showed an
opposite pattern by displaying a shift to the right side which gave room to a gradual shift towards
left side dominance. Medium hypnotizables reacted to the hypnotic induction by a steady shift
towards right electrodermal dominance. Differences in electrodermal activity in responses to
hypnosis have remained apparent throughout the hypnosis session. Changes in laterality during
the induction were associated with the subjective experiences measured by the PCI. Baseline
laterality and changes that took place in the beginning of the induction were associated with
experiences that highly hypnotizables report. Subjective experiences of medium hypnotizables
were associated with changes in laterality in all stages of the induction. Finally changes
occurring mostly at the end of the induction were associated with experiences reported by low
hypnotizables.

In conclusion, confirming previous research, participants responded to the hypnotic induction

differently according to their respected score of hypnotic susceptibility. Moreover, laterality
changes that arose during the hypnotic induction were associated with the phenomenology of the
whole hypnosis session. To our knowledge this is the first study using bilateral electrodermal
measurement during standardized assessment of hypnotizability.

References:

1. Bauer, K. E. (1980). Autonomic and central nervous system responding: during hypnosis and
simulation of hypnosis. International Journal of Clinical and Experimental Hypnosis, 28(2), 148–
163. http://dx.doi.org/10.1080/00207148008409837
2. Davis, R. C., & Kantor, J. R. (1935). Skin Resistance during Hypnotic States. The Journal of
General Psychology, 13(1), 62–81. http://dx.doi.org/10.1080/00221309.1935.9917867
3. Edmonston, W. E., & Pessin, M. (1966). Hypnosis as Related to Learning and Electrodermal
Measures. American Journal of Clinical Hypnosis, 9(1), 31–51.
http://dx.doi.org/10.1080/00029157.1966.10402519
4. Kekecs, Z., Szekely, A., & Varga, K. (2015). Alterations in electrodermal activity and cardiac
parasympathetic tone during hypnosis. Psychophysiology, 53(2), 268–277.
http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/psyp.12570
5. Bob, P., & Siroka, I. (2016). Attentional Dissociation in Hypnosis And Neural Connectivity:
Preliminary Evidence from Bilateral Electrodermal Activity. International Journal of Clinical
and Experimental Hypnosis, 64(3), 331–349.
6. Kasos, K., Kekecs, Z., Kasos, E., Szekely, A., Varga, K. Bilateral Electrodermal Activity in
the Active-Alert Induction. Accepted manuscript in the International Journal of Experimental
and Clinical Hypnosis.
7. Költő, A., Gősi-Greguss, A. C., Varga, K., & Bányai, É. I. (2015). Hungarian Norms for the
Harvard Group Scale of Hypnotic Susceptibility, Form A. International Journal of Clinical and
Experimental Hypnosis, 63(3), 309–334.
8. Pekala, R. J. (1991). Quantifying Consciousness: An empirical approach. New York: Plenum.
9. Shor, R. E., & Orne, E. C. (1962). Harvard Group Scale of Hypnotic Susceptibility, Form A.
Palo Alto, CA: Consulting Psychologists.
10. Gruzelier, J. (1985). Psychophysiological of Hypnosis Evidence for a State Theory. Journal
of Psychosomatic Research, 29(3), 287–302.
Presenter: Kekecs, Zoltan; Jensen, Mark; Kirsch, Irving; Patterson, David; Raz, Amir;
Terhune, Devin

Improving credibility in hypnosis research.

Zoltan Kekecs1, Mark P Jensen2, Irving Kirsch3, David Patterson2, Amir Raz4,5,6, Devin
Terhune7.
1Department of Psychology, Lund University, Lund, Sweden; 2Department of Rehabilitation

Medicine, University of Washington Seattle, Seatle, WA, United States; 3Department of

Medicine, Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center, Boston, MA, United States; 4McGill
University, Montreal, QC, Canada; 5Lady David Institute for Medical Research, Montreal, QC,
Canada; 6Chapman University Brain Institute, Los Angeles, CA, United States; 7Department of
Psychology, Goldsmiths, University of London, London, United Kingdom.

The main goal of this panel discussion is to raise awareness regarding issues related to research
credibility and best practices that can be used to improve the quality and trustworthiness of
research projects. Recent reports concerning the lack of reproducibility of key psychological
findings and growing evidence for a systematic positive bias in the published research reports
has been framed as a ‘credibility crisis’ in psychological science. In the midst of this crisis,
clinicians and scientists are looking for ways to discern trustworthy (i.e., reliable and
reproducible) from less trustworthy study findings, and guidance on how to perform the highest
quality research. The field stands to benefit from establishing best-practice methodologies that
would empower investigators to improve the rigor and reproducibility of their research findings.
Recent initiatives offer strategies to help achieve these goals. We need to propagate such
methodological tools and strategies within hypnosis research so that our field can successfully
answer the challenges of the credibility crisis.

The panel consists of scholars working on different areas of hypnosis research, who have a deep
understanding of research credibility and who are on the forefront of applying the best practice
guidelines. The discussion will cover topics such as transparency, open science, data sharing,
pre-registration, verifiable study integrity, research audit, reproducibility, publication bias, and
new statistical approaches. Panel members will talk about their perspectives on issues related to
credibility. The panel will also discuss how these issues manifest in hypnosis research, what are
the barriers that impede change, and what are the strategies that can make our field achieve the
highest quality research standards.

Presenter: Klajs, Krzysztof

OCD and hypnosis: The power of creativity.

Krzysztof Klajs1.
1
Polski Instytut Ericksonowski, Polski Instytut Ericksonowski, Łódź, Poland.
OCD is rather chronic illness affecting about 2,5% of adults. It is treatable, however perceived as
rather demanding and challenged diagnosis. On the workshop I will present hypnotic
understanding and hypnotic strategies coping with OCD symptoms. The sagnificance of
therapist's and client's flexibility as well as family cooperation is the core of the presentation.

Presenter: Kockum, Asa Fe

Hypnosis in a Clinical Setting: Where we are now and where we could be. A workshop for
ECH holders and trainers within ESH .

Asa Fe Kockum1, Martin Wall1, Randi Abrahamsen1, Gerard Fitoussi1, Fabio Carnevale2, Peter
Naish3.
1
European Society of Hypnosis, CEPE, London, United Kingdom; 2The Sackler Centre for
Consciousness Science, University of Sussex, Sussex, United Kingdom; 3Italian School of
Hypnosis and Ericksonian Psychotherapy, Rome, Italy.

A workshop organised by the Committee for Educational Programmes in Europe (CEPE), and
the Research committee within the European Society of Hypnosis (ESH)

The workshop will present a report on pilot studies, evaluating the effect of hypnosis in treatment
and the viability of a brief measure of susceptibility, and considering the relationship of hypnotic
susceptibility to clinical outcome.

At the workshop you, as an ECH holder, will also be able to join the continued and much larger
research project. The data from the research, when finished, will be presented to the World
Health Organization, and be published in an international journal.

The workshop will also be presenting and discussing dilemmas from different professions;
working with hypnosis as a medical professional, dentist, psychologist, and as a psychotherapist.

Hypnosis is often labeled “complementary”, indicating a therapy that lacks in scientific

credibility. Which makes it difficult for us to show the value of hypnosis and to access research
funding’s.

This pilot study is the start of a much bigger research project to show the effect of hypnosis in
treatment; the degree of improvement and the speed of achieving it. This data will be compared
with the results with health professionals who don’t use hypnosis.

Clinicians joining the research project will receive a package of materials that will enable them
to collect research data quite easily. You do not have to be a trained researcher or put a lot of
time into the project. All that is required is to ask your patients/clients to complete two very short
questionnaires.
The patient/client does their own assessment, in the first questionnaire, completing half the
questionnaire at the start of treatment and finishing it at the end. This both underlines for the
patient the improvement they have experienced and also provides you with the effectiveness
data.

The second questionnaire is a very quick way of getting an impression of their likely
hypnotisability, because logically we would expect that the more responsive they are the greater
the impact on the therapy

For more information about ECH please contact Christine Henderson;

mail@esh-hypnosis.eu

Presenter: Kuttner, Leora; Rienhoff Sabine, Rienhoff, Jan

Learn the many forms of the Magic Glove to reduce pain and anxiety in pediatric medicine
and dentistry.

Leora Kuttner1, Sabine Rienhoff2, Jan Rienhoff2.

1Clinical Professor of Paediatrics, BC Children’s Hospital & University of British Columbia,

Vancouver, BC, Canada; 2Pediatric dentist, private practice Hannover & MSC paediatric
dentistry education, Greifswald University, Greifswald, Germany.

Glove anesthesia has a long tradition in hypnosis with adults, as a technique to reduce or
completely suppress pain during medical procedures. When adapted to the paediatric population
approximately 30 years ago, it became “The Magic Glove” - a child-friendly procedure. The
technique invites imaginative involvement and is combined with repeated stroking movements
on the back of the hand, together with specific hypnotic suggestions for sensory changes,
increased comfort and curiosity. This technique is designed to control and manage pain and
anxiety— both anticipatory and procedural.

The Magic Glove became more widely used in the1980s for oncology treatments that required
many painful needle procedures. Young cancer patients were trained to use the Magic Glove for
IVs, chemotherapy, and for Port or Hickman Line access. As their child’s best ally, parents were
empowered to coach their child using the Magic Glove, as documented in the pioneering film
“No Fears, No Tears, Children with cancer coping with pain”. Recently, with the development
of immunizations for influenza, the Magic Glove was adapted for IM injections.

Paediatric dentists primarily in Europe, particularly Germany, further creatively adapted the
Magic Glove to control and manage their young patient’s pain and anxiety and create hypo-
analgesia for a wide range of dental procedures, sometimes effectively replacing the need to
provide local anesthetic.
In this workshop participants will observe demonstrations of how to apply this technique both in
medicine and in dentistry. Videos demonstrating the efficacy of the different forms of the Magic
Glove will also be shown, explored and discussed to illustrate how to adapt this hypo-analgesic
technique to children and teens of different developmental ages, as well as, across different
medical and dental situations. Participants will also have the opportunity to practice this
technique with supervision during the workshop.

Presentation Outline:

• The Magic Glove procedure, and how to effectively implement it in 4 forms

• Application to pediatric medical and dental procedures
• Application to different developmental age groups and necessary adaptation
• In vivo demonstration followed by supervised dyadic practice of the forms

Presenter: Lagrafeuil, Jules

Les mains des madones / The hands of the madonnas .

Jules LAGRAFEUIL1,2,3.
1Correze, Actiif, Brive, France; 2Correze, Maison Médicale, Seilhac, France; 3Correze, Hopital

Coeur de Correze, Tulle, France.

C'était l'été dernier, au festival de théâtre d'Avignon, je prenais un café en regardait la statue
dorée de notre dame des doms qui domine et protège la cité des papes. Les cigales chantaient.

Cette fois là, mon regard c'est porté sur ses mains, et je ne sais pas pourquoi, je me suis mis en
mirorring, les mains comme elle, et j'ai laissé la dissociation s'activer en moi et s'installer cet état
agréable qu'on appelle hypnose...

Depuis à chacun de mes voyages, j'ai observé les mains des tableaux et des statues de madones
d'une autre façon, ce sont des formidables ambassadrices de la technique des mains de E.Rossi!
Selon la position de leur main, leur histoire, leur lieu, j'ai laissé la créativité proposer une
suggestion hypnotique à leur geste.
Au cours de cet atelier, dix présentations de madones, dix voyages, dix rencontres, nous
permettrons d'expérimenter dix exercices d'autohypnose pour travailler avec nos patients des
théamthiques telles que la sécurité, la protection, les ressources, le changement, les
ambivalences, le sacré, la beauté.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------

Last summer, at the Avignon theatre festival, I was drinking a coffee while admiring the golden
statue of "Notre Dame des Doms" which dominates and protects the city of popes. The cicadas
were singing.
My eyes were drawn to the statue's hands, and without knowing why, I mirrored her, holding my
hands as she did, and I let the dissociation create in me that pleasant state we call hypnosis ...

Every trip I have made since then, I have viewed the hands of paintings and statues of Madonnas
differently, for I now see them as excellent ambassadors for the technique of the hands of E.
Rossi!

Based on the hand position, the history, the location, each gesture has inspired in me a different
hypnotic suggestion.
In this workshop then, ten presentations of Madonnas, ten trips and ten meetings: we'll try out
ten self-hypnosis exercises for patients on the themes of security, protection, resources, change,
doubts, spirituality, beauty...

Presenter: Landry, Paul

Utilisation et application d'une technique d'hypnose simple en médecine dentaire.

Paul Landry1, Michel Landry2.

1
Landry Le Centre Dentaire, Magog, QC, Canada; 2Pratique Privée, Montreal, QC, Canada.

L'utilisation du moment anxyogène de l'injection pour faire une induction

Presenter: Lang, Anne M.

Hypnosis in its range: Examples of four aspects with demonstration .

Anne M. Lang1.
1AML Institute - Milton Erickson Institut Bonn und AML Institut Systeme, Bonn, Germany.

This workshop will show the complexity of hypnosis through the following four aspects of
applied hypnosis, exemplified by demonstrations.

The range from communication to ritual.

- Demonstration of a ritual with a trance phenomenon -

The range from intervention to general personality expansion.

- Demonstration of an expansion of a problem situation through association, dissociation and

imagination -

The range from therapy to self-hypnosis.

- Demonstration of self-hypnosis

4. Relating the facets of hypnosis to the context of medicine, children’s therapy, adult
psychotherapy and coaching

3 Learning objectives:

Becoming more flexible, using a larger range of techniques when using hypnosis.

To understand hypnosis as a complex phenomenon that is coined through the context it is used
in.

To become bolder when applying this phenomenon.

Target group:

Professionals experienced in hypnotherapy.

References:

1. Dr. NIcole Ruysshart

2. Dipl.Psych.PP Bernhard Trenkle

Presenter: Lang, Elvira

Training healthcare systems.

Elvira Lang1.
1Comfort Talk®, Brookline, MA, United States.

Introduction and Objectives: Training in hypnotic techniques traditionally focused on small

group practice and personal supervision with restricted admission of trainees. This has
commonly left out healthcare professionals who have to address patients' pain and anxiety in the
course of their daily work. The opioid epidemic further forces medical and dental providers to
find alternatives to drugs. The goal is thus to provide evidence-based, effective, safe, and
scalable training to larger numbers of professionals and ideally penetrate entire healthcare
systems.
Methods: A 20-year clinical trial experience was reviewed and analyzed for, the evolution of
application rapid hypnotic techniques, their underlying mechanisms of action, and associated
training methods.

Results: The scaling model can be based on the following premise and step-wise
validation: Prior large-scale randomized clinical trials with >700 patients [5][6][7] allowed to
associate defined, teachable and observable staff behaviors with defined patient outcomes such
as reduced pain, anxiety, drug use, complications, and cost during procedures in various settings.
These behaviors were spelled out in a Manual and their correct use can be documented in
Objective Structured Clinical Evaluations (OSCEs). Standardized staff training based on a
Trainer Guide resulted in adoption of the desired behaviors demonstrated by Group OSCEs in
pre- and post-training comparisons at 3 MRI test sites (Boston Medical Center, Tufts Medical
Center, and The Ohio State University Medical Center)[1]. Downstream training effects,
measured in >96,000 patient visits, were significant reductions in non-completions and no-show
rates, improved operational efficiency, and savings between $ 0.5–1 Mill. Satisfaction rankings
improved dramatically. Subsequent randomized[2] and non-randomized training of 2 healthcare
systems with >40,000 patient visits showed significant improvements in patient outcomes and
operational efficiency. Standardized Trainer Training then allowed identifying trainers who are
able to reliably deliver the training, which is known to produce the desired behavioral change in
trained staff. The concept was then tested in a third hospital system using adjunct web-based
teaching algorithms.

Conclusion: Effective training of entire healthcare systems can be achieved through teaching
content that has been validated with regard to trainer performance and patient response.

References:

1. Norbash A, Yucel K, Yuh W, Doros G, Ajam A, Lang EV, et al. Effect of team training on
improving MRI study completion rates and no show rates. Journal of magnetic resonance
imaging. JMRI 44; 1040-1047; 2016:epub. PMID: 27126735
2. Ajam AA, Nguyen XV, Kelly RA, Ladapo JA, Lang EV. Effects of Interpersonal Skills
Training on MRI Operations in a Saturated Market: A Randomized Trial. JACR 2017; 14:963-
970; epub Apr 28, 2017; PMID: 28461168
3. Lang EV, Tan G, Amihai I, Jensen MP. Analyzing acute procedural pain in clincial trials. Pain
2014; 155(7): 1365-1373
4. Lang EV, Yuh WT, Ajam A, Kelly R, Macadam L, Potts R, Mayr NA. Understanding patient
satisfaction ratings for radiology services. AJR 2013;201(6):1190-1196
5. Lang EV, Benotsch EG, Fick LJ. Lutgendorf S, Berbaum ML, Berbaum KS, Logan H, Spiegel
D. Adjunct nonpharmacologic analgesia for invasive medical procedures: A randomized trial.
The Lancet 2000; 355:1486-1490
6. Lang EV, Berbaum K, Faintuch S, Hatsiopoulou O, Halsey N, Li X, Berbaum M, Laser E,
Baum J. Adjunctive self-hypnotic relaxation for outpatient medical procedures: A prospective
randomized trial with women undergoing large core needle biopsy of the breast. Pain 2006;
126:155-164
7. Lang EV, Berbaum KS, Pauker S, Faintuch S, Salazar GM, Lutgendorf SK, Laser E, Logan H,
Spiegel D. Beneficial effects of hypnosis and adverse effects of empathic attention during
percutaneous tumor treatment: When being nice does not suffice. J Vasc Intervent Radiol 2008;
19:897-905

Presenter: Lazarus, Jeffrey

More important than hypnosis: Optimizing motivation and dissolving patient resistance.

Jeffrey Lazarus1.
1Private Practice, Menlo Park, CA, United States.

Do you have patients who are resistant in your therapy? Or who are not making the type of
progress you’d like and expect? Or who don’t do the homework you assign them? If so, you can
learn about an exceptional approach to communicate with them to solve these types of problems.

After attending this workshop, the attendees will:

1. Understand and recognize why your patients are not making the progress you'd like and
expect.
2. Learn new techniques to help motivate your patients and dissolve their resistance.
3. Learn a fast and powerful tool to help your patients with anxiety.

David Burns, MD, internationally known author of Feeling Good, The New Mood Therapy, is
one of the pioneers of cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT). He has developed TEAM therapy,
using new tools, including new forms of communication skills, that can be applied to any type of
therapy (CBT, psychodynamic, hypnosis, etc.), enhancing results and speeding up the process.

These tools apply to patients with virtually every type of problem you will encounter, including:

Mood disorder
Relationship problem
Habit/Addiction
Normal problem such as grief after losing a loved one
Somatic problem

Attendees will see a demonstration of “The Magic Dial,” for patients with anxiety.

Unique patient video clips will further enhance the salient points of this workshop.

References:

1. Burns, D.D. (2009) Tools, Not Schools, of Therapy. Los Altos Hills: Author.

Presenter: Lazarus, Jeffrey

Treatment of headaches with training in self-hypnosis.

Jeffrey Lazarus1.
1Private Practice, Menlo Park, CA, United States.

Self-Hypnosis (SH) has been used successfully to treat migraine headaches for many years. It
can also be helpful in the treatment of chronic daily headaches. SH can be used either as a
primary therapeutic modality, without the use of medication, or as an adjunctive therapy in
addition to medication. When used as an adjunct, medication can often be decreased or even
discontinued. Dramatic improvement is usually seen after only two or three visits, plus, there are
no side effects. 
 The participants will also have the opportunity to learn, discuss, and practice
some new techniques, including the use of metaphors to help treat these conditions.

In this interactive workshop, attendees will be guided through a literature review and taught an
entire protocol of how to treat these conditions, including how to encourage positive expectancy
before even meeting the patient. Unique patient video clips will further enhance the salient points
of this workshop.

References:

1. Kohen, D. P. 2010. Long-term follow-up of self-hypnosis training for recurrent headaches:

what the children say. Int J Clin Exp Hypn 58:417-432.
2. Eccleston, C., Palermo, T. M., de, C. W. A. C., Lewandowski, A., Morley, S., Fisher, E., &
Law, E. (2012). Psychological therapies for the management of chronic and recurrent pain in
children and adolescents. Cochrane Database Syst Rev, 12, CD003968. doi:
10.1002/14651858.CD003968.pub3
3. Hammond DC. Review of the efficacy of clinical hypnosis with headaches and migraines. Int
J Clin Exp Hypn. Apr 2007;55(2):207-219.
4. Olness K, MacDonald JT, Uden DL. Comparison of self-hypnosis and propranolol in the
treatment of juvenile classic migraine. Pediatrics. Apr 1987;79(4):593-597.

Presenter: Lelarge, Elise

Aider les hypersensibles, enfant et adultes, avec l'hypnose et l'autohypnose.

Elise Lelarge1.
1Institut Milton H. Erickson de Rezé, Rezé, France.

L'hypersensibilité est un motif fréquent de consultations de psychothérapie. Ces patients sont

plus gênés que les autres dans leur vie quotidienne. Ils peuvent parfois vivre des états intérieurs
insupportables auxquels ils n'arrivent plus à faire face[1]. Loin d'être une faiblesse,
l'hypersensibilité peut au contraire être vue comme une force, une richesse intérieure qu'il faut
pour certains apprendre à utiliser.

Décrits par Bruce J. Ellis et W. Thomas Boyce[2] comme des enfants Orchidées, ces enfants
hypersensibles, s'ils sont fragilisés voire détruits par un environnement carencé, s'épanouissent
au contraire de façon remarquable dans un environnement étayant.

L'hypnose et l'autohypnose[3] sont des moyens de choix pour aider ces personnes à réguler les
perceptions de leur monde intérieur et apprendre à faire face à un monde extérieur vécu comme
trop envahissant.

Cet atelier permettra aux participants de découvrir ou mieux connaître les 5 hypersensiblités -
intellectuelle, sensorielle, psychomotrice, imaginaire et émotionnelle[4] - d'en faire le diagnostic
chez leurs patients et de bien les différencier des pathologies psychiatriques autres avec
lesquelles elles sont trop souvent confondues.

Pour chaque hypersensibilité seront proposés des exercices pratiques destinés aux patients. Dans
une perspective éricksonienne, l'individualisation des interventions thérapeutiques sera au coeur
de cette proposition d'atelier.

References:

1. Elaine Aron, The Highly Sensitive Person: How to Thrive When the World Overwhelms You
(New York: Carol Publishing Group, 1996).
2. Bruce J. Ellis and W. Thomas Boyce, Biological Sensitivity to Context, Current Directions in
Psychological Science 17, no. 3 (2008)
3. Lelarge PrévotStimec, Prendre soin de soi par l'autohypnose, Dunod 2017.
4. MARION BOTELLA - French Validation of the Overexcitability Questionnaire 2:
Psychometric Properties and Factorial Structure - Journal of Personality Assessment, 97(2), 209–
220, 2015
5. Elaine Aron, Ces gens qui ont peur d'avoir peur : mieux comprendre l'hypersensibilité, Les
éditions de l'homme 2005.

Presenter: Lentz, John

One liners that change people.

John Lentz1.
1Institutes, Milton H. Erickson Foundation, Phoenix, AZ, United States.

This advanced workshop shows how possible that one liners are that can and have changed
people.Through powerpoint, examples, and demonstrations the concept is taught about how to
generate one liners that can change people. The author has been collecting one liners that have
changed people and uses those to explain, show and teach how actually doable the thing is.
While the one liner concept is taught the principles that are learned help people to make better
decisions and to select better interventions that are more likely to have a powerful impact.

Presenter: Lentz, John

Instant trances and double binds: Transforming problems to solutions.

John Lentz1.
1Institutes, Milton H. Erickson Foundation, Phoenix, AZ, United States.

This advanced workshop offers participants a new method of intervention. Since, all trauma
involves a double bind experience, the approach is widely useful. Using power points, examples
and demonstrations I teach participants how to have options when dealing with double binds. I
then teach them how to construct positive double binds and demonstrate how easily they can be
generated. I show a formula and then show even easier ways to create positive double binds.
What is the most helpful are the examples and demonstrations that make the concept easy to
incorporate into your work.

Presenter: Linden, Julie

Pathways to Healing: Looking backwards at war and hypnosis.

Julie Linden1.
1
Private Practice, Private Practice, Oquossoc, ME, United States.
Adolescents two decades ago, now grown, look back at the war in the Balkans and report on
their experiences with hypnosis and their healing journeys. A series of interviews by the author
who had provided treatment for a large group of teenagers, reveals what helped, how hypnosis
was useful (or not), and what they attribute to their resiliency in the face of loss and many
challenges.

Presenter: Linden, Julie

Exploring therapist mistakes and their value in making an effective hypnotherapeutic

approach.

Julie Linden1, Camillo Loriedo2.

1
Private Practice, Private Practice, Oquossoc, ME, United States; 2Professor of Psychiatry and
Psychotherapy, University of Rome, Rome, Italy.

Two seasoned clinicians will discuss the common and uncommon mistakes made in their clinical
hypnosis practice. Through case histories and experiential exercises, they will examine what is a
mistake; what are our responses to making mistakes, and the value of mistakes for therapist and
client. Supervision of students in which the supervisor uses self-disclosure to share challenges
and dilemmas has been shown in research to be effective in getting supervisees to share their
own challenges.

I. The Framework: hypnosis as a theoretical framework

II. Distinctive characteristics of the hypnosis practitioner

III.Mistakes- an essential ingredient. System, context, skill, bias and content problems.

IV. Making changes to your practice as you learn from mistakes.

References:

1. Clay, R. (2017). How to be a better surpervisor for students in health service. Monitor on
Psychology. September. pp. 35-38.
2. Ewin, D. (2009) 101 things I wish I'd known when I started using hypnosis. Carmathen,
Wales:Crown House.
3. Kuttner, L. & Linden, J. (2009). Confessions from two seaonsed Practitioners: A Dialogue.
Invited Presentation, ISH Congress: Rome, Italy.
4. Linden, J. & Anbar, R. (2017). Hypnosis Training and Education: Distinctive Features of
Training Hypnosis Educatoros. American Journal of Clinical Hypnosis. 59:3, 260-275.
5. Loriedo, C. & Carolusson, S. (2017). How professional mistakes can unlock hidden potentials
and be learning opportunities, for therapist and patient. Workshop. ESH congress: Manchester,
UK.
Presenter: Lonchamp, Daniele

Hypnosis techniques for the busy pediatrician in the hospital and clinical settings.

Daniele Lonchamp1.
1Pediatrics, Taranaki District Health Board, New Plymouth, New Zealand.

In this workshop, attendees will learn how hypnosis can be use in clinical pediatrics. Some
videos will illustrate the singularity of hypnosis in children. Attendees will be strongly
encouraged to actively participate in the discussion of each clinical vignette.

The real case- scenarios illustrate how a busy pediatrician/hospitalist uses Hypnosis (1) during
medical rounds in the ward, (2) in pediatric out-patient services, and (3) in the emergency room.

It is used beyond pain management, to increase adherence to treatment plan, improve self-
regulation of patients with chronic illnesses.

The cases presented illustrate how Hypnosis interventions do not have to be complicated. The
visits do not have to be lengthy either. There is a strong emphasis on how to use rapid, effective
interventions and obtain long lasting effects.

Through the use of well-chosen words, it encourages the child/adolescent to use its own
imagination and find quickly a solution of his/her own problem. At the same token, it allows the
clinician to have fun during long working hours.

References:

1. Kohen, D.P. & Kaiser, P. (2014). Clinical hypnosis with children and adolescents—What?
Why? How?: Origins, applications, and efficacy. Children 2014, 1, 74-98;
doi:10.3390/children1020074 www.mdpi.com/journal/children/
2. Sugarman, L.I. & Wester, W.C. (Eds). (2013). Therapeutic Hypnosis with Children and
Adolescents (2nd ed). Crown House Publishing, Carmarthen, Wales.
3. Hypnosis in Pediatric Practice – Imaginary Medicine in Action – DVD – Laurence Sugarman
MD

Presenter: Long, Kathleen

Hypnosis in the fast lane: A view from general practice. In general practice I usually only
have around 10-15 minutes with any one patient. It does not allow you the luxury of in
depth therapy sessions.
Kathleen Long1.
1BSMDH(Scotland), Glasgow, United Kingdom.

In general practice I usually only have around 10-15 minutes with any one patient. It does not
allow you the luxury of in depth therapy sessions that can be enjoyed in private practice. Once I
discovered how well hypnotherapy worked this left me with a bit of a dilemma. I had a lot of
patients I knew needed more than the ‘pill for every ill’ approach and I had no time to do
anything else. I had two choices. Forget about the benefits of hypnotherapy and talk the GP talk
or adapt my hypnotherapy to fit in with the time constraints. Can a pebble in the water really
cause a big wave somewhere? Yes I believe it can. Start with a small change and watch the
ripple. The workshop will demonstrate some of the simple techniques and exercises that can be
used to help patients change. I have also developed a simple exercise for children to help them
deal with negative emotion and help improve their resilience. I will also talk about some
of many the cases I have dealt with in General Practice.

Presenter: Loriedo, Camillo

Exploring therapist mistakes and their value in making an effective hypnotherapeutic

approach.

Julie Linden1, Camillo Loriedo2.

1Private Practice, Private Practice, Oquossoc, ME, United States; 2Professor of Psychiatry and

Psychotherapy, University of Rome, Rome, Italy.

Two seasoned clinicians will discuss the common and uncommon mistakes made in their clinical
hypnosis practice. Through case histories and experiential exercises, they will examine what is a
mistake; what are our responses to making mistakes, and the value of mistakes for therapist and
client. Supervision of students in which the supervisor uses self-disclosure to share challenges
and dilemmas has been shown in research to be effective in getting supervisees to share their
own challenges.

I. The Framework: hypnosis as a theoretical framework

II. Distinctive characteristics of the hypnosis practitioner

III.Mistakes- an essential ingredient. System, context, skill, bias and content problems.

IV. Making changes to your practice as you learn from mistakes.

References:

1. Clay, R. (2017). How to be a better surpervisor for students in health service. Monitor on
Psychology. September. pp. 35-38.
2. Ewin, D. (2009) 101 things I wish I'd known when I started using hypnosis. Carmathen,
Wales:Crown House.
3. Kuttner, L. & Linden, J. (2009). Confessions from two seaonsed Practitioners: A Dialogue.
Invited Presentation, ISH Congress: Rome, Italy.
4. Linden, J. & Anbar, R. (2017). Hypnosis Training and Education: Distinctive Features of
Training Hypnosis Educatoros. American Journal of Clinical Hypnosis. 59:3, 260-275.
5. Loriedo, C. & Carolusson, S. (2017). How professional mistakes can unlock hidden potentials
and be learning opportunities, for therapist and patient. Workshop. ESH congress: Manchester,
UK.

Presenter: Loriedo, Camillo

Exploring therapist mistakes and their value in making an effective hypnotherapeutic

approach.

Julie Linden1, Camillo Loriedo2.

1Private Practice, Private Practice, Oquossoc, ME, United States; 2Professor of Psychiatry and

Psychotherapy, University of Rome, Rome, Italy.

Two seasoned clinicians will discuss the common and uncommon mistakes made in their clinical
hypnosis practice. Through case histories and experiential exercises, they will examine what is a
mistake; what are our responses to making mistakes, and the value of mistakes for therapist and
client. Supervision of students in which the supervisor uses self-disclosure to share challenges
and dilemmas has been shown in research to be effective in getting supervisees to share their
own challenges.

I. The Framework: hypnosis as a theoretical framework

II. Distinctive characteristics of the hypnosis practitioner

III.Mistakes- an essential ingredient. System, context, skill, bias and content problems.

IV. Making changes to your practice as you learn from mistakes.

References:

1. Clay, R. (2017). How to be a better surpervisor for students in health service. Monitor on
Psychology. September. pp. 35-38.
2. Ewin, D. (2009) 101 things I wish I'd known when I started using hypnosis. Carmathen,
Wales:Crown House.
3. Kuttner, L. & Linden, J. (2009). Confessions from two seaonsed Practitioners: A Dialogue.
Invited Presentation, ISH Congress: Rome, Italy.
4. Linden, J. & Anbar, R. (2017). Hypnosis Training and Education: Distinctive Features of
Training Hypnosis Educatoros. American Journal of Clinical Hypnosis. 59:3, 260-275.
5. Loriedo, C. & Carolusson, S. (2017). How professional mistakes can unlock hidden potentials
and be learning opportunities, for therapist and patient. Workshop. ESH congress: Manchester,
UK.

Presenter: Lundmark, Inger

Hypnosis, in the work with sexual symptoms, with couples or individuals .

Inger Lundmark1.
1Therapy & Eduacation , CHP - Center of Hypnosis and Psychotherapy, Stockholm, Sweden.

Hypnosis & sexual problems

When a couple or a client comes to you with sexual problems, how do you handle it?

In this workshop we will work with

1. Common difficulties (the most common ones in Sweden, what about in your country?)

- Lack of lust, Vaginismus, Early sowing, Impotence etc.

2. What do they often stand for?

- The bodylanguage (the symptom) will tell you what needs to be spoken about

3. How to use hypnosis in this area of psychotherapy

- Find out, has it always been like this? Or is it now?/ What happened?

- Connect the appropriate hypnosis path, to the symptom.

Clinical vignettes, practical excercises.

References:

1. Gunilla Lundmark, Sexuality; Lust or Pain?

2. Jane Parsons-Fein, Loving in the here and now
3. Virginia Satir

Presenter: Manet, Ghylaine

De l’hypnose à l’autohypnose pour amplifier les effets thérapeutiques de la séance
d’hypnose. Qu’est-ce que l’autohypnose ? Comment construire une séance personnelle ?
Atelier de séances guidées..

Ghylaine MANET1.
1Hypnose Médicale, CFHTB, PARIS, France.

Introduction Dans une psychothérapie brève assortie d’une pratique de l’hypnose ericksonienne
demandée par le consultant, la pratique de l'autohypnose quotidienne est un outil très efficace qui
permet de réduire les séances de thérapie en fonction de la motivation du consultant et de
poursuivre les effets bénéfiques des séances du praticien. L’autohypnose s’apprend dans une
séance d’hypnose menée par un praticien qui enregistre la séance et la donne sur une clef USB
.L'apprentissage de l'autohypnose se fait chaque jour pendant un quart d'heure. Le but est de se
passer de l’écoute du MP3. Le sujet devient l’acteur de sa thérapie. Il devient autonome. Le
patient expérimente son pouvoir sur lui-même et sur la qualité de sa vie. Cette séance
quotidienne améliore le vécu du sujet, le reconnecte à lui-même, à son corps, à ses émotions, à
ses désirs, à ses besoins, à son désir de changer. Il prend conscience, jour après jour, peu à peu de
l'action bénéfique qu'il peut avoir sur lui-même sur sa santé et sur son équilibre. Le corps et
l’esprit sont reliés dans cette expérience qu’il vit profondément. Comment installer la séance ? •
L’installation du sujet lui-même, l'induction et les suggestions directes et indirectes du praticien,
les métaphores et la dissociation permettront d'explorer les ressources et les émotions du sujet. •
La relation thérapeutique avec le praticien, essentielle dans cet apprentissage, redonne confiance
dans ses possibilités de changer. Quels changements peut-on espérer ? 1. Le mental s’apaise. 2.
Le comportement un nouveau mode de communication qui se met en place avec soi-même et
avec l’autre. L’énergie vitale se développe. 3. La réalisation d’objectifs. La créativité se réveille.
4. Les symptômes disparaissent. 5. Les douleurs s’apaisent. OBJECTIFS : Apprentissage des
techniques abordées dans l’atelier en tenant compte de la durée de l’atelier • Etablir le lieu
sécure, base de tout travail clinique. Il apporte nécessairement l’enrichissement des sensations
physiques et développe le V.A.K.O.G. (profils de la sensorialité individuelle). • Prise de
conscience de l'instant présent, ici et maintenant, véritable conquête de soi et de sa liberté ; c’est
l’opposé de l'hyperactivité : c’est le lâcher–prise. • Mise en place d’une technique conditionnée à
utiliser en auto-hypnose pour les addictions, les phobies, les migraines, les acouphènes les crises
de panique avec le training autogène de Schultz. (MP3). • Enregistrement d’une séance pour
atteindre le sommeil le plus rapidement possible (MP3.)

Presenter: Martial, Charlotte

Measuring brain activity during remembering near-death experiences memories with

hypnosis.

Charlotte Martial1, Armand Mensen Dr.1,2, Vanessa Charland-Verville Dr.1, Mohamed Ali Bahri
Dr.4, Audrey Vanhaudenhuyse Dr.1,3, Daniel Rentmeister5, Héléna Cassol1, Jérôme Englebert
Dr.5, Steven Laureys Dr.1, Marie-Elisabeth Faymonville Dr.1,3.
1GIGA-Consciousness (Coma Science Group), University of Liège, Liege,
Belgium; 2Department of Neurology, Inselspital Bern, Bern, Switzerland; 3Algology and
Palliative Care Department, University Hospital of Liège, Liege, Belgium; 4GIGA-CRC In Vivo
Imaging, University of Liège, Liège, Belgium; 5ARCh Unit, Psychology Department, University
of Liège, Belgium.

Introduction: Near-death-experiences (NDEs) can be referred to as a set of mental events with

highly emotional, self-related, spiritual, and mystical aspects[1]. The resulting memories appear
paradoxical, considering the reported richness and intensity of the memory and the fact that these
experiences occur during a moment of brain dysfunction. Two previous studies have successfully
used hypnosis to experimentally induce phenomenological experiences that seem to closely
resemble NDEs[2][3]. However, so far no study has induced NDEs via hypnotic modulation while
simultaneously measuring changes in brain activity using high-density EEG.

Objectives: In this study, we used an integrated approach involving a hypnosis-based protocol to

improve recall together with EEG recording in order to investigate both the ‘original’ NDE
memory and another autobiographical memory and their neural correlates.

Methods: We included 5 volunteers who previously had experienced a NDE (as defined by the
Greyson NDE scale[4]). We added control conditions requiring volunteers to recall both
memories using mental imagery. After each recall session, the subjective phenomenology was
assessed by standardized tools (SHSS scores [5], VAS scales, the Greyson NDE scale[4]).

Results: At a phenomenological level, we succeeded in recreating some NDEs features in all

participants without any adverse effects. Absorption, dissociation and similarity (with their
previous ‘genuine’ experiences) levels were higher during all hypnosis conditions as compared
to mental imagery conditions. At a neural level, we found that NDE conditions significantly
increased the alpha power in both a frontal and posterior region. Moreover, SHSS scores were
strong predictors of power in the alpha band.

Conclusion: We believe that a scientific comprehension of the NDE phenomenon cannot be

achieved without closely assessing the experiencers’ subjective first-person phenomenal
experience in parallel with state-of-the art brain monitoring in a controlled laboratory setting.
Hypnotic procedures appear to facilitate focus on the recall of memories and induce
phenomenological experiences similar to those experienced during NDEs. Such experiment may
also permit a better understanding of neural processes underlying the effects of hypnosis.

References:

1. Greyson B. (2000). Near-death experiences. In: Cardena E, Lynn SJ, Krippner S, editors.
Varieties of anomalous experiences: examining the scientific evidence. Washington: American
Psychological Association; p315–52.
2. Palmieri A, Calvo V, Kleinbub JR, Meconi F, Marangoni M, Barilaro P, Broggio A, Sambin
M & Sessa P. (2014). “Reality” of near-death-experience memories: evidence from a
psychodynamic and electrophysiological integrated study. Frontiers in Human Neuroscience, 8,
429.
3. Holden JM & MacHovec F. (1993). Risk management in hypnotic recall of near-death
experiences. American Journal of Clinical Hypnosis, 36:38–46
4. Greyson B. (1983). The near-death experience scale. Construction, reliability, and validity.
The Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease, 171(6), 369–375.
5. Weitzenhoffer AM & Hilgard ER. (1962). Stanford Hypnotic Susceptibility Scale, Form C.
Palo Alto, CA: Consulting Psychologists Press

Presenter: Martinent, Louis

Hypnose ericksonienne et sérendipité.

Louis MARTINENT1.
169, Confédération Français d’Hypnose et de thérapies brèves, Lyon, France.

Le moteur : L’envie, le désir du changement sont le résultat d’une projection mentale

dans unfutur positif.

Le frein : la (les) peur(s) est (sont) le résultat d’une projection mentale dans un futur
potentiellement négatif ou illogique (perte du contrôle).

Le processus de changement en hypnose nécessite l’exploration de tous les paramètres

duchangement, dans un esprit de sérendipité (Exploitation créative de l'imprévu / Ce qu'on
trouve sans le chercher).

Il nécessite l’exploration des moteurs, des freins et des corollaires positifs et surtout négatifs du
changement, dans le but d’une adaptabilité bi directionnelle (cad du patient et de celui dû aux
réactions des ses relations extérieures). Le changement provoque la modification du « monde »
de l’autre qui va par conséquent réagir.

L’apprentissage du « chercher sans vouloir trouver » (sans exigence de réponse) permet

d’atteindre cet état de sérendipité.

L’expression d’un objectif « concret » (ce que je veux et non pas ce que je ne veux pas) permet
l’exploration de cette projection mentale la rendant « réelle », donc potentiellement acceptable.

Le changement passe donc par la traversée de sa (ses) peur (s) provoquant l’acceptation et
l’intégration du changement comme une nouvelle évidence.

En cas de résistance, c'est-à-dire de peur du changement, l’ouroboros thérapeutique permet au

patient de trouver sa propre nécessité de changement.

Presenter: McCarthy, Patrick

The Special Place of Bliss - An innovative method of parking all emotional trauma without
the need for any disclosure. Used by 8,000 people in NZ..

Patrick McCarthy1.
1Medical Hypnosis, Doctor Patrick McCarthy, Wellington, New Zealand.

I will explain the structure and content of how to help people park all of their emotional baggage
and problems in a seemingly simple method known as The Special Place of Bliss. This has been
used to great effect by over 8,000 people in New Zealand.

Presenter: Mende, Matthias

The structural dimensions of hypnotherapy. An integrative model for planning, shaping

and reflecting the hypnotherapeutic process .

Matthias Mende1.
1Psychotherapy Center Dr. Mende, Salzburg, Austria.

In this paper I will introduce a comprehensive model of hypnotherapy integrating the structural
dimensions of the hypnotherapeutic process. The model is hierarchical in nature, ranging from
the anthropological conditions of reality perception at the base all the way to the specifics of the
trance-work at the peak. The model may serve as a guide to lead you through all relevant
decisional steps you take from formulating therapy goals to general therapy planning and making
appropriate choices what to deal with in a single therapy session, all the way to specific
alternatives of doing trance-work within a session. The model also provides criteria for reflecting
the therapeutic process individually or in supervision. I will use case examples to illustrate the
theoretical positions.

Presenter: Mende, Matthias

A hypnotic first aid kit for treating panic and anxiety disorders.

Matthias Mende1.
1Psychotherapy Center Dr. Mende, Salzburg, Austria.

In this workshop I will combine practical teaching and demonstrations to familiarize participants
with a hypnotic intervention to be utilized as a first aid intervention to help panic and anxiety
patients regaining mastery over their alarming psychophysiological anxiety symptoms. The
resulting symptom relief helps patients feeling confident enough to confront avoided activities
and situations (again). The approach covers psychoeducation, cognitive restructuring and
hypnotic learning processes involving the autonomous nervous system. In the workshop, I will
give a step-by-step tutorial how to define the elements of the first aid kit, how to utilize them
from a dissociated and associated perspective and how to empower patients to utilize it for
themselves with the help of easy self-hypnotic techniques. The hypnotic first aid kit can be
applied at the very beginning of the therapy. The resulting experience of mastery facilitates
confidence that something can be done about the panic/anxiety disorder and builds up motivation
to engage in further hypnotherapeutic treatment Participants will learn how to establish this
hypnotic first aid kit, how to install it and how to teach the patient different ways to utilize it to
overcome the anxiety of becoming afraid and to reduce panic and anxiety symptoms on scene.

Presenter: Merckaert, Isabelle

Improving anxiety regulation in patients with breast cancer at the beginning of the
survivorship period: A RCT comparing the benefits of single-component and multi-
component group interventions.

Isabelle Merckaert1,2, Florence Lewis2, France Delevallez2, Sophie Herman1, Marie Cailler3,
Nicole Delvaux1,2, Yves Libert1, Aurore Liénard2, Jean-Marie Nogaret6, David Ogez4, Pierre
Scalliet4, Jean-Louis Slachmuylder3, Paul Van Houtte6, Darius Razavi1,2.
1Unité de Recherche en Psychosomatique et Psycho-oncologie, Université Libre de Bruxelles,

Brussels, Belgium; 2Clinique de Psycho-oncologie, Institut Jules Bordet, Brussels,

Belgium; 3Centre de Psycho-oncologie, Brussels, Belgium; 4Centre du Cancer, Cliniques
Universitaires Saint-Luc, Brussels, Belgium; 5Hopital Erasme, Brussels, Belgium; 6Institut Jules
Bordet, Brussels, Belgium.

Objective: To compare in a multicenter randomized controlled trial the benefits in terms of

anxiety regulation of a 15-session single-component group intervention (SGI) based on support
with those of a 15-session multi-component structured manualized group intervention (MGI)
combining support with cognitive-behavioral and hypnosis components.

Methods: Patients with non-metastatic breast cancer were randomly assigned at the beginning of
the survivorship period to the SGI (n=83) or MGI (n=87). Anxiety regulation was assessed,
before and after group interventions, through an anxiety regulation task designed to assess their
ability to regulate anxiety psychologically (anxiety levels) and physiologically (heart rates).
Questionnaires were used to assess psychological distress, everyday anxiety regulation and fear
of recurrence. Group allocation was computer-generated and concealed till baseline completion.

Results: Compared with the SGI group (n=77), patients attending the MGI (n=82) showed
significantly reduced anxiety after a self-relaxation exercise (p=0.006) and after exposure to
anxiety triggers (p=0.013), and reduced heart rates at different time points throughout the task
(p=0.001 to p=0.047). MGI participants also reported better everyday anxiety regulation
(p=0.005), greater use of fear of recurrence–related coping strategies (p=0.022), and greater
reduction in fear of recurrence–related psychological distress (p=0.017) compared with the SGI
group.
Conclusions: This study shows that a MGI combining support with cognitive-behavioral
techniques and hypnosis is more effective than a SGI based only on support in improving anxiety
regulation in patients with breast cancer.

Trial registration: ClinicalTrials.gov Identifier NCT01797354

Keywords: Cancer, anxiety, group intervention, distress, fear of recurrence, oncology

[1]

References:

1. Merckaert, I., Lewis, F., Delevallez, F., Herman, S., Caillier, M., Delvaux, N., ... & Scalliet, P.
(2017). Improving anxiety regulation in patients with breast cancer at the beginning of the
survivorship period: a randomized clinical trial comparing the benefits of single‐component and
multiple‐component group interventions. Psycho‐oncology, 26(8), 1147-1154.

Presenter: Messmer, Veit

Hypnosis in dental treatment: Why, when and how? - A survey on different techniques and
methods in dental treatment .

Veit Messmer1,2.
1Zahnaerztezentrum, dental clinic, Muellheim, Germany; 2DGZH, German society of dental

hypnosis, Stuttgart, Germany; 3ÖGZH, Austrian society of dental hypnosis, Vienna, Austria.

Hypnosis in Dentistry has seen a revival during the last twenty years, especially in Germany,
where the DGZH has generated 1600 certified members who treat patients in Hypnosis every
day. Dentists need to have quick results, the hypnotical intervention is fast, safe and effective.

It is successfully used for:

• pain reduction
• diminishing and eliminating fear and panic states
• reduction of gag reflex
• therapy of myoathropathic diseases and mal functions
• bruxism
• positive influence on oral diseases and healing processes after surgery

In this lecture various techniques of Dental Hypnosis will be presented, that can be applied in
Dental Treatment. They are fast and effective. An own concept of the speaker, that is working
very effective since ten years, will be presented with words, demonstrations and movies. The
participants of the lecture will get many hints and helpful informations for daily practice, that
will enrich their own hypnotical treatment, will enrich their own practice, office or clinic,
because it works, making patients and the whole team content and happy.

Presenter: Messmer, Veit

Rapid inductions: A workshop about a variety of effective induction methods that work .

Veit Messmer1,2,3.
1Zahnaerztezentrum, Dental office, Muellheim, Germany; 2DGZH, German society of hypnosis,

Stuttgart, Germany; 3ÖGZH, Austrian society of hypnosis, Vienna, Austria.

In Dentistry it is important to get a quick access to the unconscious mind of the patient. This can
be achieved by the use of safe and quick methods to lead the person in a good and peaceful
Trance state.
In this workshop a variety of induction methods will be demonstrated and trained together. Well
known methods as well as some exotic methods.
Watch, try, and find out, which one you like and want to use together with your patients.
These rapid inductions may be used also in fractionated hypnosis to deepen the hypnosis step by
step, they may be combined and used like a musician uses different rhythms, volumes and tempi.
Once you are good at it, you may enchant your patients as well as good musicians do with their
auditorium.

Presenter: Messmer, Veit

Working with personality parts in dentistry.

Veit Messmer1,2.
1Zahnaerztezentrum, Dental office, Muellheim, Germany; 2DGZH, Dental society for Hypnosis,

Stuttgart, Germany.

Who are the patients who come to the Dental office? Are they one, are they many? And if they
are many or seen as that, which parts can be utilized and evoked in hypnosis to make the
treatment pleasant and successful?

How can we work with these parts?

In this workshop you will learn how to communicate with all the parts of the personalities, how
to make them conscious, how to make uncooperative and obstructive parts join the Dental party.

How to unite all the resources a patient is bringing with him in one culmination point and lift
off…..
According to Schopenhauer the will is the strongest power in the universe. Finding access to the
will in Hypnosis leads the patients to their strongest inner sources, their own will!

Presenter: Miller, Richard; Goldfus, Tobi

Is a mistake truly a mistake? Looking into the mirror with naked honesty: Transforming
blunders, strengths and vulnerabilities into self acceptance.

Richard Miller1,2,3, Tobi Goldfus1,2,3.

1ISH, Berwyn, PA, United States; 2 ASCH, Bloomingdale, IL, United States; 3NASW,

Washington DC, WA, United States.

Sometimes we like what we see, sometimes we don’t. Resiliency comes from finding strength in
our vulnerabilities. However, looking into that mirror can be challenging or uncomfortable for
us.

This workshop will provide a fun and creative opportunity to explore both painful and successful
moments in psychotherapy. Engaging in this process is significant because it increases our own
self-awareness, which deepens attunement and authenticity with our clients.

Rick and Tobi have focused on connection with the client and the self of the therapist for several
decades in their professional work. Warmth, humor and acceptance have been key fundamentals
they embrace; however, internalizing these traits by therapists about their own foibles seem less
comfortable to many.

In reviewing the fundamentals of countertransference and narcissistic injury, they highlight how
essential the understanding of internal awareness and processing is. A therapist’s self-awareness
about their own responses provide opportunities for clients to work freely. Sometimes sensed but
not known consciously by clients, the accessible therapist creates constructive space for clients
rather than complicating this space with their own issues.

The workshop will provide examples of how to own the emotional impact of negative reactions
or experiences, and deconstruct triggering moments in order to avoid resentment, defensiveness
or overreactions.

This workshop will use trance experiences in order to identify negative age regressions during
vulnerable moments, and instead, utilize these vulnerabilities as post hypnotic suggestions for
self compassion as well as growth.

Case examples, storytelling, exercises and hypnotic trance will be part of this interactive and
experiential workshop. Rick and Tobi will provide their own vignettes as well.
References:

1. 1. Yapko, M. (2016). The discriminating therapist: asking “how” questions, making

distinctions, and finding direction in therapy. Fallbrook, CA: Yapko Publications.
2. 2. Zeig, J. (2014). The induction of hypnosis: an ericksonian elicitation approach. Phoenix,
AZ. The Milton H. Erickson Foundation Press.
3. 3. Short, D. (2010). Transformational relationships: deciphering the social matrix in
psychotherapy. Phoenix, AZ. Zeig, Tucker & Theisen, Inc.
4. 4. Stark, M.(2015). Psychotherapeutic moments: putting words to music. Washington D.C. IPI
E-Books.

Presenter: Miller, Richard

Modern approaches for integrative work with gay men: Refining your skills.

Richard Miller1.
1Instructor in Psychiatry, Harvard Medical School, Cambridge, MA, United States.

Working with gay male patients is challenging, keeping up with the norms of the suculture,
utilizing the most effective interventions of feeling confident as a provider if you aren't gay are a
few challenges.

Clinical hypnosis offers a powerful approach to enhancing and increasing sensory awareness for
gay men. This creates a powerful resource for restoring connections, due to histories of
alienation both from society as well as internally. Such connections provide a bridge between
the self and body, something that is disowned by many gay men. This workshop defines and
illustrates successful hypnosis-facilitated interventions to enhance the treatment of gay men.
These beneficial therapeutic processes indirectly address unresolved issues that may not even be
in these patients’ awareness. Effective scripts targeting issues of development, religion, HIV and
the urban gay male stereotype will be provided. Videos of treatment sessions will be shown in
order to optimize communicating these methodologies.

Furthermore, gay males frequently have unrealistic expectations for themselves. Whether it is
sexual performance anxiety, norms that are internalized from the gay community regardless of
individual preferences, out of control sexual behavior, or historical issues such as attachment or
trauma, these intricate details impact healthy sexual functioning.

Incorporating experiential work provides the most effective treatment for exploring hidden
barriers and for achieving internal harmony, the most powerful way to help clients heal
themselves. Instead of directly advising, therapists using trance work provide clients with the
opportunity to successfully utilize self-awareness, a critical outcome of psychotherapy for gay
men.
Learning how to comfortably speak about sexuality in psychotherapy, appreciating community
norms, and treating sexual compulsivity will also be taught. Current best practices will be
covered in this workshop.

References:

1. Miller, R. (2015). Unwrapped: Integrative Therapy with Gay Men…the Gift of Presence.
Phoenix, AZ, Zieg,Tucker.
2. Miller, R. (2016). Mindfulness Tools for Gay Men in Therapy: A Clinician’s Guide for Mind
Body Wellness. Eau Claire, WI. PESI Publications.
3. DeVries, B. H. (2012). Aging in the Gay Community. In T. E. Witten, Gay, Lesbian, Bisexual
& Transgender Aging: Challenges in Research, Practice & Policy. Baltimore, MD: Johns
Hopkins University Press.
4. Kort, J. (2/2018 release date). LGBTQ Clients in Therapy: Clinical Issues and Treatment
Strategies 1st Edition. New York, NY. W.W. Norton & Co.

Presenter: Mirlesse, Denis

Abstinence and resilience: Implementing group hypnosis in drugs and alcohol services .

Denis Mirlesse1.
1Psychology, University West London, London, United Kingdom.

Introduction: Depression, anxiety and stress levels are typically elevated in the substance-using
population, and often deteriorate further during abstinence programs. This may affect adherence
to treatment and resilience in recovery. Specific interventions can be implemented as an adjunct
to conventional substance-misuse interventions in order to specifically target these co-occurring
mood disorders.

Objectives: To significantly reduce the self-reported levels of depression, anxiety and stress
during abstinence programs, through hypnotherapeutic interventions incorporated into drugs and
alcohol services[1].

Methods: Participants (N=100) are recruited among the clients of a leading UK provider of drug
and alcohol services[2]. Levels of mood disorders are measured with the valid and reliable DASS-
21 questionnaire. Test groups receive up to 4 weekly group sessions of standardized CBT-based
hypnosis interventions[3]. Control groups have weekly mindfulness sessions [4].

Results: Test groups show a significantly larger reduction in reported levels of depression,
anxiety and stress than control groups.
Conclusion: Standardized group interventions provide a scalable and cost-efficient adjunct to
traditional substance-misuse therapies to minimize mood disorders and promote self-regulation
for recovering substance-users.

References:

1. Craig, P., Dieppe, P., Macintyre, S., Michie, S., Nazareth, I., & Petticrew, M. (2015).
Developing and evaluating complex interventions. [slides], CHARM International Seminar,
Oslo.
2. NHS (2012). Implementation Guide for Adult Drug and Alcohol Treatment Providers,
[online], available at http://bit.ly/1EF0JLv [Accessed: 4/9/2017]
3. Riper H, Andersson G, Hunter SB, de Wit J, Berkind A and Cuijpers P (2013). Treatment of
Comorbid Alcohol Use Disorders and Depression with Cognitive-Behavioural Therapy and
Motivational Interviewing: a Meta-Analysis, Addiction, 109:394-406
4. Bowen S, Chawla N and Marlatt GA (2011). Mindfulness-Based Relapse Prevention for
Addictive Behaviors: A Clinician’s Guide, New York, Guilford Press

Presenter: Mirlesse, Denis

Hypnotherapy outside the consulting room: Tips, tricks and pitfalls of working with groups
and producing recorded sessions.

Denis Mirlesse1.
1Psychology, University of West London, London, United Kingdom.

Today’s practitioner has many opportunities to deliver hypnotherapeutic interventions outside

the consulting room, be it for group sessions or for the production of recorded material.
However, remarkably little is available in terms of references or trainings. This hands-on
workshop is based on the presenter’s personal experience of delivering group interventions and
recorded sessions over a number of years in a secondary healthcare setting (drug and alcohol
services). Participants will be invited to share their own experience, in order to develop blue-
prints for group interventions and standardized recorded sessions. The following points will be
addressed i.a.:

One-on-one vs group hypnosis vs recording: similarity, differences, challenges and benefits.

Favourable and unfavourable indications

Scope and limits of the therapeutic content

Global architecture of interventions

Rapport, expectations and priming

Induction strategies (beyond progressive relaxation)

Utilization of symptoms, patterns and environment

Themes development: embedded metaphors, content-free alternatives

Risk management: emergencies, abreactions, safe termination

Technology: what to use and what to avoid.

Putting it all together: a global blueprint of group interventions and a checklist for recorded
sessions

The presenter is bilingual and happy to interact in English and in French.

Presenter: Mizutani, Miyuki

When non-pain experience create analgesia of refractory chronic pain: Exploratory

research for hypnosis for refractory chronic pain patients in multidisciplinary pain center .

Miyuki Mizutani1.
1Multi-disciplinary pain center, Aichi medical university, Aichi-prefecture, Japan.

Introduction: Multidisciplinary pain treatment was inaugurated around 1950’. For the following
50 years, the therapeutic efforts have been focused mostly on changing pain behavior and
maladaptive cognition as well as modulating nociceptive inputs and neuronal transmissions to
the brain. The term “treatment” has been replaced by “management”, as chronic pain has come
to be recognized more multifactorial and complex, and difficult to be cured. Since around 2010,
hypnosis for chronic pain management became expected as a new hope. We need to facilitate the
use of self-hypnosis by patients to establish their self-management of pain which is not
responsive to other multidisciplinary intervention.

Objectives: Hypnosis has a long history in pain treatment. The challenge of this situation is to
increase the reproducibility of hypnotic analgesia for chronic pain and self-hypnosis. For that
purpose, we explore; in what kind of patients hypnotic analgesia is created and the essential
conditions of hypnotic analgesia for chronic pain.

Materials: Hypnosis practice targeting analgesia of chronic pain for a total of 161 patients who
were notably refractory in the multidisciplinary pain managements.

As common characteristics, those patients are confused and feel helpless after having failed to
respond to treatments, or sometimes exacerbated. Their experiences of pain and treatments work
as suggestions that their pain will continue permanently and should be endured. For them,
hypnotic suggestions to change pain or ignore pain is to predispose the existence of pain.

Methods: The principle procedure was adapted to the common characteristics of refractory
chronic pain patients. It includes removing confusion, identifying problems and knowing the
patients’ own efforts and potentials throuh the past to future, and giving “suggestions concerning
their non-pain body sensations” which was supposed to be most unfailingly actualized in
patients and posibbly conveying indirect suggestions.

Results: In-session analgesia (ISA) was experienced by 71.1% among 121 patients who tried
hypnosis. Out-of-session analgesia (OSA) was attained by 65.1%. The time-course of change, its
difference among pain category, necessary and sufficient conditions in patients for ISA were
identified.

Conclusion: Refractory chronic pain involves personal pain experiences and autonomic/muscle
responses, which need personal hypnosis. The necessary session number depends on the
complexity of their pain experiences.

Presenter: Modenese, Michele

Rubber hand Illusion and hypnosis effects and questions a preliminary study .

Michele Modenese1, Mirta Fiorio2, Paola Cesari2, Marco Fanini2, Nicole Rasini2.
1Italian Society of Hypnosis, Italian Hypnosis Society, Verona, Italy; 2Faculty Motor Science,

Verona University, Verona, Italy.

Introduction: Rubber Hand Illusion (RHI) was first used by Botvinick and Cohen in 1998. It
consists of incorrect attribution of tactile sensations to a rubber or alien hand placed in front of
the subject. RHI is a method used to study our way of perceiving the body, besides the sensory
integration between tact, vision and proprioception. RHI studies are based on two main features:
a. A bottom-up process of synchronized integration of perceived objects with the view and, b.
The persistency of the phenomenological change in the representation of the body .

Objectives: The use of hypnosis in this field of research seems then extremely relevant. While
there is aboundance of literature related to this phenomenon, there does not seem to be any
research or even standardized protocols that investigate the hypnotic state and the responses to
the illusion of the Rubber Hand. This work, with the cooperation of the Faculty of Neurological
and Movement Sciences of the University of Verona, investigates the possible differences
between the performance of a subject either during wake or hypnotic state, and if there are any
differences between subjects considered with high or low hypnotizability.
Methods: The materials used for this experiment are those typical of the test of the rubber (RHI)
hand. The subjects that have taken part to the experiment have been 18 (10 males and 8
females). The protocol is divided in three distinguished phases the one from the other.
Purpose of the third phase has been that note to appraise the amplification or the inhibition of the
illusion (RHI) according to the level of individual hypnotic susceptibility.To appraise the
hypnotic suggestionability has been used the Stanford scale in 11 points

Results: Test of Bodily Affiliation to the RHI (T.B.C.) has shown a meaningful effect for the
factor Stimulation Also the factor been Mental results meaningful showing taller scores for the
state of hypnosis in comparison to the state of vigil The interaction Stimulation Mental X Stato,
doesn't is not result instead meaningful implicit propriocective movment to the RHI (S.P.I.) The
anova on the whole champion of subjects related to the S.P.I. has shown a meaningful effect of
the factor Stimulation in how much the move was great after synchronous stimulation in
comparison to the asyncronous stimulation The factor Mental state instead doesn't is result
meaningful Same thing for the interaction Stimulation X Stato

Conclusion: We can be said that the induction in the mental state of hypnosis induces, as
hypothesized, of the changes in the visuo-motor perception and particularly in the perception of
his/her own bodily scheme in comparison to the normal condition of vigil

Presenter: Modenese, Michele

Working in sports psychology with the multilevel hypnotic model (MHM).

Michele Modenese1, Federica Tagliati2.

1Italian Association of Sport Psychology and motor skill, past president, Verona, Italy; 2 Italian

Society of Hypnosis, Italian Hypnosis Society, Verona, Italy.

Hypnosis is in the first place a physiological modality, then relational, and eventually of
psychosomatic restructuring and adaptation. It benefits from brain plasticity and favors it in turn.
It integrates well in many models of intervention in Sports Psychology, Imagery and Mental
Training programs.

The Multilevel Hypnotic Model is proposed synthetically in both its theoretical and experiential
bases. Its fundamental and integrated steps are four: 1. Identification, 2. Analysis, 3. Processing
and Modification, 4 Integration. The application of MHM facilitates work and treatment in
athletes with regard to: early burnout, stress with somatizations, fear of winning, fear of losing,
demotivation, access (to a new team), acceptance and/or integration of change. During the
workshop participants will briefly experiment some of the hypnotic methods applied in Sports
Psychology. There will also be shown some interventions with top-level athletes in different
disciplines.[1]

References:

1. Michele Modenese
2. Federica Tagliati

Presenter: Mongeau, Paule

La fibromyalgie : Au cœur de la transe de fuite.

Paule Mongeau1,2.
1Société québécoise d'hypnose, Montréal, QC, Canada; 2Centre d'enseignement et de recherche

en psychologie énergétique du Québec, Montréal, QC, Canada.

La symptomatologie[1] de la fibromyalgie

Les 4 clefs du traitement global

L'imaginaire, la voie royale de la conscience

La réadaptation du SNC, un long processus

L'accompagnement nécessaire des organismes de santé

Un prognostic positif
[1]Lignes
directrices canadiennes 2012 pour le diagnostic et la prise en charge du syndrome de
fibromyalgie, M.A Fitzcharles et al, Fibromyalgia Guidelines 2012.

Problématique : La fibromyalgie est une maladie psychosomatique pour laquelle le corps

médical reconnait son impuissance à guérir et même à soulager les douleurs. La fausse
impression que la seule solution est d’aider les personnes à gérer leurs douleurs fait en sorte que
les nombreux symptômes des personnes souffrantes se chronicisent et celles-ci doivent souvent
se retirer de leur vie active pour tenter de juguler le mal. Et pourtant, nombre d’études et de
témoignages font état de résultats encourageants dans le domaine des soins complémentaires,
dont celui de l’utilisation de l’hypnose thérapeutique.

Besoin : De 2 à 5% de la population est atteinte, soit au Québec environ 250,000 personnes, en

France, des miilions de personnes en sont affectées. Le non soulagement des symptômes est
souvent cause de dépressions ou d’idées suicidaires. Cette clientèle consulte parfois des
psychothérapeutes pour les problèmes consécutifs à l’établissement de la fibromyalgie, soit
principalement les douleurs et le manque de sommeil, puis le manque de concentration et
l’anxiété, mais rarement pour le traitement d’événements perturbateurs passés.

Ces personnes ont besoin de savoir que des soins complémentaires à la médication existent et
sont prouvés efficaces. Les psychothérapeutes ont besoin d’être informés à ce sujet afin de
soutenir leur client/e dans leur recherche de mieux-être. Ces thérapeutes nécessitent aussi
d’acquérir la maitrise de protocoles de relaxation et de traitement des possibles événements
perturbateurs à l’origine des tensions afin d’offrir une solution de détente à cette clientèle
souffrante en mesure de réactiver le système parasympathique.

References:

1. Mongeau, Paule et al. (2014) Fibromyalgie, quand tu nous tiens ! Montréal : Les Éditions du
Grand Ruisseau.
2. Mongeau, Paule et al. (2015) Fibromyalgie Carnets pratiques. Montréal : Les Éditions du
Grand Ruisseau.
3. Mongeau, Paule (2016) Pour en finir avec la fibromyalgie, les 4 clefs du traitement global.
Montréal : Les Éditions du Grand Ruisseau.

Presenter: Moss, Donald

Heart rate variability training as an adjunct to hypnosis and psychotherapy.

Donald Moss1.
1College of Integrative Medicine and Health Sciences, Saybrook University, Oakland, CA,

United States.

Heart rate variability (HRV) has been a medical index for thirty years for physical and emotional
illness. Low HRV predicts risk for further cardiac illness and even death after heart attack. HRV
is lower in depression, anxiety states, PTSD, asthma, fibromyalgia, and other
illnesses. Conversely, high HRV is a marker for aerobic fitness, optimal health, vitality, and
resilience.

This presentation will define what heart rate variability is, briefly review the physiology of HRV,
and introduce the potential uses for HRV training as an adjunct to hypnosis-based therapies and
psychoptherapy. Participants will also observe the changes in respiration and heart rate
variability during hypnotic induction.

HRV biofeedback has applications in health psychology, psychotherapy, medicine, and optimal
performance. Only in the past twenty years have practical technologies developed to provide
real time feedback on heart rate variability. HRV biofeedback has been applied effectively for
treating many mental health and medical problems, but has proven equally useful for optimal
performance and coaching interventions. Cosmonauts in the Russian space program, soccer
players for the World Cup Milan team, and performers in a variety of Olympic events have
benefited from training to achieve high levels of HRV. Three recent special issues of
Biofeedback magazine included studies applying HRV training to corporate executives,
physicians, college students, musicians, professional football players and a host of other
individuals.

The presenter will demonstrate inexpensive entry level HRV biofeedback equipment, including
the inexpensive emWave® and Inner Balance® devices from HeartMath, and also a higher end
multi-modal biofeedback system for more advanced use. The presenters will describe three
cases in which HRV was integrated with hypnosis treatment to produce an optimal therapeutic
effect: one adult woman with traumatic brain injury, one adult woman with cancer, and one
child with panic disorder related to separation.

References:

1. Moss, D., & Shaffer, F. (Eds.) (2016). Foundations of heart rate variability: A book of
readings. Wheat Ridge, CO: Association for Applied Psychophysiology and Biofeedback.
2. Moss, D., & Schaffer, D. (2017). The application of heart rate variability biofeedback to
medical and mental health disorders. Biofeedback, 45(1), 2-8.
3. Moss, D. (2017). I so hurt: Applications of hypnosis, complementary therapies, and lifestyle
change to traumatic brain injury. Annals of Palliative Care. (Publication ahead of print).
doi:10.21037/apm.2017.08.16
4. Moss, D. (2016). Anxiety and anxiety disorders. In G. Tan, F. Shaffer, R. Lyle, & I. Teo
(Eds.), Evidence-based treatment in biofeedback and neurofeedback (3rd ed., pp. 27-31). Wheat
Ridge, CO: Association for Applied Psychophysiology and Biofeedback.
5. Moss, D. (2015). The use of biofeedback in pediatric care. The Oklahoma Psychologist, 27(3),
27-33.
6. Shaffer, F., McCraty, R., & Zerr, C. L. (2014). A healthy heart is not a metronome: An
integrative review of the heart’s anatomy and heart rate variability. Frontiers in Psychology .

Presenter: Moss, Donald

Hypnotic interventions in palliative care: A pathways approach.

Donald Moss1.
1College of Integrative Medicine and health Sciences, Saybrook University, Oakland, CA, CA,

United States.

Neurologically-based conditions include seizure disorders, cerebral palsy, multiple sclerosis, Lou
Gehrig’s disease, Alzheimer’s disease, cerebral vascular accidents, traumatic brain injury, and
many other conditions. Most neurologically-based conditions are chronic and debilitating in
nature. The degree and specific nature of incapacity is more closely related to the areas of the
brain and central nervous system affected and the severity of the damage, than to the medical
diagnoses. As the percentage of persons over 65 years of age increases in the North American
and world populations, the global burden of neurologically-based conditions will increase
sharply.

Palliative medicine provides interventions offering relief from pain and suffering caused by
chronic conditions that are not amenable to cure. Palliative medicine includes changes in patient
behavior and lifestyle, the acquisition of self-care skills, and the administration of benign
interventions providing relief and comfort for the patient. The Pathways Model, developed by
McGrady and Moss (2013) is a specific model for combining patient directed behavior change,
skills acquisition, and the use of community resources, with professionally administered
treatment, to reduce suffering, manage illness, and optimize mindbodyspirit wellness.

This workshop presents a case study in which self-hypnosis, hypnosis-assisted psychotherapy,

and palliative care strategies were provided within a multi-modal Pathways treatment program
for a 38-year old woman with TBI secondary to motor vehicle accident. Self-hypnosis was
helpful in anxiety reduction and pain management. Hypnosis-assisted psychotherapy was
beneficial in de-sensitizing many post-traumatic memories, and in managing post-concussion
pain, including neuropathic pain and post-traumatic migraine headaches. A variety of palliative
care techniques and spiritual interventions were applied to enhance sleep, moderate cognitive
deficits, and enhance quality of life.

References:

1. Moss, D. (2017). I so hurt: Applications of hypnosis, complementary therapies, and lifestyle

change to traumatic brain injury. Annals of Palliative Care. (Publication ahead of print).
doi:10.21037/apm.2017.08.16
2. Moss, D. (2017). The frustrated and helpless healer: Pathways approaches to post-traumatic
stress disorders. International Journal of Clinical and Experimental Hypnosis, 65(3), 336-352.
3. Moss, D. (2016). Pathways interventions and systemic lupus erythematosus: The case of Mary
Anne. Biofeedback, 44(2), 73-80.
4. McGrady, A., & Moss, D. (2013). Pathways to illness, pathways to health. New York, NY:
Springer.

Presenter: Müezzinoglu, Ali Esref; Konyalıoğlu, Pınar; Esin, Candan

45 years of experience on Muezzinoglu technique: Fast track therapy.

Ali Esref Müezzinoglu1,2, Ender Vardar Dr1, Pınar Konyalıoğlu2, Candan Esin1.
1Society of Medical Hypnosis, istanbul, Turkey; 2Hypnotherapy Traning Manager, Medipol

University, istanbul, Turkey.

Ali Eşref Müezzinoğlu, Ender Vardar, Adviye Pınar Konyalıoğlu, Candan Esin

The foundation of Muezzinoglu Technique is established by Hüsnü İsmet Öztürk MD and

improved by Ali Eşref Müezzinoğlu DMD throughout 45 years of experience. This technique
provides fast and permanent relief of many symptoms that can be treated by hypnosis. Even
though it seems as if this technique omits the underlying causes of the symptoms, the
subconscious mind, and conscious ego are targeted to overcome the conflicts between emotional
memory of past traumatic experiences and current reality.

This technique in general consists of four to ten sessions. The first session does not include any
hypnotic intervention. The patient is informed about the procedure and watches the videos of
experiences of other relevant clients who permitted for demonstration. Also, the patient is given
a book about hypnosis and asked to read it before the next session. Each one of the consecutive
sessions include five steps:

1) Induction: Eye fixation and the verbal suggestion are used for relaxation of the mind and
body, not more than 1-3 minutes.

2) Illumination: Client is informed about the facts and causal relations about the symptom in
brief. Duration is around 3-5 minutes

3) Suggestions: Paternal suggestions enable the client to find its route about the relief of
symptoms.

4) Declaration: While under hypnosis client declares the commitment to heal her or his own
symptoms with the guidance of the hypnotherapist in around 2-4 minutes.

5) Self-hypnosis: Client is suggested to use self-hypnosis together with a trigger when symptoms
appear. Step lasts for the last 3-5 minutes of session depending on the duration of client’s
awakening.

If needed imagination techniques or metaphors are used during suggestion step. The total
hypnotherapeutic session lasts somewhere between 15-20 minutes. The total session lasts around
30 minutes.

Depending on patients condition and request (like pain relief or labor support) total session
numbers differ between 4 to 10.

The duration of the positive results of the therapy is generally lifelong. The basic therapeutic
efficacy of this technique comes from the combination of words used in proper steps of hypnosis.
Foundation of word constellations has been established after fifty years of experience and based
on the local culture. Words reflect literal meanings as well as the common cultural background
of the population.

References:

1. Peter Blum
2. Consuela Casula
Presenter: Néron, Sylvain; Handel, Daniel

Healing the feelings, feeling the healing: The dynamic synergy of language and hypnotic
suggestions used by the supportive care team.

Sylvain Néron1, Daniel Handel2.

1Psycho-oncology, Jewish General Hospital - Segal Cancer Centre, Montreal, QC,

Canada; 2Palliative Medicine Division, Denver Medical Health Center, Denver, CO, United
States.

Modern supportive and palliative care [2][3][5] defines “total pain” as human suffering [4] resulting
from the summative distress within physical, social, psychological, and spiritual
domains. Routinely clinicians use “advanced communication skills to establish goals of care and
help match treatments to those individualized goals.” (p. 747) [3]

Health care and medical clinicians can integrate personalized hypnotic approaches as an adjunct
to their current practice and as well empower the sufferer with use of self-hypnosis. The unique
aspect of this workshop for members of the Supportive Care Team is to learn about integrating
hypnotic approaches and purposeful use of therapeutic language [1][2] at the bedside, in
specialized clinic, while patients undergo procedures and diagnostic or imaging tests during the
treatment trajectory.

This workshop will focus on case-based video clip examples [1] and workshop demonstrations
(leading to brief small group practice) about using imagistic language to formulate intentionally
layered suggestions [2] directed at each level of suffering for self-regulation improvements, pain
relief and palliation of symptoms while fostering hope, and promote or restore healing spiritual
experiences in the face of advanced or progressive illness.

References:

1. Néron, S., & Handel, D. (2014). Hypnotic approaches in cancer and palliative care. Québec:
Presses de l’Université du Québec. ISBN 978-2-7605-3561-9
2. Handel, D. L., & Néron, S. (2017). Cancer palliation: Layered hypnotic approaches mending
symptoms, minding hope and meaning. American Journal of Clinical Hypnosis, 60(1), 33-49.
doi.org/10.1080/00029157.2017.1299678
3. Kelley, A. S., & Morrison, R. S. (2015). Palliative care for the seriously ill. New England
Journal of Medicine, 373, 747–755. doi:10.1056/NEJMra1404684
4. Kissane, D.W. (2012). The relief of existential suffering. Archives of Internal Medicine,
172(19), 1501–1505. doi:10.1001/archinternmed.2012.3633
5. Handel, D. L. (2016). Palliative care. In G. R. Elkins (Ed.), Handbook of medical and
psychological hypnosis: Foundations, applications, and professional issues (pp. 361–366). New
York, NY: Springer Publishing Co.

Presenter: Ogez, David

L’hypnose médicale pour accompagner les patients atteints de cancer : Pratiques cliniques
en psycho-oncologie.

David Ogez1, Fabienne Roelants2, Christine Watremez2.

1Service d'hématologie oncologie , CHU Sainte-Justine, Montréal, QC, Canada; 2Service

d'anesthésie, Cliniques universitaires Saint-Luc, Bruxelles, Belgium.

Introduction : L’hypnose médicale est de plus en plus utilisée en oncologie comme l'illustre le
nombre croissant de formations des médecins spécialistes (anesthésistes, radiologues). Ce
phénomène est en partie expliqué par la scientificité de l’hypnose. Les recherches en médecine
nucléaire ont en effet montré son efficacité et ont permis de mieux comprendre les processus
sous-jacents aux techniques hypnotiques.[1][2] Les recherches en psychologie de la santé ont
également fait état de l’efficacité de l’hypnose. Il a été démontré que l’hypnose aide de manière
significative à soulager l’anxiété mais aussi la fatigue et les douleurs chroniques tout en
proposant un accompagnement efficace tout au long du parcours du patient[3][4].

Objectif : Cette conférence est l’occasion d’apporter des précisions sur la pratique de l’hypnose
médicale en oncologie. Pour répondre à cet objectif, trois volets vont être proposés : (1) un état
des lieux des recherches menées sur l’efficacité de l’hypnose en oncologie, (2) l’intégration de
l’hypnose dans le travail multidisciplinaire en oncologie (expérience des cliniques universitaires
Saint-Luc de Bruxelles) et (3) des considérations cliniques sur l’utilisation de l’hypnose dans les
activités psycho-oncologiques.

Méthode : Dans un premier temps, nous allons proposer une brève revue des études qui ont
montré l’efficacité des techniques hypnotiques en oncologie. Dans un second temps, nous
présenterons comment l’hypnose est utilisée par les équipes multidisciplinaires lors des
différentes étapes que traverse le patient en oncologie (du diagnostic aux traitements). Enfin,
dans un troisième temps, nous présenterons en détail certains outils hypnotiques qui sont
fréquemment utilisés par les psychologues pour accompagner le patient. Concrètement, nous
développerons des techniques de communication hypnotique et d’hypnose formelle comme par
exemple, l’utilisation des métaphores, les suggestions de lâcher-prise et les techniques de
régression dans le temps[5].

Conclusion : L’hypnose joue à présent un rôle central dans l’accompagnement des patients
atteints d’un cancer. Il permet de les soutenir lors des procédures invasives de diagnostic et lors
des traitements eux-mêmes (chirurgie, chimiothérapie, radiothérapie). L’accompagnement lors
de ce parcours passe aussi par un soutien psychosocial à l’aide de nombreuses techniques
hypnotiques qui visent à réduire la détresse et faciliter le lâcher-prise.

References:

1. Faymonville, M.E., Laureys, S., Degueldre, C., DelFiore, G., Luxen, A., Franck, G., Lamy,
M., Maquet, P. (2000). Neural Mechanisms of Antinociceptive Effects of Hypnosis.
Anesthesiology, 92 : 1257–1267.
2. Rainville P, Viet Huynh Bao Q, Chrétien P. (2005). Pain-related emotions modulate
experimental pain perception and autonomic responses. Pain, 118 :306-3018.
3. Flammer, E. and Bongartz, W. (2003). On the efficacy of hypnosis: a meta-analytic study.
Contemp. Hypnosis, 20: 179–197.
4. Adachi, T., Fujino, H., Nakae, A., Mashimo, T., & Sasaki, J. (2014). A meta-analysis of
hypnosis for chronic pain problems: a comparison between hypnosis, standard care, and other
psychological interventions. Int J Clin Exp Hypn, 62(1), 1-28.
5. Ogez, D., Roelants, F., & Watremez, C. (2016). L’hypnose médicale : un plus pour améliorer
l’accompagnement des patients porteurs d’un cancer ? Bruxelles : Satas.

Presenter: Ogez, David

L’entrainement à l’autohypnose comme complément au traitement individuel : Un

protocole d’intervention.

David Ogez1, Jennifer Aramideh2.

1Service d'hématologie oncologie , CHU Sainte-Justine, Montréal, QC, Canada; 2Psychologie,

Université de Montréal, Montréal, QC, Canada.

Introduction : Les recherches ont démontré que les techniques hypnotiques permettaient de
soigner efficacement les souffrances physiques et psychologiques [1]. De nos jours, des centres
hospitaliers proposent d’ailleurs de compléter les traitements habituels par l’utilisation de
l’hypnose, notamment en anesthésie[2]. En psychologie, l’hypnose offre également une large
gamme de traitements pour répondre à diverses difficultés psychosociales [3]. L’autohypnose est
un complément essentiel à ces interventions individuelles. Elle vise à renforcer les changements
obtenus et autonomiser le patient dans sa pratique de l’hypnose. Il est en effet utile, dans une
perspective de reprise de contrôle de sa symptomatologie, de favoriser le potentiel hypnotique de
chaque patient[4]. Pour répondre à cet objectif clinique, il existe plusieurs modèles
d’apprentissage mais il y a malheureusement un manque de structure de ces procédures. Comme
tout entrainement à des techniques thérapeutiques, il est utile de développer un programme
structuré et ainsi favoriser la transmission systématique de cet entrainement aux participants et
aux formateurs.

Objectif : L’objectif principal de cet atelier est d’introduire ce programme d’entrainement à

l’autohypnose à des formateurs en hypnose. Les objectifs spécifiques consistent à (1) sensibiliser
le participant à l’importance d’une approche séquentielle en autohypnose, (2) l’initier
progressivement à un protocole d’entrainement structuré et (3) lui permettre d’expérimenter
certains exercices habituellement proposées en séances.

Méthode : Ce programme d’entrainement a été développé et expérimenté en oncologie adulte[2].

Il consiste en une séquence de procédures psycho-éducatives et une pratique régulière
d’exercices. D’une part, il est proposé aux participants de mieux comprendre ce qu’est
l’hypnose, de se familiariser avec la trame hypnotique et auto-hypnotique et d’apprendre à
définir un objectif thérapeutique réaliste. D’autre part, les participants sont invités à définir leurs
objectifs et à pratiquer des exercices en groupe et en individuel.
Conclusion : L’autohypnose est un complément essentiel aux interventions cliniques
individuelles. Elle vise à favoriser le développement du potentiel hypnotique du patient et lui
permet d’acquérir le lâcher-prise nécessaire à l’atteinte de ses objectifs. Cet atelier vise à
sensibiliser les hypnothérapeutes à l’importance d’une approche séquentielle pour favoriser une
pratique efficace de l’autohypnose.

References:

1. Flammer, E. and Bongartz, W. (2003). On the efficacy of hypnosis: a meta-analytic study.

Contemp. Hypnosis, 20: 179–197.
2. Ogez, D., Roelandts, F., & Watremez, C. (2016). L’hypnose médicale : un plus pour améliorer
l’accompagnement des patients porteurs d’un cancer ? Bruxelles : Satas.
3. Benhaiem, J.M. (2015). Le guide de l’hypnose. Paris : In Press.
4. Ogez, D. (2014). Mieux vivre avec un cancer : Le rôle de l’hypnose. Hypnose et Thérapie
brève, 34, 30- 36.

Presenter: Ouimet, Gilles Michel

L’induction au service de la réparation et de la reconstruction : Convergences entre

psychanalyse et hypnose.

Gilles Michel Ouimet1,2.

1École polytechnique, Universisté de Montréal, Montréal, QC, Canada; 2OUIMET PONS,

Montréal, QC, Canada.

Dans la psychanalyse classique, l’analyste s’efforce d’adopter une position neutre afin de
permettre à l’analysant de se livrer à l’association libre et d’explorer les matériaux de son
inconscient. Dans cette position, l’analyste parle peu et limite ses interventions à l’interprétation
de l’inconscient. Par cela, il révèle un sens à l’analysant sur ses désirs, ses conflits internes, ses
symptômes, ses pensées, ses perceptions, ses émotions et ses comportements, ainsi que sur les
racines profondes de ces psychodynamiques. Ce modèle rencontre aujourd’hui plusieurs
obstacles si bien que de moins en moins de personnes acceptent de participer à un tel exercice :
révolution technologique vers le numérique, culture de l’image et de l’instantanéité,
surspécialisation, approches basées sur le symptôme, etc. Dans ce contexte, peu de personnes
arrivent à tolérer le silence de l’analyste et la lenteur du rythme de l’interaction
analyste/analysant. Si la psychanalyse s’est démocratisée en approche psychodynamique, la
résistance au travail psychique prend souvent la forme de l’obligation de vitesse. Si les
techniques en hypnose clinique répondent parfois à ce besoin de rapidité, la réparation et la
reconstruction psychique d’une personne est une opération qui va au-delà de la simple induction
hypnotique. Considérant les besoins de réparation et de reconstruction des organisations
psychiques sub-névrotiques (déficiences dans la structure psychique), nous proposons de
développer une utilisation mixte de l’induction, de l’association libre et de l’interprétation. Ainsi
l’intervention psychothérapeutique va de l’analyse de l’inconscient à l’adaptation du moi à la
réalité grâce au jeu subtil de ces trois techniques. Dans ce cadre, l’analyste accepte qu’il ne peut
jamais être totalement neutre. L’analyse imprime un mouvement à son sujet. Plutôt que de lutter
contre son propre pouvoir, l’analyste l’utilise en synergie avec celui de l’analysant. Nous
obtenons une psychodynamique de forces au service de l’analysant. L’utilisation de l’hypnose ne
vise pas un focus particulier. Elle est utilisée sous forme d’inductions continues. Nous parlons
alors d’un processus hypnotique et d’une relation hypnotique dans laquelle la personne qui sait
ou essaie de savoir (l’analyste) partage avec, accompagne, guide, manipule positivement celle
qui ne sait pas encore et qui veut comprendre et maîtriser. Dans ce contexte se développe une
dialectique hégélienne entre l’induction et l’analyse psychique. Pour ce faire, l’analyste doit
apprendre à se servir de l’induction comme il a appris à maîtriser l’interprétation.

Presenter: Oura, Shin-ichi

Relationship between conscious and nonconscious attitudes toward hypnosis and images
regarding hypnotic states: Using a paper and pencil version of hypnosis Single Target
Implicit Association Test.

Shin-ichi Oura1,3, Yoshikazu Fukui2, Kazuya Matsuo1.

1Graduate school of Humanities, Konan university, Kobe, Japan; 2Department of Human

Science, Konan university, Kobe, Japan; 3International and Psychological Support Association,
Osaka, Japan.

Introduction and Objectives: It is known that attitude toward hypnosis and images regarding
hypnotic states are important factors in determining hypnotic reactions. In Japan, images
regarding hypnotic states have been classified into expectancies of the loss of control and the
released potentiality, both of which are related to attitudes toward hypnosis. However, the
relationship between these two variables has been very weak, suggesting the possible influence
of moderators. It is possible that the self-report scales used to measure attitudes toward hypnosis
assessed only conscious aspects and the essence of attitudes toward hypnosis was not captured
by these scales. Therefore, Fukui and Oura (2016) developed the hypnosis Single Target Implicit
Association Test (ST-IAT) to measure nonconscious attitudes regarding hypnosis and examined
their relationship with conscious attitudes. Results indicated that conscious and nonconscious
attitudes regarding hypnosis did not match. Moreover, Oura and Fukui (2017) reported similar
results by using the paper and pencil version of ST-IAT. Previous studies have indicated a weak
relationship between conscious attitudes and images regarding hypnotic states because
nonconscious attitudes might moderate this relationship. Therefore, in this study, we reanalyzed
the data of Oura and Fukui (2017) and investigated the relationships between conscious
and nonconscious attitudes toward hypnosis and images regarding hypnotic states.

Methods: University students (N = 40, 9 men) participated in this study. Conscious and
nonconscious attitudes toward hypnosis were measured by using a questionnaire and the paper
and pencil version of ST-IAT respectively. Images regarding hypnotic states were measured by
using a questionnaire.

Results: Multiple regression analysis was conducted with images regarding hypnotic states as
the dependent variable and conscious and nonconscious attitudes, as well as their interactional
term as independent variables. Results indicated that the interaction was significantly related to
the expectancy for the released potentiality. A simple slope test indicated that conscious attitudes
and expectancy for the released potentiality were significantly and positively associated when
nonconscious attitudes were more positive.

Conclusion: These findings suggest that nonconscious attitudes are one of the moderators
causing the weak relationship between conscious attitudes toward hypnosis and expectancy for
the released potentiality.

Presenter: Öztürk, Ali Özden

Hypnoacupuncture: The integrative relationship of the hypnotic rituals of AUCH© method

and acupuncture.

Ali Özden Öztürk1,2, Gizemnur Öztürk3,4.

1President, Society of Medical Hypnosis (THD), Istanbul, Turkey; 2Fiscal Controller, European

Society of Hypnosis, Sheffield, United Kingdom; 3Society of Medical Hypnosis (THD), Istanbul,
Turkey; 4Member, European Society of Hypnosis, Sheffield, United Kingdom.

Purpose: In this presentation, we aim to illustrate the inherent and integrative relationship of a
conscious hypnosis method named “Awareness Under Conscious Hypnosis (AUCH©) [1]” and
Acupuncture -specifically Yamamato New Scalp Acupuncture (YNSA) [8] and Soliman's Three
Phase Hand Acupuncture[9].

Methods: AUCH© is a state of consciousness created by specific induction techniques and

suggestions; and it aims to make changes in attention, perception, memory, emotions and senses
of the patient. To create these aimed changes; AUCH© has a treatment protocol consisting of
three steps: “1) MAYA© (Making Acceptance with Your Awareness), 2) Induction and 3)
Autohypnosis”.[1]

AUCH© is an integrative method that can be applied in different fields of medicine.

Acupuncture is one of the disciplines that corresponds significantly with the hypnotic protocol of
AUCH© Method [2][3]. To be more specific, the meridians, zones & points used in YNSA and
Soliman’s Hand Acupuncture have a substantial relationship with the various body areas induced
spontaneously via hand passes, touchings and tappings during the application of AUCH©
Method.[2][3][4][5][6][7]

Results: The inherent and integrative relationship between hypnotic rituals of AUCH© Method
and YNSA & Soliman’s Hand Acupuncture can be illustrated via mapping acupuncture
meridians, zones & points corresponding with the body areas induced spontaneously during the
treatment protocol of AUCH© Method.
Conclusions: The mapping showing the corresponding points and areas of AUCH© Method and
YNSA & Soliman’s Hand Acupuncture can illustrate the inherent relationship existing between
these two methods in a systematic way.

References:

1. A.Ö. Öztürk, AUCH© (Awareness Under Conscious Hypnosis) Method for Total
Hysterectomy, in: 16th ISH (International Society of Hypnosis) Congress: Hypnosis and
Hypnotherapy, Singapore, 2004.
2. A.Ö. Öztürk, G. Öztürk, The relationship of Awareness Under Conscious Hypnosis (AUCH©)
method with Yamamoto New Scalp Acupuncture (YNSA) and Soliman's Hand Acupuncture,
European Journal of Integrative Medicine, 8, Supplement 1 (2016) 35-36.
3. A.Ö. Öztürk, The Relationship of AUCH© Hypnosis and Mind-Body Medicine, Acupuncture
& electro-therapeutics research, 39 (2014) 413-413.
4. A.Ö. Öztürk, Retrospective Evaluation of Hypnoanesthesia Operations in Turkiye with
“AUCH© (Awareness Under Conscious Hypnosis)” Method between 1971-2013, in: 1st
International Conference on Hypnosis in Medicine, Budapest, Hungary, 2013.
5. A.Ö. Öztürk, Hypnosis as an Integrative Medicine Method and a Case Study about Ob/Gyn
Operation under Hypnosis, Acupuncture & electro-therapeutics research, 39 (2014) 403-404.
6. A.Ö. Öztürk, Using Hypnosis in a Case of Cholecystectomy, a Case Report, European Journal
of Pain, 10 (2006) 226-226.
7. A.Ö. Öztürk, AUCH© Method Applied in Surgery, Hypnos: Swedish Journal of Hypnosis in
Psychotherapy and Psychosomatic Medicine and the Journal of European Society of Hypnosis in
Psychotherapy and Psychosomatic Medicine, 32 (2005) 139-143.
8. Richard A. Feely, Yamamoto New Scalp Acupuncture: Principles and Practice, Thieme, 2011.
9. Nader Soliman, Soliman's Three Phase Hand Acupuncture Textbook, AuthorHouse, 2006.

Presenter: Öztürk, Ali Özden; Öztürk, Gizemnur

Hypnoacupuncture: The hypnotic rituals of AUCH© method and its Integrative use with
acupuncture.

Ali Özden Öztürk1,2, Gizemnur Öztürk3,4.

1President, Society of Medical Hypnosis (THD), Istanbul, Turkey; 2Fiscal Controller, European

Society of Hypnosis, Sheffield, United Kingdom; 3Society of Medical Hypnosis (THD), Istanbul,
Turkey; 4Member, European Society of Hypnosis, Sheffield, United Kingdom.

Purpose: In this workshop we aim to illustrate the inherent relationship of a conscious hypnosis
method named “Awareness Under Conscious Hypnosis (AUCH©) [1]” and Acupuncture -
specifically Yamamato New Scalp Acupuncture (YNSA) [8] and Soliman's Three Phase Hand
Acupuncture[9]- via live and video applications.

Methods: AUCH© is a state of consciousness created by specific induction techniques and

suggestions; and it aims to make changes in attention, perception, memory, emotions and senses
of the patient. To create these aimed changes; AUCH© has a treatment protocol consisting of
three steps: “1) MAYA© (Making Acceptance with Your Awareness), 2) Induction and 3)
Autohypnosis”.[1]

Furthermore AUCH© is an integrative method that can be applied in different fields of medicine.
Acupuncture is one of the disciplines that coincide considerably with the hypnotic protocol of
AUCH© Method [2][3]. In other words, the meridians, zones & points used in YNSA and
Soliman’s Hand Acupuncture have a substantial relationship with the various body areas induced
spontaneously via hand passes, touchings and tappings during the application of AUCH©
Method.[2][3][4][5][6][7]

Results: The inherent relationship between hypnotic rituals of AUCH© Method and YNSA &
Soliman’s Hand Acupuncture can be illustrated via mapping acupuncture meridians, zones &
points coinciding with the body areas induced spontaneously during the treatment protocol of
AUCH© Method.

Conclusions: The mapping showing the corresponding points and areas of AUCH© Method and
YNSA & Soliman’s Hand Acupuncture can illustrate the inherent relationship existing between
these two methods in a systematic way.

References:

1. A.Ö. Öztürk, AUCH© (Awareness Under Conscious Hypnosis) Method for Total
Hysterectomy, in: 16th ISH (International Society of Hypnosis) Congress: Hypnosis and
Hypnotherapy, Singapore, 2004.
2. A.Ö. Öztürk, G. Öztürk, The relationship of Awareness Under Conscious Hypnosis (AUCH©)
method with Yamamoto New Scalp Acupuncture (YNSA) and Soliman's Hand Acupuncture,
European Journal of Integrative Medicine, 8, Supplement 1 (2016) 35-36.
3. A.Ö. Öztürk, The Relationship of AUCH© Hypnosis and Mind-Body Medicine, Acupuncture
& electro-therapeutics research, 39 (2014) 413-413.
4. A.Ö. Öztürk, Retrospective Evaluation of Hypnoanesthesia Operations in Turkiye with
“AUCH© (Awareness Under Conscious Hypnosis)” Method between 1971-2013, in: 1st
International Conference on Hypnosis in Medicine, Budapest, Hungary, 2013.
5. A.Ö. Öztürk, Hypnosis as an Integrative Medicine Method and a Case Study about Ob/Gyn
Operation under Hypnosis, Acupuncture & electro-therapeutics research, 39 (2014) 403-404.
6. A.Ö. Öztürk, Using Hypnosis in a Case of Cholecystectomy, a Case Report, European Journal
of Pain, 10 (2006) 226-226.
7. A.Ö. Öztürk, AUCH© Method Applied in Surgery, Hypnos: Swedish Journal of Hypnosis in
Psychotherapy and Psychosomatic Medicine and the Journal of European Society of Hypnosis in
Psychotherapy and Psychosomatic Medicine, 32 (2005) 139-143.
8. Richard A. Feely, Yamamoto New Scalp Acupuncture: Principles and Practice, Thieme, 2011.
9. Nader Soliman, Soliman's Three Phase Hand Acupuncture Textbook, AuthorHouse, 2006.

Presenter: Palsson, Olafur

Hypnosis attitudes and experiences in the United States: Findings of a national survey of
the adult population.

Olafur Palsson1, Marcia E Walker2, Stefanie Twist1.

1Department of Medicine, University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, Chapel Hill, NC, United

States; 2SAS Institute Inc., Cary, NC, United States.

Little information has been available on views and experiences of hypnosis in the general
population, as past studies have typically been small and focused on non-representative or
convenience samples such as college students. A survey was conducted to assess the current
hypnosis views and experiences in the United States (US) population. Methods: One thousand
adults across the US (500 females and 500 males; mean age 49.5 years, range 18-88 years),
selected to constitute a nationally representative sample in regard to sex, age groups and
geographic distribution, completed an Internet survey about their hypnosis attitudes and
experiences. To minimize bias, participants were unaware that hypnosis was the survey subject
matter when enrolling in the survey. Results: Three times as many people reported a generally
positive view of clinical hypnosis compared to those with negative views: 38.6% somewhat or
very positive, 48.4% neutral, and 12.8% somewhat or very negative. This attitude balance did
not differ between the sexes or among age groups. A total of 7.6% of respondents reported
having received hypnosis treatment for some kind of problem. The most common problems
treated were smoking (39.3%) and mental health issues (30.3%), and 63.2% reported some
degree of resulting improvement. Half of all survey respondents who had never been treated with
hypnosis indicated that they would probably or definitely consider seeking clinical hypnosis
services if needed (54.9%). Four out of every five respondents felt that hypnotherapy should be
restricted by law, either to use by state-licensed medical or mental health professionals
exclusively (43.1%) or to use by such professionals as well as by trained individuals practicing
hypnotherapy under their direct supervision (38.0%). Nearly half (45.6%) thought there was
moderate or strong scientific evidence supporting hypnosis as a real phenomenon. A quarter of
respondents (25.8%) believed they are personally not hypnotizable at all, whereas 10.6%
estimated being highly or extremely hypnotizable. Conclusions: Our findings provide a national
snapshot of hypnosis views and utilization in the US. Clinical hypnosis is viewed in a
predominantly positive way, half of the population would be willing to consider receiving
hypnosis treatment, and 7.6% have been treated with hypnosis. Most people feel that the practice
of hypnotherapy ought to be legally limited to, or under direct control of, licensed health
professionals.

Presenter: Palsson, Olafur

Achieving reliable success with hypnosis for irritable bowel syndrome by using
standardized evidence-based treatment: How to treat patients most effectively with the
North Carolina Protocol.
Olafur Palsson1.
1Department of Medicine, University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, Chapel Hill, NC, United

States.

The North Carolina Protocol is a fully scripted seven-session hypnosis treatment course[1][5] for
irritable bowel syndrome (IBS) that has been tested and found highly effective in several
published research studies[6][7][8][9][10], often achieving overall symptom reduction by about half in
patients who have failed to benefit from usual medical care approaches for the disorder[5]. The
protocol is available for free to suitably hypnosis-trained licensed medical and mental health
professionals, and has been used by hundreds of clinicians to treat individuals with IBS over the
past 20 years. It has also been adapted and tested successfully for treatment with other
gastrointestinal disorders such as ulcerative colitis [3] and functional heartburn[11]. In this
workshop, the author of the protocol provides the essential information that clinicians require in
order to use this protocol most successfully in the treatment of chronic and treatment-refractory
IBS. The workshop is suitable for individuals who would like to start utilizing this easy-to-adopt
standardized treatment approach, as well as those who have already been using it but would like
more information on how to best apply it in their practice. The topics covered are: (1) Overview
of the current research evidence supporting hypnosis treatment for IBS. [2][4] (2) What you must
know about IBS to work with the disorder, and why it is a uniquely suitable treatment target for
clinical hypnosis. (3) Evaluation of patients for suitability for IBS hypnosis treatment. (4) The
importance of proper role induction and education of patients. (5) The nature and structure of the
North Carolina Protocol intervention and what you can learn from it about making an impact on
chronic medical disorders. (6) Key steps to maximize success with a scripted protocol. (7) When
and how to customize or augment the scripted treatment. (8) How to work responsibly with IBS
patients and integrate treatment with their overall medical care.

References:

1. Palsson OS, van Tilburg M. Hypnosis and Guided Imagery Treatment for Gastrointestinal
Disorders: Experience With Scripted Protocols Developed at the University of North Carolina.
Am J Clin Hypn. 2015;58(1):5-21.
2. Palsson OS. Hypnosis Treatment of Gastrointestinal Disorders: A Comprehensive Review of
the Empirical Evidence. Am J Clin Hypn. 2015 Oct;58(2):134-58
3. Keefer L, Taft TH, Kiebles JL, Martinovich Z, Barrett TA, Palsson OS. Gut-directed
hypnotherapy significantly augments clinical remission in quiescent ulcerative colitis. Aliment
Pharmacol Ther. 2013 Oct;38(7):761-71.
4. Palsson OS, Whitehead WE. Psychological treatments in functional gastrointestinal disorders:
a primer for the gastroenterologist. Clin Gastroenterol Hepatol. 2013 Mar;11(3):208-16.
5. Palsson OS. Standardized hypnosis treatment for irritable bowel syndrome: the North Carolina
protocol. Int J Clin Exp Hypn. 2006 Jan;54(1):51-64.
6. Palsson OS, Turner MJ, Johnson DA, Burnett CK, Whitehead WE. Hypnosis treatment for
severe irritable bowel syndrome: investigation of mechanism and effects on symptoms. Dig Dis
Sci. 2002 Nov;47(11):2605-14.
7. Palsson OS, Turner MJ, Whitehead WE. Hypnosis home treatment for irritable bowel
syndrome: a pilot study. Int J Clin Exp Hypn. 2006 Jan;54(1):85-99.
8. Lövdahl J, Ringström G, Agerforz P, Törnblom H, Simrén M. Nurse-Administered, Gut-
Directed Hypnotherapy in IBS: Efficacy and Factors Predicting a Positive Response. Am J Clin
Hypn. 2015 Jul;58(1):100-14.
9. Gerson CD, Gerson J, Gerson MJ. Group hypnotherapy for irritable bowel syndrome with
long-term follow-up. Int J Clin Exp Hypn. 2013;61(1):38-54.
10. Barabasz A, Barabasz M. Effects of tailored and manualized hypnotic inductions for
complicated irritable bowel syndrome patients. Int J Clin Exp Hypn. 2006 Jan;54(1):100-12.
11. Riehl ME, Pandolfino JE, Palsson OS, Keefer L. Feasibility and acceptability of esophageal-
directed hypnotherapy for functional heartburn. Dis Esophagus. 2016 Jul;29(5):490-6.

Presenter: Patenaude, Roch

S'occuper de la douleur en sécurisant le corps et en étant à son écoute.

Roch Patenaude1.
1psychologie, clinique de psychologie et de neuropsychologie, sherbrooke, QC, Canada.

Conscientiser le fait que la plupart des interventions vis-à-vis les douleurs chroniques
traumatiques cherchent à éliminer la douleur ou la nier. Il en découle différents impacts négatifs
dont le fait que le corps déjà traumatisé entre en mode de protection et que par le fait même la
douleur est amplifiée. Au plan psychologique, les personnes sont prises entre les messages
contradictoires des professionnels et ceux de leur corps entrainant une anxiété nocive.

On créer ainsi de véritables états du moi dissocier et protecteurs tel qu'on le connait chez les
personnes ayant vécus des traumatismes importants et enfouis au niveau inconscient. Que ce soit
par analgésie pharmacologique ou encore en forçant le corps à bouger ou poser des gestes qu'il
refuse de faire par protection, la personne prend une distance d'elle-même et de ses
traumatismes.

L’approche proposée vise à orienter l’ensemble de l’intervention sur la notion de sécuriser les
parties traumatisées et l’ensemble du corps en évitant le plus possible toute sensation
d’agression. Par des techniques d’hypnose, modifier l’état du corps et être à l’écoute de celui-ci
en allant simplement à son rythme pour éviter la dissociation. Le but ultime étant de reprendre
contact avec cet état dissocié et que la blesure ne soit plus associée à la douleur émotive.

Nous présenterons 2 témoignages permetant de rendre le tout plus accessibles.

References:

1. La douleur, de la souffrance au mieux-être, Marie-Josée Rivard Ph.D. 2012

2. Le phénomène de la douleur 2e ed., Serge Marchand, 2009
3. Psychothérapie des États Dissociatifs, guérir le moi divisé, Maggie Phillips et Claire
Frederick, 1995-2001 traduction française
4. Vaincre la douleur par l’hypnose et l’auto-hypnose, Christine Cazard-Filiette, Chantal Wood,
Antoine Bioy, 2016
5. Douleurs et hypnose, sous la direction de Didier Michaux, 2013
6. La psychologie de la peur et de la douleur, J.W.S Vlaeyen, G. Crombez, 2009

Presenter: Payre, Jacqueline

La technique du caillou dans la main et autonomie du sujet - Autohypnose.

Jacqueline Payre1.
1IMELYON , Lyon , France.

Lors de cet atelier de 90 minutes ,les participants découvriront une technique associant objet et
lieu de sécurité . Ce moment sera poétique , et permettra d’aborder une technique développant
l’autonomie pour les patients hospitalisés, avant des soins douloureux dentaires , lors de stress,
éventuellement dans l’accompagnement en soins palliatifs du malade et de sa famille. Cette
technique peut être un exercice d’auto hypnose -utilisation fréquente.

L’exercice se déroulera avec des petits cailloux provenant du Massif du Mont blanc , de
l’Auvergne et de l’Arizona .

Présentation avec un exposé théorique et démonstration puis exercice collectif suivi de

discussion.

Les objectifs : Apprentissage d’une technique à l’intention des médecins , infirmiers ,

chirurgiens dentistes utile pour le thérapeute sous forme d’autohypnose et pour le patient - sujet
en vue d autonomie .

Cet atelier est propose plus spécifiquement à des collègues débutants en hypnose .

Presenter: Pendergrast, Robert; Lombard, Lisa

Perspectives from the intersection of psychology and pediatrics: Hypnosis enhances self-
regulation in children and teens with anxiety and chronic Illness.

Robert Pendergrast1, Lisa Lombard2,3.

1Pediatrics, Augusta University, Augusta, GA, United States; 2Clinical Psychology, Private

Practice, Chicago, IL, United States; 3Consulting Psychologist, Frances Xavier Warde Preschool
and Elementary School, Chicago, IL, United States.

This workshop, jointly facilitated by a child psychologist and pediatrician, examines how the use
of clinical hypnosis promotes resilience and self-mastery in children and families who have
been “dealt” chronic health concerns that are highly sensitive to the effects of stress and
worry. Specific issues covered include severe food allergies, headaches, functional abdominal
pain, asthma and others. These conditions can introduce trauma (acute and/or chronic) into the
lives of parents and children. For example, highly charged experiences that may evoke traumatic
psychological responses include events such as an emergency room visit for anaphylaxis,
learning how to use epinephrine injectors and taking them to social events, being coached on
how to question adults regarding food ingredients at school and restaurants, etc. Some
psychosocial experiences (e.g. missed school because of abdominal pain or headaches) are not
acute, but become chronic or repetitive mini-traumatic moments for children and families.
Additionally, the anticipatory worry and pro-active preparations required to prevent acute
allergic reactions or symptom flare-ups of conditions like eczema and asthma are in some ways
similar to features of traumatic experiences. Bio-behavioral management is ongoing and must
take into account the developmental needs of the child. We will consider patients and families
who demonstrate resilience and who are suffering. Our aim is to explore how clinical hypnosis
enhances positive self-regulation in children and teens experiencing discomfort, anxiety, and
fears associated with chronic health conditions that are mediated by worry and stress. This will
be a case-based lecture format with interactive participation, including patient video
vignettes. By exploring specific examples of office based clinical hypnosis and teaching children
self-hypnosis to regulate their symptoms and manage anxiety, attendees will acquire new
knowledge and skills which will improve their ability to teach/coach children how to use the
self-regulatory tools of self-hypnosis. With these tools, patients can better cope with distress and
symptoms that fall into the domains of emotions, thoughts, behaviors, and sensations. We will
teach ways to craft post hypnotic suggestions for pediatric populations that are connected to
treatment goals related to symptom management, self-regulation, cognitive discrimination skills,
developing internal resources, behavior, and positive expectancies.

References:

1. Boyce WT at al. (2001). Autonomic reactivity and psychopathology in middle childhood.

British Journal of Psychiatry 179: 144-150
2. Boyce WT et al. (1995). Psychobiologic reactivity to stress and childhood respiratory illness:
Results of two prospective studies. Psychosomatic Medicine 57:411-422.
3. Bell MA, Deater-Deckard K. (2007). Biological systems and the development of self-
regulation: integrating behavior, genetics, and psychophysiology. J Dev Behav Pediatr 29: 409-
420.
4. Erikson, E. (1950). Childhood and Society. N.Y. W.W. Norton.
5. Rutter, M. (1987). Psychosocial resilience and protective mechanisms. American Journal of
Orthopsychiatry, 57:316-331.
6. Kaiser, P. (2011): Childhood Anxiety, Worry, and Fear: Individualizing Hypnosis Goals and
Suggestions for Self-Regulation, American Journal of Clinical Hypnosis, 54:1, 16-31
7. Tracey I (2010). Getting the pain you expect: mechanisms of placebo, nocebo and reappraisal
effects in humans. Nature Medicine, 16:1277-83.
8. Van der Kolk BA, McFarlane AC, and Weisaeth L (Eds.). (1996). Traumatic stress: the effects
of overwhelming experience on mind, body, and society. New York: Guilford Press
9. Walsh F (2003). Family resilience: a framework for clinical practice. Family Process, 42: 1-
18.
10. Pendergrast, R. A. (2017). Incorporating Hypnosis into Pediatric Clinical Encounters.
Children, 4(3), 18. http://doi.org/10.3390/children4030018
11. Lyons, Lynn (2015). Using Hypnosis with Children: Creating and Delivering Effective
Interventions.NY: WW Norton .

Presenter: Peter, Burkhard

Is there a homo hypnoticus? New data on the hypnosis-prone personality.

Burkhard Peter1.
1MEG-Stiftung, Munich, Germany.

New data on the hypnosis-prone personality will be presented to compare it with already
published data:

Peter, B., Vogel, S., Prade, T., Geiger, E., Mohl, J., & Piesbergen, C. (2014). Hypnotizability,
personality style and attachment. An exploratory study. Part 1: General results. American Jounal
of Clinical Hypnosis, 57(1), 13-40. doi:10.1080/00029157.2014.906152

Peter, B., Prade, T., Vogel, S. E., Mohl, J., Geiger, E., & Piesbergen, C. (2014). Hypnotizability,
personality style and attachment. An exploratory study. Part 2: Results with particular focus on
sex. American Journal of Clinical Hypnosis, 57(1), 41-56. doi:10.1080/00029157.2014.910746

Peter, B., Böbel, E., Hagl, M., Richter, M., & Kazén, M. (2017). Personality styles of German-
speaking psychotherapists differ from a norm, and male psychotherapists differ from their female
colleagues. Frontiers in Psychology, 8, 840. doi:10.3389/fpsyg.2017.00840 --
> http://bit.ly/2si794R

Presenter: Pinco, Susan

Heal in the space between the words: Exploring the intersection of hypnosis, neurobiology,
and quantum physics.

Susan Pinco1.
1Milton Erickson Foundation, Phoenix, AZ, United States.

Ericksonian Hypnosis, NLP and Social Psychology teach us the importance of meta-
communication and the power of tone, tempo, and numerous other para-verbal
elements.[1][4] This seminar will focus on a particular element of meta-communication; silence.
Silence as it occurs within the context of speech and within context of our sessions [9][10] In
attending this seminar, participants will experience new ways of thinking about, eliciting and
utilizing silence drawing from elements of Ericksonian Hypnosis[1],
Brainspottingtm[2] mindfulness[2], quantum physics[5][6], interpersonal neurobiology[8], and
somatically oriented therapies.
Attendees will be encouraged to rethink their relationship to the space between words and to
develop techniques that enhance their own palette and that of their clients; amplifying
effectiveness both in and between sessions.

Key Words:

Metacommunication, Experiential, Neurobiology, Silence, Somatic

References:

1. Jeff zeig
2. Richard Moss
3. David Grand
4. Dani Beaulieu
5. Gary Bruno Schmidt
6. Dana Zohar
7. Norman Doidge
8. Damir Del Monte
9. Cook 1964
10. Genlin 1957

Presenter: Precht, Anke

Hypnosis in individual sports and competition.

Anke Precht1.
1ankeprecht, Offenburg, Germany.

Individual sports on a high level require prefect concentration, focus and stress regulation for
practice and competition. In competition, the mental condition of the athlete is very ofeten the
deciding factor about defeat or victory.

In this workshop, we will see some of the most effective techniques that can be used for frequent
challenges in individual sports and competition as reaction time, pain control, control of stress
levels for all phases of a competition, as well as for challenges in training and preparation as
discipline, regeneration, control of nervousness and others.

We will proceed by practical teaching, training and life demonstration. The workshop ist open to
all practitioners with experience in hypnosis and interested in hypnosis in sports with or without
experience in this domain.

Keywords: Sports, competition, excellence, hypnosis

References:

1. Hypnose; Zeitschrift für Hypnose und Hypnotherapie, Band 10, Oktober 2015: casuistry
2. Einschlafzauber; Das sanfte Einschlafritual für Kinder, Kösel, 2015

Presenter: Quintin, Michèle

Le corps est un excellent média pour une induction hypnotique rapide, la position de
neutralité pour modifier les schémas mentaux liés à la souffrance .

Michèle QUINTIN1.
1Psychologie Clinique , Université Libre de Bruxelles, Bruxelles, Belgium; 2Hypnose Clinique ,

Institut Milton Erickson, Bruxelles, Belgium; 3Traumatismes, EMDR-Belgium, Bruxelles,

Belgium.

Psychologue de formation, je dirige un centre psycho médical traitant les problématiques du

stress chronique et traumatique, et j’ai été amenée à devoir intervenir rapidement sur les états de
choc, les troubles neurovégétatifs et la douleur intense.

La relation corps/mental m’a toujours parue évidente ; les troubles psychosomatiques jalonnant
ma pratique, je me suis donc très vite orientée vers une approche psychocorporelle. Je suis aussi
devenue rapidement une fervente adepte de la stratégie éricksonienne et de l’incroyable efficacité
de l’état hypnotique. C’est, à mon sens, une véritable facilitation pour le praticien et une
merveilleuse ouverture à des ressources méconnues pour le patient.

J’ai développé une technique pour lutter contre les problématiques du stress, l’excitation neuro-
végétative et les somatisations qui y sont associés. Cette technique permet d’apaiser le système
nerveux central et de travailler directement sur la perception douloureuse. Avec le temps, la
gestuelle est devenue simple et précise ; elle permet au sujet d’atteindre rapidement une position
de confort et de neutralité sensitive. Cela se fait par un travail spécifique effectué au niveau des
jonctions articulaires et de la posture du corps, ainsi qu’au niveau musculaire et respiratoire. Ce
travail va influer sur la perception habituelle du positionnement corporel et changer par là des
notions telles que l’espace et le temps. Nous sommes au croisement des influx sensori-moteur et
sensitivo-émotif. La kinesthésie consciente est modifiée, le sujet peut plonger rapidement dans
un état d’hypnose très rapidement, abaisser son seuil d’absorption des stimulations et modifier sa
sensibilité somesthésique générale. Je vais enrichir cette sorte de détachement par un travail sur
la respiration et grâce à lui, accéder à une forme d’euphorisation ; le patient pourra alors
bénéficier d’une diminution de ses perceptions et de ses schémas mentaux douloureux.

Presenter: Radoux, Daniel

How to deal with resistant patients (psychotherapeutic failures): A methodology of change
using hypnosis.

Daniel Radoux1.
1Advanced Advice, Céroux-Mousty, Belgium.

The specific attitudes of resistant patients have already been discussed by Dr Milton Erickson in
his time. Such patients need to be respected. However, in the psychotherapeutic process, they can
be a source of “psychotherapeutic failure.” This abstract and conference deal with such
“resistant patients.”

What to do with the patients who have taken what I call here the “path of the battler…”? This
means: these patients who have visited “a certain number” of psychologists, psychotherapists,
psychoanalysts, and other psycho…, and despite this, they are still confronted with their
problems, in other words, few changes occurred in their daily lives. They are feeling lost, and
they are looking for a “savior” who can help them to find at least a solution to their problems
and/or life difficulties.

This methodology of change has been developed to address these “resistant” subjects. The goal
is to bypass a number of resistant phenomena, to activate their unconscious mind in order to find
“the best solutions” and to help the patient get rid of their psychological (and also somatic)
symptoms.

A study of 300 “resistant subjects” (data per outcome) will be presented using hypnosis as the
main tool (as well as others…). The results will be analyzed. This study shows that, even after 5,
10 or 20 years of various psychotherapeutic approaches with few results, these “resistant
patients” can finally see the end of the tunnel. It’s not a “magic wand,”; they just roll up their
sleeves and get to work. Statistic data will be given.

Presenter: Radoux, Daniel

Biological sense of psychological and somatic symptoms: A new paradigm emerging.

Daniel Radoux1.
1Advanced Advice, Céroux-Mousty, Belgium.

Recently, some new psychosomatic models appear giving a biological sense (a specific meaning)
for each psychological sign and especially for each somatic symptom in a body. It is based on a
link between the mind and the body, and the mind can influence the body. In other words, behind
the symptoms, the patient experiences some specific conflicts, which can be somatized in their
bodies, thus inducing some symptoms. It is also considered that mental processes can act as a
major factor affecting medical outcomes. With this new approach, the patients can understand
why they develop their symptoms, and specifically, they can get rid of them.
This new way of thinking is also based on the concept that it is the unconscious part of the
subject that has implemented the specific solution (the disease symptoms): of course, we are
speaking of an “archaic solution.” It is obvious the patients are not very happy with these
solutions (their illness!). The medical system uses drugs to solve this issue, regardless of what
underlies the symptoms: the biological sense. Most of the time, it works pretty well, and in other
situations, it is more complicated. Psychotherapy can help the patients to understand what
happened in their mind and what to do to return to health.

With this new point of view of the symptom, we can help the patients understand why their
unconscious has selected these “archaic solutions.” However, it is not enough. The next step is to
activate the patients’ unconscious and help them implement new solutions (the “best solution”
model).

Using this model in my daily practice, I realized that, often, the patients have great difficulty
finding new solutions to their conflicts, and these “archaic solutions.” The difficulty is the
“releasing” of their conflicts (the “lâcher prise” in French).

A new methodology of change, using hypnosis and other tools, has been developed in connection
with new discoveries in neurosciences. This methodology is based on the neuro-functional
biology of the patient’s brain. Some examples will be discussed during the conference.

Presenter: Radoykov, Stéphane

How can hypnosis help you treat people suffering from severe and discouraging psychiatric
conditions?

Stéphane Radoykov1.
1Medical university, Paris Descartes University, Paris, France.

Some psychiatric patients are particularly difficult to treat, not only because of the severity of
their symptoms and suffering, but also because of the scarcity of their accessible resources
(helping relatives, past achievements, hobbies...). The patients for which therapeutic results are at
best very thin also have a tendecy to trigger rejection from healthcare professionals, because they
tend to remind us how powerless we can be in helping them.

When I started my residency in psychiatry, I worked in a locked psychiatric ward, and I had to
work with patients for who all usual methods of care hadn't proven useful. The chief doctor of
the department then put me in charge of several hopeless-labelled situations and gave
me authorization to try new psychotherapeutic approaches.

I will present in this demonstration what strategies were helpful in these situations, including
hypnotic techniques and exercises, and more importantly how and in what order they were
implemented. To this effect, I will present three clinical vignettes of people suffering from:
 • severe autistic disorder, with mental and speech retardation, and aggressive behavior
towards self and others
• intellectual disability, with agressive behavior, delusional ideas, epilepsia, conversion
disorder and bedsores
• severe recurrent depressive disorder, with multiple serious and lethal suicide attempts,
with no outside support

The same therapeutic strategy was used in other situations, that will not be presented unless
timing allows it.

References:

1. Dabney M. Ewin, 101 Things I Wish I'd Known When I Started Using Hypnosis, 2009
2. Dabney M. Ewin, Bruce N. Eimer, Ideomotor Signals for Rapid Hypnoanalysis: A How-to
Manual, 2006
3. Jane Parsons-Fein hypnosis videos of Dr Erickson
4. Jay Haley, Uncommon Therapy, 1973
5. Philippe Aim, Écouter, parler : soigner - Guide de communication et de psychothérapie à
l'usage des soignants, 2015

Presenter: Rainville, Pierre

Pavlov meets the Zen brain: Mindfulness in the fear of pain.

Pierre Rainville1.
1Faculty of Dentistry, Université de Montréal , Montreal, QC, Canada.

Pain is an aversive experience signaling an immediate threat to the body and involving
distributed brain networks underlying immediate perceptual, affective, cognitive, physiological
and behavioral responses, as well as associative processes underlying secondary cognitive-
affective elaborations. The adaptive function of acute pain may further generalize through basic
learning mechanisms allowing for the prediction of future pain. Mindfulness-based meditation
has been associated with a reduction in pain sensitivity and with a modification of pain-related
brain responses. Such changes may lead us to predict a reduction in fear-learning driven by pain.
However, recent psychophysiological studies from our laboratory suggest that learning processes
allowing for the generation of valid predictions of pain occurrence are preserved in experienced
meditators along with basic protective (reflexive) responses to the noxious input. In contrast, the
hyperalgesic effects of fear-learning were reduced or blocked in meditators. This is consistent
with the notion that the first arrow of pain triggers adaptive responses, including associative
learning processes underlying valid pain prediction, and that mindfulness practice may help
protect against the second arrow involving the maladaptive anticipation, elaboration and
rumination underlying pain suffering. This basic research may help delineate the alleged benefits
of mindfulness-based interventions and improve our understanding of the underlying
mechanisms.
Presenter: Richard-Herbert, Peter

Metaphoric Symbolised Imagery (MSI): Resolving unconscious issues relating to

personality parts or ego states – An ego state analysis resolution technique by Peter
Richard-Herbert.

Peter Richard-Herbert1.
1School of Human Health and Social Sciences, Central Queensland University, Rockhampton,

Australia.

Metaphoric Symbolised Imagery (MSI)TM is a rapid change, therapeutic technique grounded in

Ego State Therapy and mixed Methods Research.[1][2]

This workshop presents the practical application of new Ego State Analysis techniques to resolve
unconscious issues.

The paradigm of Ego State Analysis as a therapeutic approach utilises the concept of the original
works of Freud, Jung and Federn’s Ego States as unconscious mechanisms. [4][5][3]

This recently founded, psychodynamically established technique uses the unconscious process of
archetypal symbolism[5][4] and applied association presented within a series of imagery
transitions to resolve and develop everyday patient coping capabilities. The multidisciplinary
process of MSI repairs, resolves and integrates underlying unsupported, conflicted or traumatised
ego states[1][2] on a deep therapeutic level promoting patient resilience and future coping.

Metaphoric Symbolised Imagery (MSI) can be combined with most modern hypnotic,
counselling or psychologically recognised therapeutic applications.

Metaphoric Symbolised Imagery (MSI) as a therapeutic application was launched at the

International Congress of Hypnosis in Bremen in 2012 by Peter Richard-Herbert.[6] Great interest
was further shown when MSI workshops were delivered at the ISH European Congress in
Sorrento Italy in 2014. At the Parts Therapy Congress in Heidelberg in 2015 an extended version
of MSI was presented called the ‘Soul Train’ where demonstration with volunteer students was
of special interest.

The therapeutic application of Ego State Analysis (ESA) is applied through the use of
Metaphoric Symbolised Imagery. ESA is grounded by Doctoral University research, and MSI is
one of the main components to come from this research. This presentation therefore encapsulates
Ego State Analysis with Peter Richard-Herbert's MSI methods and integrates them to offer new
and relevant techniques for psychological and hypnotherapeutic intervention and application. [6]

References:
1. Berne. E (1961). Transactional Analysis in Psychotherapy. Secaucus, USA: Castle Books.
2. Emmerson. G. (2003). Ego State Therapy. Camarthen, UK: Crown House.
3. Federn. P. (1952). Ego Psychology and the Psychoses. New York, USA: Basic Books
4. Freud. S (1927). The Ego and the Id. London, UK Hogarth Press.
5. Jung. C. (1964). Man and his Symbols. Ljublijana, Yugoslavia: Mladinska Knjiga
6. Richard-Herbert. P. (2014). The Australian Journal of Clinical Hypnotherapy & Hypnosis. Vol
36, Number 2. ASCH, Australia.

Presenter: Richard-Herbert, Peter

Ego state analysis: "Back to the Future" – An ego state analysis resolution technique by
Peter Richard-Herbert.

Peter Richard-Herbert1.
1School of Human Health and Social Sciences, Central Queensland University, Rockhampton,

Australia.

Ego State Analysis (ESA) is a psychological theory, methodology and therapeutic application
that identifies and analyses the adaptive and maladaptive ego states within personality.

The therapeutic approach of Ego State Analysis (ESA) TM is grounded in eight (8) years doctoral
research at Central Queensland University (Australia), and utilises the original work of Freud[4],
Jung[5], Berne[1] and Federn’s theories[3] to concede Ego States as unconscious mechanisms that
can be analysed, interpreted and resituated within this theory. Ego States are held to hold voice,
energy, entity and function within personality. Ego State Analysis carries the theoretical belief
that Ego States firmly exist and are employed as commonly occurring defence mechanisms and
unconscious clusters that protect the psyche from emotional overload and supply a function. The
therapeutic application of Ego State Analysis is applied through the use of Metaphoric
Symbolised Imagery(MSI)TM[6]and several other therapeutic techniques.

The advancement of methodology directly relating to the analysis of ego states and ego state
clusters serves in the function and the application of those findings to the patient’s life. The
application of Ego State Analysiscand the individual functioning of each ego state adds to the
therapeutic outcomes. The methodology of Ego State Analysis can be used to target and identify
specific actions of individual ego states and their related clusters as applicable to the patient’s
life or relationship situations[4]. Ego State Analysis analyses the construct of each individual ego
state, it’s function, it’s coping capabilities. ESA examines the state’s defence mechanisms [4],
clusters and function that make up that individual ego state, and that state’s overall hierarchical
contribution to the psyche.[3][4][5]

Ego State Analysis, it's findings and results have advanced into the profiling and examination of
personality parts and their presenting ego states [2][3]. This therapeutic address entitled "Back to
Future" is presented in tribute to Helen Watkins, her theories and practical talents related to Ego
State Therapy.[7]
Peter Richard-Herbert's method of integrating Ego State Therapy[2][7] and Ego State Analysis
produces a well-rounded therapeutic tool offering new and relevant techniques for psychological
and hypnotherapeutic intervention and its application.

References:

1. Berne. E (1961). Transactional Analysis in Psychotherapy. Secaucus, USA: Castle Books.

2. Emmerson. G. (2003). Ego State Therapy. Camarthen, UK: Crown House.
3. Federn. P. (1952). Ego Psychology and the Psychoses. New York, USA: Basic Books
4. Freud. S (1927). The Ego and the Id. London, UK Hogarth Press.
5. Jung. C. (1964). Man and his Symbols. Ljublijana, Yugoslavia: Mladinska Knjiga
6. Richard-Herbert. P. (2014). The Australian Journal of Clinical Hypnotherapy & Hypnosis. Vol
36, Number 2. ASCH, Australia.
7. Watkins. J.G. and Watkins. H.H. (1997). Ego States: theory and therapy. New York, USA:
W.W. Norton.

Presenter: Robles, Teresa

Le travail avec la sagesse universelle pour rendre l’hypnose plus efficace .

Teresa Robles Dr1.

1Centro Ericksoniano de Mexico, Mexico City, , Mexico.

Le travail avec la sagesse universelle pour rendre l’hypnose plus efficace

La Sagesse Universelle est un concept que j’ai développé pour désigner les ressources de tout
l’Univers présentes en chacun de nous.

On peut l’utiliser sous différentes formes :

1. Pour induire rapidement une transe chez le patient en lui proposant de mettre le travail dans
ses mains, c’est-à-dire en provoquant une dissociation.

2. Pour susciter les ressources internes inconscientes et inexplorées.

3. Pour déclencher des processus et les laisser aux mains de la Sagesse Universelle afin qu’ils se
poursuivent de manière protégée.

Après une brève présentation théorique du concept suivie de démonstrations, les participants
pourront le mettre en pratique.
Presenter: Roelants, Fabienne; Watremez, Christine

Hypnosis and surgery.

Fabienne Roelants1, Christine Watremez1.

1Anesthesiology, Saint-Luc Hospital Université Catholique de Louvain, Brussels, Belgium.

As Anesthesiologist, we use hypnosis every day with every patient at the induction of the
anesthesia or when we perform loco-regional anesthesia or analgesia but also with a local
anesthesia for surgery (thyroidectomies, parathyroidectomies, breast cancer surgeries, inguinal or
ombilical hernias, plastic surgeries, knee arthroscopies, ...).

The goal of this whorkshop is to show you how to proceed from the patient's arrival at the
hospital until his departure. At the end of the session, you will be able to know how to be in the
right conditions to succeed with an hypnosis for surgery (how to do a therapeutic alliance with
the patient and an alliance with the healthcare team, how to be organised before, the day and
after surgery). Moreover, we will present you different techniques of induction of hypnosis, how
to maintain hypnosis during all the surgery, how to react when the patient is uncomfortable and
finally how to do posthypnotic suggestions in the context of surgery.

We will show you a lot of small movies so you will visualize the different procedures.

References:

1. M. Mourad, C.Watremez, A. buemi, F. Musuamba, JL. Scholtès, D. Patrono, MA. Docquier,

T. Darius, F. Roelants. Feasability of the video-assisted thyroid surgery under hypnosis
associated to local anesthesia. Surgical Research Updates.2014;2:1-5

Presenter: Rosen, Gunnar

Hypnosis as treatment method before delivery for common childbirth fears such as anxiety
and pain.

Gunnar Rosen1, Dr Nina NA Asplin1, Nina Asplin1.

1University of Oslo, institute of Pain Medicine, Oslo, Norway.

Many women experience childbirth fear to such a degree that it has a very negative impact on
physical and mental well-being. Also this fear seriously disturbs going through the different
biological phases and processes that are common when delivering a baby. Anxiety and pain are
well known clinical issues which has to be dealt with in a proper way to make a trusty room for
the childbirth. Only doing this onsite may not be that easy because there might be previous bad
experiences both according to pain and anxiety in the patients life history. Pre scanning for such
events and addressing underlying themes for proper treatment are necessary and now making
possible training for going through the process of delivery. Clinical state dependent patient
communication and the use of hypnosis before childbirth has been showing promising
results. This presentation is giving highlights of own and contemporary studies and giving
recommendations for the combination of group- and individual treatments for optimal results.
Hypnosis may her be used both as treatment of previous bad experience, relaxation training and
optimizing in your own way going through the different phases of childbirth.

References:

1. Werner A1, Uldbjerg N, Zachariae R. Antenatal hypnosis training and childbirth experience: a
randomized controlled trial.Birth. 2013 Dec;40(4):272-80. doi: 10.1111/birt.12071.
2. Madden K1, Middleton P, Cyna AM, Matthewson M, Jones L. Hypnosis for pain management
during labour and childbirth. Cochrane Database Syst Rev. 2016 May 19

Presenter: Rosen, Gunnar

Phantom limb pain / The mystery of a ghost in the brain Can hypnosis change the haunting
ghost .

Gunnar Rosen1.
1University of Oslo, Institute of Pain Medicine, Oslo, Norway.

Phantom limb pain / The mystery of a ghost in the brain

Can hypnosis change the haunting ghost

Admiral Nelson is one of the famous persons who has reflected on this ghost due to his own
personal experiences when loosing his arm in battle but still being able to feel it rather lively. If
you may experience an arm that actually does not exist there has to be some higher spirit or God
having the power to create this experience. So the solution for the admiral was to believe in this
and become religious which of course his religious mistress did not mind. Today’s modern brain
scanning with the fMRI and PET allow us to unravel different activities in the brain, but why
does this activity persist and how may hypnosis change this very bizarre experience, which is
actually being integrated with the perception of the entire body. Does hypnosis allow us to
communicate with the ghost and then create an opportunity for change? Contemporary clinical
findings are here reviewed and compared with the latest research.

References:

1. Phantom limb pain in the human brain: Unraveling neural circuitries of phantom limb
sensations using positron emission tomography, F. Willoch, G. Rosen et al. Annals of Neurology
Dec 2000
2. Phantom Limb Pain, Modells for understanding and treatment of pain with hypnosis. Dr
Gunnar Rosén, doctoral thesis Bergen University 2002
Presenter: Rosen, Gunnar

Hypnosis and treatment of chronic pain.

Gunnar Rosen1.
1University of Oslo, Institute of Pain Medicine, Oslo, Norway.

WORKSHOP

Clinical use of hypnosis in the treatment of chronic pain

Uncovering underlying mechanisms and the personal experience of pain and the use of the
patients resources is seen as a therapeutic interaction between patient and therapist each
contributing with their own expertise due to personal experience and clinical know how.
Patient’s individual experience of pain and own resources are then used together with the
therapists clinical skills as a platform for customizing the hypnotherapy. Building bridges
between sensory feelings of pain to more comfortable experiences of the patient’s choice.
Demonstrations, cases and exercises are giving an opportunity for training and shaping up your
therapeutic skills in the field of hypnosis and pain

Presenter: Roux, Sophie

L'intégration de l'hypnose au traitement des personnes ayant subi une commotion

cérébrale ou un AVC.

Sophie Roux1.
1Psychologie, Clinique de psychologie et de neuropsychologie, Sherbrooke, QC, Canada.

Depuis quelques années, la commotion cérébrale à la "cote"! Les Lindros, Crosby, Bergeron ... y
ont contribué. Pourtant, cette affection existe depuis la nuit des temps et les conséquences qui
sont rattachées sont souvent dramatiques. Maux de tête, douleurs, hypersensibilité aux stimuli,
problèmes de concentration et de mémoire, perte de confiance en soi et d'estime, anxiété et
dépression interviennent à tour dans le quotidien des personnes qui en souffrent. Mais aussi que
la guérison de l'hypnose de façon tout aussi valable pour soigner comme traitement à travers les
outils classiques d'intervention. Nous verrons, notamment à travers l'histoire de Bobby et d'autres
accidentés, de quelle manière cette technique séculaire agit comme un levier puissant pour
permettre des améliorations notables,
References:

1. DAMASIO, Antonio R. Le Sentiment même de soi: corps, émotions, conscience. Éditions

Odile Jacob, 1999.
2. Hammond, D.Corydon. Métaphores et suggestions hypnotiques. Éditions Le Germe, 2004.

Presenter: Ruysschaert, Nicole

La résilience; comment se préparer et survivre les contretemps de la vie.

Nicole Ruysschaert1.
1Psychiatrist Psychotherapist Trainer hypnosis & psychotraumatology, Private Practice,

Antwerp, Belgium.

La résilience, décrit par Boris Cyrulnik comme « un tricot qui noue une laine développementale
avec une laine affective et sociale », est importante dans la vie de tous et toutes. En effet,
plusieurs personnes risquent une expérience traumatisante en cour de leur vie : viol, harassement,
abus sexuel, guerre, accidents, maladies sérieuses…. Même une vie ‘normale’, avec les
exigences au travail, les deadlines, les défis dans un environnement en évolution perpétuelle, en
compétition demande de la flexibilité, et des ressources pour faire face.

Pourquoi certaines personnes fleurissent, gardent leur optimisme, même dans des situations
pénibles ? Comment expliquer que certaines personnes sont plus à risque des ESPT après
confrontation avec des événements traumatisants ? Est-ce que la résilience fait la difference ?
Est-ce que la résilience est déterminée génétiquement ou une caractéristique malléable
(« nature » or « nurture ») ? Est-ce qu’on pourrait donner un « vaccin mentale »« pour activer
l’immunité et mieux faire face aux contretemps? Plusieurs recherches montrent le rôle
fondamental de l’attachement.

La résilience est un facteur important dans la prévention et le rétablissement des états de stress
posttraumatiques, déterminant comment on s’en sortira et aussi un facteur qui nous prépare pour
mieux faire face aux événements stressants. L’hypnose est bien apte pour favoriser le
développement des aspects caractéristiques qui contribuent à la résilience. Dans l’atelier je donne
quelques exemples d’exercices pour développer les aspects contribuant à la résilience, comme
accès aux ressources de résilience, le renforcement du Moi, les changements de perspectifs,
l’espoir, la pseudo-orientation vers l’avenir, les métaphores.

Presenter: Ruysschaert, Nicole

Can hypnosis really change the emotional brain? Additional value of hypnosis in
psychotherapy. Neuro-psychotherapy or neuro-hypnosis?.
Nicole Ruysschaert1.
1Psychiatrist Psychotherapist Trainer hypnosis & psychotraumatology, Private Practice,

Antwerp, Belgium.

Some neuroscience data of psychotherapy, matching with clinical experience demonstrate which
processes are required for resolving issues which impair quality of life. ‘Brain-wise’ therapists
mobilize these processes. Creating rapport in hypnosis, particularly mobilizes the social
engagement system or ventral vagus system. In this state clients feel more safe and at ease to
face problems or confront themselves with painful issues. Symptoms are seen as the best way
one had to deal with issues when they arose. Clients get insights in the why of some symptoms
and are assisted in hypnosis to explore them. Symptoms are keys, to open doors from where
implicit memories can be found and the process of memory deconsolidation / reconsolidation can
be started promoting lasting changes. Psychotherapy with hypnosis where intensive mind/body
interaction is activated facilitates the processes of lasting changes.

Presenter: Ruysschaert, Nicole

Mind the life traps : Hypnosis to resolve dysfunctional trauma-related schema’s.

Nicole Ruysschaert1.
1Psychiatrist Psychotherapist Trainer hypnosis & psychotraumatology, Private Practice,

Antwerp, Belgium.

From a solution – oriented attitude, we like clients to find solutions, resources, to move forward
in life, to overcome problems, find a way out of their anxiety, relational problems, conflicts,
mood swings. Some clients suffer from recurrent problems, facing the same life traps over and
over again. They don’t move forward, being stuck in some repetitive patterns or schema’s.
Others are frequently triggered by current life situations. Body/mind are keeping the score of
previous life experiences. Identifying maladaptive schemas and helping clients to develop
awareness of their reactions and triggers is a first step. In hypnosis we explore earlier roots and
life experiences of their maladaptive schemas with affect/somatic bridges and other explorative
methods. Unlocking the emotional potential and having corrective emotional experiences are a
necessary part of therapy to move forward. From there on clients are ready to create a better
future.

Presenter: Saury, Jean-Michel

The contribution of hypnosis to the rehabilitation of stroke survivors.

Jean-Michel Saury1.
1Brain injury rehabilitation department, Danderyd Hospital, Stockholm, Sweden.
Introduction: Stroke is a disease affecting primarily older people, but around 20 percent of stroke
victims in Sweden are below 65 years. Stroke is the major cause of acquired physical and
cognitive disabilities, and impacts the emotional and social capacities dramatically thereby
affecting the quality of life of survivors and their families. The focus of rehabilitation is
primarily directed against post-stroke physical and cognitive incapacities, whereas the emotional,
motivational and social consequences are less systematically assessed and treated. As hypnosis
can handle emotional difficulties, as well as enhance motivation, the restauration of cognitive
functions and the facilitation of physical recovery and social participation of stroke survivors, it
may be a suitable complement to standard rehabilitation practices.

Objectives: My purpose is to describe how hypnosis has been introduced as a complement to the
standard stroke rehabilitation program for younger survivors at an intensive day-care unit.

Method: After an assessment period, patients exhibiting emotional or motivational difficulties

are offered hypnotherapy treatment. The treatment starts with an induction
procedure including breathing techniques and visualizations, leading to deep relaxation that
decreases stress and anxiety reactions. The patient gets a recording of the session for everyday
practice. Patients are also instructed in the practice of self-hypnosis. The program offers three to
five more sessions including suggestions directed at specific individual issues. Breathing
techniques, visualization, guided imagery and meditative techniques may be used. Each session
is accompanied by posthypnotic suggestions to increase motivation. The focus of treatment
includes post-stroke anxiety, concern with body change, depression, lack of motivation,
persistent fatigue, impaired motor planning and attention and learning impairments.

Results: Nearly all patients have accepted the hypnotherapeutic interventions and report a high
degree of satisfaction.

Conclusion: Stroke is a disease that can lead to major disabilities that require intensive
rehabilitation services. Hypnosis can contribute to effective rehabilitation by helping patients
handle their emotional reactions after stroke, promoting motivation and the restauration of their
self-esteem.

Presenter: Schaller, Laurent

Hypnose en toute simplexité. À partir de la simplicité et de l’attention sur le lieu du corps

symptomatique, toucher à la complexité et trouver le courage pour aimer le symptôme et
en prendre soin..

Laurent Schaller1,2.
1Policlinique médicale universitaire du Flon, CHUV, Lausanne, Switzerland; 2Médecine générale

FMH et psychosomatique ASMPP, Cabinet médical, Moutier, Switzerland.

À partir de la simplicité et de l’attention lors d’une anamnèse contextualisant un moment
symptomatique, c’est-à-dire grâce à un pacing pur, il est possible de condenser la complexité
allant jusqu’à celle de plusieurs pathologies intriquées.

La simplicité de la catalepsie de la main permet ensuite de toucher le cœur du problème, de

donner une place à la partie négligée du patient.

En revisitant les notions ericksonniennes de pacing et de leading, avec l’éclairage des relations
du soi selon Stephen Gilligan, cet atelier permettra aux participants d’apprendre le courage utile
pour aimer le symptôme pour en prendre soin.

Ce modèle d'intervention est applicable et adaptable dans (presque) toutes les circonstances pour
ouvrir différentes perspectives et peut suffire à une réconciliation thérapeutique avec le trouble.

References:

1. www.laurentschaller.net

Presenter: Schekter, Michael; Oswald, Martine

Hypnotic age regression therapy: A synergic technique.

Michael Schekter1, Martine Oswald1.

1Private Practice, Lausanne, Switzerland.

The goal of medical hypnosis has always been to permit the patient to bring about positive
changes. As therapists, we learn various hypnotic techniques and other forms of therapy. This
workshop is designed to review a tested model of age regression therapy while looking at its
synergy. We present an innovative and updated model. It is composed of the different hypnotic
procedures which when sequentially combined produce significant and lasting changes
surpassing their individual effects. The patient’s resources and abilities are enhanced. A
successful treatment leads to lasting healing, symptom disappearence and a better ability to adapt
to life’s ongoing challenges and problems.

We propose to review the different individual hypnotic procedures combined within this age
regression technique: targeting, safe place, age regression through the modified affect bridge,
description and observation, re-parenting, evocation followed by active change, bringing back
the new resource, re-integration of dissociated self, post hypnotic suggestion, return to the safe
place. We will take time to indicate and observe essential variations at each step necessary to
successful therapy. Although seemingly complex and difficult to write about, the procedure in
itself is rather easy to follow for the therapist and the patient.

Our patients have permitted us to use video film excerpts of their therapies or their case histories
to provide workshop participants a first hand experience of the procedure and it’s results. We
will present using power point in French and English. The videos in English will be subtitled in
French and vice versa. Fully convinced that learning is best accomplished through experience, a
live demonstration of the initiating procedure, targeting will be demonstrated to the
participants. If time permits a simple procedure for stabilization will be demonstrated with
its protocol provided in French and English. The technique is useful to treat Phobia, and other
situations creating anxiety, PTSD, Conversions, Somatoform pain, Psychosomatic illnesses,
Pathological mourning, nightmares, dependent and insecures personnalities with
overwelming feelings of abandon and insecurity, rebuilding self estime and updating
competences after depression, etc.

Presenter: Schmidt, Gunther

Hypnotherapy from a systemic perspective: Optimal tailored context-fitting

hypnotherapeutic interventions.

Gunther Schmidt1,2.
1
Milton-Erickson-Institute Heidelberg, Heidelberg, Germany; 2sysTelios clinic for
psychosomatic health development, Waldmichelbach-Siedelsbrunn, Germany.

Ericksonian hypnotherapy and systemic therapy are closely related. Milton Erickson always
worked in thinking in patterns and how to initiate healthy changes by introducing differenes in
problematic patterns. The most important interventions in Systemic therapy are derived by
Ericksonian approaches.
In the workshop it will be shown theoretically and practically how the creation of human
experience can be specifically described as building up neuropsychological networks in
continuous relation to ecosystemic feedback loops and how quickly and very efficently
unconscious competences can be activated to create healthy solutions which fit adequately to the
relationship context of the systems of clients. It will also be shown how even very severe
symptoms can be transformed into valuable competences and utilized for system-appropriate
solutions
The author who for 20 years was vice-president of the German Milton-Erickson society has
founded the hypnosystemic approach which integrates Ericksonian hypnotherapy and systemic
concepts to be applied very successful in psychotherapy (in- and outpatient settings) as well as
in counseling, supervision and organisational development.
He has authored 5 books and more than 50 articles in the field of psychotherapy and counseling.

References:

1. Bernhard Trenkle
2. Jeffrey Zeig
Presenter: Schmidt, Gunther

The client as the competent expert for his/her solutions: Symptoms utilized as competences
for unrespected needs.

Gunther Schmidt1,2.
1sysTelios clinic for psychosomatic health development, Waldmichelbach-Siedelsbrunn,

Germany; 2Milton-Erickson-Institute Heidelberg, Heidelberg, Germany.

In this demonstration workshop it will be shown how the hypnotherapeutic cooperation between
therapist and client can be co-created as totally equally ranked encounter with intensive
tranparency and continious communication on at least two levels- namely direct conversation
and helpful assisting metacommunication about every step of the cooperation. So the well known
Ericksonian indirectness can be transformed in a cooperation in which the client has always the
free choice and authority to define the next steps and becomes so the leading supervisor and
authority above the whole co-creative cooperation.

It also will be shown how together symptoms can be understood as unconscious solutions and
self-hypnotic interventions to solve internal and interactional conflicts and how- always with a
very respectful and dignifying perspective- the client can choose his/her appropriate and context-
related solution with the help of his involuntary competence and knwoledge system (somatic
markers).

References:

1. Bernhard Trenkle
2. Jeffrey Zeig

Presenter: Schweitzer, Jérôme

Cost analysis of adjunct Hypnosis with sedation during outpatient interventional radiologic
procedures.

Jérôme Schweitzer.
1Anesthésie, Groupe Hospitalier Mutualiste, Grenoble, France.

L’intérêt de l’utilisation de l’hypnose lors de certains actes chirurgicaux pour remplacer une
anesthésie générale (AG) a été démontré ces dernières années. De nombreuses personnes pensent
en revanche que cela coûte beaucoup d’argent et de temps.

N’ayant pas cette impression, nous nous sommes intéressé au coût de l’hypnosédation pour la
structure hospitalière.
Dans une étude prospective, consécutive, observationnelle en soins courants, nous avons
comparé 73 patientes bénéficiant d’une conisation sous hypnose associée à une anesthésie locale,
à 55 patientes bénéficiant de la même chirurgie sous anesthésie générale.

Nos résultats montrent que la réalisation d’une conisation sous hypnosédation permet une
économie de 160 € par acte chirurgical (AG : 517€ / H : 357€), avec un geste identique dans les
2 cas (même taux de complications et le même taux de marges saines).

Le taux de réussite de l’hypnosédation est important (95%), avec seulement 4 cas (/73) de
conversion en anesthésie générale.

Le temps d’occupation de salle d’opération est identique à celui de l’AG (AG : 37,9 min / AG :
38,6 min). Le temps passé par les patientes du groupe hypnosédation en salle de surveillance
post interventionnelle et dans le service de chirurgie ambulatoire est nettement plus court
(différence observée de 173 min entre les 2 groupes), ce qui explique une grande partie des
économies réalisées par la structure.

Cette étude montre donc que l’hypnosédation répond aux exigences actuelles de maitrise des
coûts de santé et du développement de la chirurgie ambulatoire.

Presenter: Servaye, Jessica

Apport de l'hypnose Ericksonienne dans la prise en charge thérapeutique individuelle d'un

deuil compliqué en pédopsychiatrie : À partir d'une observation clinique .

Jessica Servaye1,2.
1Interne pour le Diplôme d'Etudes Spécialisées en Psychiatrie, Université de Paris-Ile-De-

France-Ouest Simone-Veil, Montigny-le-Bretonneux, France; 2Formation en Hypnose

Ericksonnienne, Collège d'Hypnose et Thérapies Intégratives de Paris, Paris, France,
Metropolitan.

Introduction : Chez l’enfant, les 3 phases habituelles du deuil (choc, repli, résolution) sont
souvent physiologiquement plus longues et la souffrance se traduit par divers symptômes
pouvant entraver le développement psycho-affectif de l’enfant, surtout s’il existe des facteurs de
risque de deuil pathologique.

Observation clinique : Ava, 8 ans, consulte accompagnée de sa mère en centre-médico-

psychologique de pédopsychiatrie, 2 mois après le décès brutal et inattendu de son père. Ava
présente un sentiment de culpabilité, une instabilité émotionnelle et des symptômes anxieux avec
sensation chronique d’insécurité ; sans critères diagnostiques suffisants pour une pathologie
psychiatrique circonscrite telle que décrite dans le DSM-V.
Prise en charge : Nous débutons une psychothérapie individuelle pour la soulager des
symptômes actuels, au rythme d’une séance de 30 minutes par semaine, et ce pendant 10
semaines.

Outre des éléments psychothérapeutiques classiques, j’ai intégré dans les différentes séances des
outils d’hypnose Ericksonnienne.

Au cours des séances nous avons travaillé à appréhender la réalité de la perte et à rétablir le
sentiment de sécurité interne chez Ava.

D’abord en lui permettant de faire appel à ses ressources inconscientes pour dire au-revoir à son
père dans des conditions sécures, puis d’ancrer un souvenir agréable vécu avec celui-ci à travers
des suggestions directes et indirectes.

Nous avons travaillé ses angoisses sur le thème de la maladie et de la mort, et leurs
manifestations psychosomatiques, par l’établissement d’un lieu-sûr et d’un endroit-ressource
confortable dans le corps.

Nous avons aussi travaillé en hypnose l’appel à des personnes-ressources pour Ava, afin de
sécuriser à nouveau les liens avec les personnes de son entourage actuel et de lui permettre
d’investir progressivement le quotidien et l’avenir.

Conclusion : L’apport d’outils d’hypnose Ericksonnienne dans une psychothérapie individuelle

chez un enfant confronté à un deuil pourrait donc permettre de soulager ses symptômes et
prévenir l’apparition d’un deuil pathologique, c’est-à-dire d’une pathologie psychiatrique
circonscrite au cours, ou après la période de deuil.

Presenter: Servillat, Thierry; Martens Christian

La rencontre hypnotique.

Thierry Servillat1, Christian Martens2.

1Loire Atlantique, Institut Milton H. Erickson de Rezé/Ipnosia Nantes, Rezé, France; 2Paris,

Institut Milton H. Erickson d’Île de France, Paris, France.

Cet atelier présenté en coanimation montrera et fera expérimenter aux participants comment
établir une relation qui puisse être qualifiée d'hypnotique, c'est-à-dire qui soit soignante en soi,
sans recourir à la notion d'outil.

Une rencontre, au plein sens du mot, entre deux personnes humaines reliées par une intention
commune : l’exploration de nouvelles possibilités, au travers d’une expérience de conscience
modifiée.
Les deux animateurs s’inspireront d’une part de la tradition hypnotique, et particulièrement du
travail de Milton H. Erickson, et d’autre part de la tradition phénoménologique dont s’est
inspirée dès ses débuts l’école de Palo Alto.

Une première partie présentera des repères possibles pour guider la posture du thérapeute, son
attitude, son discours.

Des exercices viseront à faire expérimenter aux participants ces différents repères, afin que ceux-
ci puissent se situer ensuite à leur propre manière.

Une troisième et dernière partie visera, en grand groupe, à partager et à penser ensemble les
expériences vécues, et en fonction du temps disponible, à explorer créativement ensemble
d’autres dimensions de la relation hypnotique.

La partie conclusive consistera à imaginer des pistes pour des explorations complémentaires
futures.

References:

1. Thierry Servillat Découvrir l'autohypnose InterEditions Paris 2017

2. Thierry Servillat et Antoine Bioy Construire la communication thérapeutique avec l'hypnose
Dunod Paris 2017

Presenter: Shahidi, Enayatollah

Comparing the effectiveness of cognitive-behavioral therapy (CBT) and hypnotherapy on

symptoms intensity and quality of life in patients with irritable bowel syndrome (IBS).

Enayatollah Shahidi1, Negar Fouladi2.

1Treatment Department, Iranian Scientific Society of Clinical Hypnosis, Tehran, Iran (Islamic

Republic of); 2Department of Psychology, Islamic Azad University, Saveh Branch, Saveh, Iran
(Islamic Republic of).

Introduction: Irritable Bowel Syndrome (IBS) is a common functional gastrointestinal disorder

affecting 10-20 percent of general population. It shows a chronic relapsing pattern usually related
to increased stress and anxiety. There are no observable pathologic changes in the bowels and the
disorder is wholly attributed to functional disharmony of mind and gastrointestinal tract.
Symptom intensity has a statistical relation with patients' quality of life (QOL).

Since 1980, a good number of researchers including Whorwell, Weydert, Olafur and Palsson
have showed the 80% efficacy of hypnosis in the treatment of IBS. In the year 2008, National
Institute for Health and Clinical Excellence, has recommended hypnotherapy for the treatment of
severe IBS of more than 12 months duration.

Objectives: The first objective of the present study was to develop and provide a
hypnotherapeutic plan for IBS that was operated for the very first time in Iran. The second
objective was to determine and compare the effectiveness of hypnotherapy and CBT on IBS
symptoms intensity and quality of life.

Methods and materials: Forty eight individuals, whose diagnosis of IBS has already been
confirmed by a gastroenterologist using the diagnostic criteria of Rome III, participated in this
randomized controlled clinical trial. The participants has been randomly and equally assigned
into three groups (16 people each): CBT, hypnotherapy, and control group.

The data collection tools consisted of IBS Symptom Severity Scale (IBS-SSS) and the Irritable
Bowel Syndrome Quality of Life (IBS-QOL) questionnaire. Data were collected before the
therapeutic intervention, as pre-test, and after the treatment, as post-test. The extracted data was
examined statistically via repeated measures MANCOVA in SPSS software.

Patients of both of the treatment groups have been treated by eight 60-minute sessions.

Findings: Our study showed significant reduction in symptom intensity and quality of life in the
treatment groups compared to the control group. There was a predominance of improvement in
the hypnotherapy group.

Conclusion: According to the results, hypnotherapy and CBT can both be implemented as
effective treatments for IBS. Nevertheless, since hypnotherapy proved a bit more effective, we
advise therapists to learn and utilize hypnotherapeutic techniques as a potential method for
decreasing the clinical symptoms and increasing the quality of life of IBS patients.

References:

1. Lindfors P, Unge P, Arvidsson P, Nyhlin H, Bjomsson E, Abrahamsson H, Simren M. "Effects

of gut-directed hypnotherapy on IBS in different clinical settings: results from two randomized
controlled studies." Am J of Gastroenterology; 2012; 170(2): 276-85
2. Ebrahimi A, Naddafnia L, Neshatdust H, Talebi H, Afshar h, Daghaghzadeh H, Adibi P. "The
Effectiveness of Cognitive Behavioral Therapy on Symptoms Intensity, Quality of Life, and
Mental Health in Patients with Irritable Bowel Syndrome". Int J Body Mind Culture; 2015; Vol.
2, No. 2
3. Gonsalkorale W M, Whorwell P J. "Hypnotherapy in the treatment of Irritable bowel
Syndrome." European Journal of Gastroenterology; 2005; 17: 15-20

Presenter: Shahidi, Enayatollah

Equip the brain to work more efficiently: How to improve learning abilities by brain-
directed hypnosis.

Enayatollah Shahidi1.
1Treatment Department, Iranian Scientific Society of Clinical Hypnosis, Tehran, Iran (Islamic

Republic of).

Many children and adolescents experience problems both in learning certain materials/skills and
in performing or demonstrating them. In this regard, stress plays an important role.

This workshop is based on Milton Erickson’s early learning set technique and Lynda Hudson’s
accelerated learning introduced. Many accelerated learning techniques are simple to learn and
very helpful to teach students of any abilities.

In this workshop, the presenter introduces a well-designed and potent brain-directed

hypnotherapeutic approach to help people with learning problems. This approach, by using more
than 50 potent hypnotherapeutic techniques, enhances concentration, focusing, understanding,
learning, memorizing, and remembering.

The brain-directed hypnotherapeutic approach is especially helpful for those who:

• Do well at coursework but are anxious faced with tests and exams
• Underachieve or do not meet their expectations
• Need help with focus, concentration and organization of thinking and learning either in
class or with doing homework
• Display some symptoms of ADHD, whether or not they fulfil all the criteria for a
diagnosis
• Display some symptoms of Dyslexia, whether or not they fulfil all the criteria for a
diagnosis
• Lack confidence in their ability and have low self-esteem
• Have anxiety and/or emotional problems
• Are suffering from school phobia

At the end of the session, the presenter performs a live group hypnosis using the Early Learning
Set Induction Technique and utilizes the brain-directed hypnotherapeutic approach to accelerate
learning.

References:

1. Hypnosis and hypnotherapy with children, 4th edition, 2011; by Daniel P. Kohen; Karen
Olness; Routledge Taylor & Francine Group
2. Ericksonian approach: a comprehensive manual, 2nd edition, 2005, by Rubin Battino; Thomas
L. South; Crown House Publishing Limited
3. Scripts & strategies in hypnotherapy with children, 1st edition, 2009, by Linda Hudson;
Crown House Publishing Limited
Presenter: Shahidi, Enayatollah

Sport hypnosis: Train the brain to create a world-class champion.

Enayatollah Shahidi1.
1Sports Committee, Iranian Scientific Society of Clinical Hypnosis, Tehran, Iran (Islamic

Republic of).

The traditional model of sport psychology uses two primary interventions: having the athlete
practice being relaxed while engaged in sports; and having that same athlete imagine performing
perfectly.

As an ex-athlete and as a hypnotherapist who has worked with athletes for years, I believe this is
true but not enough!

There is no doubt that world champions need many capabilities other than the athletic skills per
se. These abilities include but are not limited to utilizing the integrated mind-brain-body unit,
self-confidence, self-esteem, and positive self-talk. On the other hand, some sporting competition
happens so fast that there is not much time to think during the event (e.g., blitz and bullets chess,
100-meter sprint).

Therefore, it is very important to create a proper mental stance and appropriate mind set to
execute automatically and effectively as fast as possible.

Troy Aikman, the former American Football champion, stated, “When you get to the elite level
in sports, athletically, what separates the really great performers are the ones who are mentally
tough and see things a little bit quicker than their competitors.”

In this workshop, to create that tough mind, the presenter introduces and fully explains an
effective five-phase protocol for using hypnosis to train the brain. The phases include:

1. Assessment of psychological needs of athletes, decide what interventions are indicated,

and decide whether the intervention is an event or a process.
2. Special considerations in using hypnosis with athletes and specific preparation of them
for hypnotic intervention.
3. Using alert hypnosis to help them develop a proper mental stance towards performance
and believe themselves as world champions.
4. Using hypnosis and hypnotic phenomena to help athletes do vivid imagination of
different performance situations, overcome performance anxiety, re-construct self-
confidence, restructure cognitions and much more.
5. Conditioning the athletes for performing their best at rivalry time and teaching them self-
hypnosis to rehearse the whole process by themselves.

References:
1. Sport hypnosis in practice, 1st Edition, 2011, By Joseph Tramontana, Crown House
Publishing
2. Hypnosis, self-hypnosis and mental training, 1st Edition, 2011, By Lars-Eric Uneståhl, Mental
Training Sweden
3. Winning the mind game: using hypnosis in sport psychology, 1st Edition, 2003; By John H.
Edgette; Tim Rowan; Crown House Publishing

Presenter: Siegrist, Claire-Anne; Wolff, Adriana

Programme Hypnose HUG, ou comment tout un hôpital universitaire choisit un nouveau

langage....

Adriana Wolff1, Claire-Anne Siegrist2.

1Anesthésiologie et Soins intensifs, Hôpitaux Universitaires de Genève, Genève,

Switzerland; 2Pédiatrie, Hôpitaux Universitaires de Genève, Genève, Switzerland.

Nous proposons de décrire – en 45 minutes environ - comment nous avons:

1. Construit un programme institutionnel de formation à plusieurs niveaux

(communication thérapeutique, hypnose clinique et formation continue)

- En établissant une large base de formation médico-soignante en communication thérapeutique

pour que les mots qui blessent ne soient plus utilisés et en créant ainsi un soin relationnel

- En définissant les prestations bénéficiant de l’hypnose clinique et estimant selon leur nombre
les besoins en hypnothérapeutes pour chaque service

- En définissant les contenus et la durée des formations selon ces besoins

- En établissant des partenariats pour disposer de formateurs médico-soignants répondant aux

exigences d’un milieu de soin

- En générant les ressources pour libérer les collaborateurs à former tout en assurant la continuité
des soins (remplacements)

2. Etablit l’architecture de fonctionnement (suivi des formations et prestations) assurant la

qualité

- En faisant alliance avec les hiérarchies pour faire accepter un cadre de fonctionnement et de
suivi des collaborateurs

- En demandant l’engagement des collaborateurs à pratiquer au terme de leur formation et à

suivre les activités de formation continue (supervisions, intervisions, etc.)
- En établissant dans le dossier patient un formulaire spécifique à remplir après chaque prestation
d’hypnose afin de permettre le suivi qualité des prestations aux patients et des prestataires

- En identifiant ainsi les collaborateurs nécessitant un soutien (mentorat, superviseurs, etc.) pour
initier ou améliorer leur compétence.

- En assurant le respect du cadre éthique de la pratique de l’hypnose

3. Convaincu la direction d’un hôpital universitaire d’investir dans un programme de

formation en communication thérapeutique et en hypnose clinique en faisant anticiper un
retour sur investissement

- En lançant des études d’impact pour montrer la valorisation pour les patients (satisfaction
accrue dans la prise en charge, patients-partenaires) et des soignants (mieux-être dans les gestes à
douleurs induites)

- En incluant les prestations d’hypnose clinique dans les soins facturés

- En transformant ce programme en un réseau transversal de

collaborations interprofessionnelles et interservices (pour la pratique et la formation continue en
hypnose clinique)- En établissant des méthodes d’extraction automatique de données pour
alimenter la recherche et en établissant une plateforme de collaborations entre les praticiens en
hypnose et les chercheurs.

Presenter: Signer-Fischer, Susy

Self-efficacy: To influence self-efficacy efficiently. Hypnosis with adults, children and

adolescents .

Susy Signer-Fischer1.
1Institute for Developmental and Personality Psychology at the University of Basel in

Switzerland , ZEPP, Zentrum für Entwicklung- und Persönlichkeitspsychologie, Basel,

Switzerland.

The topic of self-efficacy is an essential and lifetime aspect. Already babies like to take influence
on their environment for example by moving a mobile by a wire attached to their foot.

During schooltime and later on, self-efficacy is very important. The contrary is helplessness,
which can lead to hopelessness and depression.

In certain situations, influence can be taken directly as by learning and training harder to reach
better mathmarks.
Not always we can influence as we wish. The girl getting blind as a result of an illness could not
stop this process but she has learned the braille to enhance her situation.

It is often important to find out whether you can influence the situation yourself or whether it is
necessary to deal with the situation and the circumstances.

Even adults sometimes fall victimized. This can be caused, for example, by traumatisation, pain
or helplessness in certain life situations. This victim status can sometimes bring benefits to some
patients. It is important for these patients that they are coached to get more self-efficacy to find
their way out of this helplessness. In psychotherapy or counselling, hypnotic methods are very
helpful to have an adequate influence on one's own life.

References:

1. Signer-Fischer, S., Gysin, T. & Stein, U. (2014). Der kleine Lederbeutel mit allem drin.
Hypnose mit Kindern und Jugendlichen, 3. Auflage. Heidelberg: Carl-Auer.
2. Signer-Fischer, S. (2009b). Costrzione dell identità e immagine di sé. In M. L. Fasciana (A
cura di) L’ipnosi con i bambini e gli adolescenti (S. 81-102). Milano: Franco Angeli.
3. Signer-Fischer, S. (2000a). Die Stärkung des Selbstvertrauens in der Hypnotherapie. In K.-L.
Holtz, S. Mrochen et al. (Hrsg.), Neugierig aufs Grosswerden (S. 34–54). Heidelberg: Aue
4. Mischel, W. (2015). The Marshmallow Test. New Yotk: little Brown Company
5. Baumeister, R. F., & Vohs, K. D. (2011). Handbook of self-regulation: research, theory, and
applications. 2end ed. New York: The Guilford Press.

Presenter: Signer-Fischer, Susy

Sleep well and wake up well Hypnosis with children, adolescents and adults .

Susy Signer-Fischer1.
1Institute for Developmental and Personality Psychology at the University of Basel in

Switzerland , University of Basel, Basel, Switzerland.

Some children, adolescents, and adults have difficulties falling asleep over a long period of time
or even during a certain lifespan. Others find it diffcult to wake up in the morning or stay awake
during the day. This condition of starts during puberty thus making it hard for them to stay
focused and attentive.

In the workshop hypnotherapeutic methods will be developed in order to help them with their
sleeping and waking cycle.

References:

1. Signer-Fischer, S., Gysin, T. & Stein, U. (2014). Der kleine Lederbeutel mit allem drin.
Hypnose mit Kindern und Jugendlichen, 3. Auflage. Heidelberg: Carl-Auer.
2. Signer-Fischer, S. (1993c). Der Wachhund und der Schlafhund. Hypnotische Techniken zur
Behandlung von Schlafstörungen bei Kindern. In S. Mrochen, K.-L. Holtz & B. Trenkle (Hrsg.),
Die Pupille des Bettnässers (186–198). Heidelberg: Auer.
3. Lemola, S., Perkinson-Gloor, N., Brand, S., & Grob, A. (2013). Schlafhygiene, Schlafqualität
und psychische Gesundheit im Jugendalter: Eine schulbasierte Interventionsstudie

Presenter: Simonnet Garcia, Marie-Hélène

Transe-former votre cabinet.

Marie-Hélène Simonnet Garcia1.

1Vendee, Cabinet Dentaire, Saint Georges de Montaigu, France, Metropolitan.

Les patients réclament des traitements rapides, stables et le moins chers possibles. Ils négocient
leurs rendez-vous, les devis, le type de traitement. Ils refusent contraintes et inconforts. Même
s’ils ne respectent pas les consignes et oublient parfois leurs rendez-vous.

Dentistes et orthodontiste essaient d’être chaque jour plus performants. Ils se forment pour
répondre au mieux aux attentes de leurs patients. Mais le plateau technique demandé est de plus
en plus sophistiqué et les exigences administratives de plus en plus chronophages. Tout ceci
ajouté au stress et exigences des patients entraine parfois les chirurgiens-dentistes et les
orthodontistes dans le burn-out.

L’hypnose est un outil de choix pour rétablir une communication fluide et sortir du rapport de
force. Une aide précieuse pour la gestion du stress et de la douleur des patients. Un atout majeur
pour la cohésion d’équipe et pour faire face aux nombreux enjeux de notre profession.

Presenter: Simonnet Garcia, Marie-Hélène

Mise en scène pour passer du conflit à l'alliance thérapeutique.

Marie-Hélène Simonnet Garcia1, Maria-Soledad SANCHEZ SALAZAR1, Vanessa

RENAUDIN1, Véronique LEROUX1.
1Vendée, Cabinet dentaire, Saint Georges de Montaigu, France.

Soignants et assistantes qui assistent à nos consultations nous posent toujours les mêmes
questions :

Comment faites-vous pour que vos patients respectent aussi bien vos consignes ?

Comment faites-vous pour avoir si peu de rendez-vous manqués ?

Comment faites-vous pour que tous vos patients soient toujours aussi agréables ?
On dirait que tout est facile chez vous.

Une illustration vaut bien mieux qu’un long discours.

Venez assister à une mise en scène pour découvrir comment l’hypnose conversationnelle apaise
une situation conflictuelle en quelques secondes.

Presenter: Soffer, Liana

The Mysterious House Technique (MHT).

Liana Soffer1.
1Private Clinic, Merkaz Or Hanefesh - The Light of the Soul Center, Petah Tikva, Israel.

This technique was developed in order to diagnose and heal physical mental and emotional
problems. The MHT is based on a metaphor.

By using MHT, we can heal psychosomatic and emotional problems and alleviate symptoms of
organic and even degenerative diseases.

The principle of MHT is seeing the human body as a house. A person projects himself on a
house which he visualizes with the aid of hypnosis. Each area or room in the house represents an
organ or a system in the patient’s body. MHT enables the patient to observe himself from the
outside and experience what is occurring inside his body. The creation of dissociation enables
the patient to confront with internal problems, to cope with them and treat them successfully.
Rehearsing healing visualization many times will bring recovery or make a considerable change
in the patient’s condition.

There are 5 stages to the technique:

1. Getting the patient in a deep relaxed state

2. Visualization and description of the house
3. Changing and redesigning the house
4. Conclusions and insights from the process
5. Coming back to reality

This technique is suitable for individual as well as group therapy.

Essence of the technique: getting the patient in a relaxed state, leading him along the path toward
the forest clearing, where he visualizes a house. The patient will pay attention to the
surroundings, shapes, forms and front of the house and will describe all the details.
In an individual therapy, we can get information on what is happening and guide the patient
while progressing the process. Whereas group therapy, the guidance will be more general.

After the patient has described the house outers and all the details
he is free to make changes outside: improving the front and paint the house, planting a garden,
adding a pool etc.
After the renovation work, the patient is invited to describe the rooms – decorating, repairing or
building new rooms. Each area or room in the house does match a certain organ or system to
patient' body.

We suggest to the patient to draw his own conclusions and receive messages from the
subconscious.

We suggest to the patient to rehearse a certain “healing” visualization regarding the damaged
organ by self-hypnosis and to heal it. He should concentrate on one organ at a time.

This technique is fully described in my book “Hypnotic Dreams” that is now available in
English on Amazon site
https://www.amazon.com/dp/B072K7YDYT

All rights reserved to Liana Orin Soffer, MD © 2017

References:

1. The book "Hypnotic Dreams"

Presenter: Sollmann, Christoph

Covert anchoring used correctly in the treatment of addiction (practical workshop with
demonstration).

Christoph Sollmann1.
1Praxis am Forstwald, Dr. Sollmann & Kollegen, Krefeld, Germany.

Covert anchoring as a new approach in hypnosis has demonstrated its efficiency in the treatment
of addictions (i.e. with clients who overindulge in alcohol, cigarettes, junk food). The method,
introduced here, is a procedure from the field of aversion therapy. It includes elements of
hypnosis and the concept of anchoring, mainly associated with NLP.This workshop will
demonstrate the correct application of the method by the experienced therapist or coach and how
multilevel therapeutic communication, as practised by Milton H. Erickson, can be realised in a
covert manner.

The primary objective is to instruct the participant how to initialise this technique and transform
it into a real-life session and to incorporate into her/his therapeutical repertoire. On an overall
basis this workshop is about the practical implications that have been demonstrated in general
terms during the oral presentation, in this congress.

As a result of attending this workshop, participants will

1) Experience how the technique is initialised and developed in a practical demonstration;

2) Have the opportunity to exercise some elements of the covert anchoring approach and to
watch and participate in the process as a ‘client’ or ‘therapist‘;

3) Have the opportunity to practise hypnotic induction in the context of aversiontherapy,

deciding which core sentences are appropriate and inserting them in a near-to-the-practice-
situation.

This form of covert anchoring, as a type of aversion therapy, has been developed by the author
and can be particularly beneficial working with clients who have problems with the types of
overconsumption described above. In some cases it has proved the only effective method in
overcoming problems of this kind as demonstrated in the presentation, without resorting to the
use of chemical substances, as is otherwise usual in aversion therapy.

References:

1. Sollmann, C. (2015). The Technique of Covert Anchoring in Hypnosis and How It Is Used in
Clinical Practice. URL: https://www.researchgate.net/publication/
282640280_The_Technique_of_Covert_Anchoring_in_Hypnosis_and_How_it_is_Used_in_clini
cal_practice. DOI: 10.13140/RG.2.1.2217.5442.2015-10-07 T 05:56:04 UTC.
2. Sollmann, C. (2016). Die Methode des verdeckten Ankerns in der Hypnose und wie sie in der
klinischen Praxis angewendet wird. Hypnose-ZHH 11 (1+2), October 2016, 1–19.
3. Sollmann, C. (2016). The Technique of Covert Anchoring in the Treatment of Addiction.
Kongressbeitrag: NLP-Conference, London 15–17th April 2016. URL: https:
//www.researchgate.net/publication/289367817_The_Use_of_Covert_Methods_in_Hypnosis.

Presenter: Spiegel, Eric

Healing the wounds of development: Attachment theory & hypnosis, an integrated

approach to psychotherapeutic treatment.

Eric Spiegel1.
1Private Practice, Spiegel Psychological Services P.C., Philadelphia, PA, United States.
In this workshop, we will consider the role that hypnosis can play in a relationally attuned
therapeutic relationship towards facilitating attachment repair in patients with developmental
arrests (e.g. affect dysregulation, lack of identity formation, boundary difficulties, etc.). The
relational and psychological functions of attunement, representation, and mentalization are
essential components of a secure attachment experience. The presenter will review the literature
and describe how hypnosis can be applied in working with each of these areas of
attachment. With this in mind, the presenter will share his attunement, representation, and
mentalization (ARM) hypnotherapeutic attachment approach to psychotherapy for
developmental repair. In its’ utilization of shared attention, tone of voice, pacing, language, and
imagery, clinical hypnosis as a state, relationship, and technique offers psychotherapists a way of
introducing a healthy attachment experience and renewing appropriate developmental
functioning in these patients. In didactic and experiential (demonstration, clinical video)
training, participants will learn the ARM approach; develop and practice hypnotic suggestions
for each of the three ARM components; and discern how ARM advances related treatment
goals. Participants will develop increased competency in (1) understanding how the therapeutic
relationship in general, and clinical hypnosis from an attachment frame in particular, can be
utilized to re-build developmental structure and re-engage reflective functioning and (2) utilizing
specific applications of clinical hypnosis towards this aim.

This workshop will also be helpful to attendees in impacting patient care across several levels. It
will incorporate theory, research, and applied practice in preparing attendees to work directly
with their patients in an informed manner. On a theory level, participants will improve their
conceptualization and diagnostic abilities from an attachment perspective. Furthermore, they will
learn how clinical hypnosis fits with concepts from an attachment approach. On a research level,
participants will learn about empirical studies which support the efficacy of an attachment
approach, and of the utilization of clinical hypnosis within such an approach. On a practice level,
attendees will learn how to identify types of insecure attachment and character maturity on the
borderline/narcissistic/neurotic spectrum based on observation of affect dysregulation and other
related symptoms. Attendees will also increase their proficiency in developing and administered
targeted hypnotic interventions to increase reflective functioning from within this theoretical
model based on their diagnostic observations.

References:

1. Spiegel, E.B. (2016a). Attachment-Focused Hypnosis in Psychotherapy for Complex Trauma:

Attunement, representation and mentalization. International Journal of Clinical and Experimental
Hypnosis, 64(1), 45-74.
2. Spiegel, E.B. (2016b). Attachment-focused psychotherapy and The Wounded Self. American
Journal of Clinical Hypnosis, 59, 47-68.
3. Zelinka, V., Cojan, Y., & Deseilles, M. (2014). Hypnosis, attachment and oxytocin: An
integrative perspective. International Journal of Clinical and Experimental Hypnosis, 62(1), 29-
49.
4. Phillips, M. (2013). Mending fences: Repairing boundaries through Ego State Therapy.
American Journal of Clinical Hypnosis, 56(1), 39-53.
5. Baker, E.L. (2000). Reflections on the hypnotic relationship: Projective identification,
containment, attunement. International Journal of Clinical and Experimental Hypnosis, 48(1),
56-69.
6. Diamond, M. J. (1987). The interactional basis of hypnotic experience: On the relational
dimensions of hypnosis. International Journal of Clinical and Experimental Hypnosis, 35, 95–
115.
7. Fonagy, P., Gergely, G., Jurist, E.L., & Target, M. (2002). Affect Regulation, Mentalization,
and the Development of the Self. New York, NY: Other Press.
8. Brown, D. & Elliott, D. (2016). Attachment disturbances in adults: Treatment for
comprehensive repair. New York, NY: Norton
9. Marmarosh, C., Markin, R., & Spiegel, E.B. (2013). Attachment in group psychotherapy.
Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
10. Daitch, C. (2008). The affect regulation toolbox: Practical and effective hypnotic
interventions for over-reactive client. New York, NY: Norton.
11. Brown, D. & Fromm, E. (1986). Hypnotherapy and hypnoanalysis. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence
Erlbaum

Presenter: Spiegel, Eric

Utilizing hypnosis in the treatment of narcissistic wounds in psychotherapy: A relational

approach.

Eric Spiegel1.
1Private Practice, Spiegel Psychological Services P.C., Philadelphia, PA, United States.

The dimension of narcissism influences a wide-range of character presentations and treatment

issues occurring in psychotherapy in our modern age. Although clinical and public attention is
often focused on the categorically-derived DSM-V diagnosis of Narcissistic Personality
Disorder, narcissistic wounds stemming from attachment failures are a more frequent occurrence
in the development of the self. These arrests in the full formation of the self and their subsequent
re-appearance in later relationship interactions are often referenced in a wide range of
treatments.

In this workshop, we will consider how Kohut’s self psychology and current innovations in
attachment theory can help us understand narcissistic wounds and treatment issues across the
dimension of narcissism. Further, we will focus on the role that hypnosis can play in a
relationally attuned therapeutic relationship towards facilitating attachment repair in patients
with developmental arrests associated with narcissistic wounds (e.g. false-self identify formation,
affect dysregulation, boundary difficulties, etc.). Through a mixture of didactic and experiential
training, participants will develop increased competency in (1) understanding how the
therapeutic relationship in general, and clinical hypnosis from an attachment frame in particular,
can be utilized to re-build developmental structure and re-engage reflective functioning in this
population of patients and (2) utilizing specific applications of clinical hypnosis towards this
aim.

Participants who complete this training will develop increased competency in diagnosing
narcissistic spectrum issues and symptomatology. They will develop and/or enhance a relational
model for working with narcissistic wounds. Most importantly, they will learn how to integrate
relationally-focused hypnosis interventions into such a model. They will leave the workshop
with specific interventions, imagery, and language tailored for working with narcissistic
spectrum presentations.

References:

1. Spiegel, E.B. (2016) Attachment-focused psychotherapy and the wounded self, 59(1), 47-68.
2. Alladin, A. (2013) Healing the wounded self: Combining hypnotherapy with Ego State
Therapy. American Journal of Clinical Hypnosis, 56, 3-22.
3. Kohut, H. (1977). The restoration of the self. New York, NY: Intl Universities Press
4. Schulze, L., Dziobek, I., Vater, A., & Roepke, S. (2013). Gray matter abnormalities in patients
with Narcisistic Personality Disporder. Journal of Psychiatry Research, 47(10), 1363-1369.
5. Russ, E., Shedler, J., Bradley, R., & Westen, D. (2008). Refining the construct of Narcissistic
Personality Disorder: Diagnostic criteria and subtypes. American Journal of Psychiatry, 165,
1473-1481.
6. Alladin, A. (2016). Emotional disorders and the Wounded Self. American Journal of Clinical
Hypnosis, 59(1), 1-3.
7. Levy, K. (2012). Subtypes, dimensions, levels, and mental states in narcisissim and
Narcissistic Personality Disorder. Journal of Clinical Psychology, 68(8), 886-897.
8. Wallin, D. (2007). Attachment in Psychotherapy. New York, NY: Guilford.
9. Allen, J., Fonagy, P., & Bateman, A. (2008). Mentalizing in Clinical Practice. Washington,
DC: American Psychiatric Publishing.

Presenter: Spier Miller, Robbie

Screening hypnosis clients for success.

Robbie Spier Miller1,2,3,4.

1Master Hypnotist Society Canada, Burlington, ON, Canada; 2 International Medical & Dental

Hypnotherapy Association, Laceyville, PA, United States; 3National Guild Of Hypnotists,

Merrimack, NH, United States; 4National Federation Of Neuro Linguistic Programming
(NFNLP), Venice, FL, United States.

Client success with hypnosis is highly dependent on appropriate client selection, and the client's
attitude and expectations. Workshop participants will have the opportunity to learn practical
skills to:

- screen potential hypnosis clients to see if hypnosis is the right fit

- know what steps to take to maximize the chances of client success with hypnosis

The insights and techniques to be shared have been gleaned from applying these techniques
to tens of thousands of hypnosis clients in Canada, the U.S. and internationally over a period of
30 years. The presenter has worked directly with over 2000 hypnosis clients using this
approach.

Presenter: Spier Miller, Robbie

Scott McFall's inductions of the masters.

Robbie Spier Miller1,2,3,4.

1Master Hypnotist Society Canada, Burlington, ON, Canada; 2National Guild Of Hypnotists,

Merrimach, NH, United States; 3International Medical & Dental Hypnosis Association,
Laceyville, PA, United States; 4National Federation of Neuro Linguistic Programming, Venice,
FL, United States.

Attendees will have the opportunity to learn:

• Tried and true approaches of the hypnosis masters.

• 2 powerful hypnosis inductions that apply the wisdom of the masters that you can begin
to use immediately.
• The factors that contribute to facilitating a powerful hypnotic experience.

References:

1. Wizard Within by Al Krasner

2. New Peoplemaking by Virginia Satir
3. Professional Hypnotism Manual by John Kappas
4. Mind Probe Hypnosis by Irene Hickman
5. My Voice Will Go With You by Milton Erickson

Presenter: Spooner, Diane

Maux du trauma traités : Présence et mots sensoriels et dissociatifs.

Diane Spooner1,2.
1
Psychologie , CHU Ste-Justine, Montréal, QC, Canada; 2Psychologie, Société Québécoise
d'Hypnose, Montréal, QC, Canada.

THIS PROPOSAL WAS SUBMITTED AS VIDEO AND DEMONSTRATION WORKSHOP!!!.

Une approche, brève et préventive, adaptée au contexte d’intervention en milieu hospitalier,

«urgent» et «bref suivi», fut mis en place afin de traiter la souffrance et le trauma face au risque
de mort (mère, bébé) ou décès du bébé (MIU, IMG, RPPM) et les entraves à l'attachement
et au deuil.
L'atelier débutera avec des situations cliniques illustrant le recours à l’hypnose en situation
«d'urgence» et lors du «bref suivi» de patientes, démarche pouvant se dérouler avec les 2
parents et aussi en présence d'un traducteur.

Exemples de situations traitées en «urgence»: un état de sidération chez une mère (état
létal du bébé) et les «flash back » perturbant la vie de d'autres mères (hémorragie, césarienne,
décès).

Exemples de situations traitées au cours d'un «bref suivi» (4-8 r.v.): dames enceintes affligées
par l’ESPT ou la dépression dont le trauma datait de la grossesse antérieure. Des patientes
s’avèrent parfois réfractaires à l’hypnose.

L'atelier permettra aux participants d'apprendre à instaurer des stratégies

d'accompagnement afin d'activer les ressources du patient et les effets bénéfiques de
l'hypnose. Cette démarche implique l'alliance validant des ressentis initiaux et
facilitant l'émergence d’expériences sensorielles liées à diverses formes de bien-être tout en le
recentrant dans son corps.

La transe une fois induite, parfois avec les SBA des mouvements oculaires (MO) de
l’EMDR, est suivi du « Ne Rien Faire » de Brosseau en lien avec le concept de Roustang
notamment. L'approfondissement de la transe, si besoin, s’effectue à partir de signaux
idéomoteurs.

Puis, des suggestions (5) en alternance avec des thèmes apaisants évoquent des manifestations
sensorielles avec des actions symboliques. Autres formulations recourues concernent : « Là,
où tout est possible » et une suggestion post-hypnotique.

La peur massive de la mort et le sentiment d’avenir « bloqué » peuvent se dénouer en 1 ou 2

séances d'hypnose avec un temps préparatoire à cet effet avant l'accouchement. Cette approche
permet aussi de lever les entraves lors de deuil traumatogène.

Ainsi, l’hypnose pratiquée très précocement après l’impact traumatique permettrait d’éviter la
chronicisation de divers symptômes et de la souffrance invalidante qui entravent la vie des
patients.

References:

1. Brosseau G. L'hypnose une réinitialisation de nos cinq sens. Paris, Inter Édition, 2012
2. Dehaene S. Le code de la conscience. Paris, Odile Jacob, 2013.
3. Roustang F. Jamais contre d'abord: la présence d'un corps. La fin de la plainte. Il suffit d'un
geste. Savoir attendre. Post-face: Agathe ou «ne rien faire». Paris, PUF, 2015.

Presenter: Suarez-Buratti, Beatriz

Benefits of Ericksonian hypnotherapy in patients with mild cognitive impairment: Eight
case report of improvement in psychological and behavioral symptons.

Beatriz Suarez-Buratti1,2,3.
1Hypnotherapist, HipnosisPsicologos, Madrid, Spain; 2Master Program in Ericksonian

Hypnotherapy, Instituto Erickson Madrid, Madrid, Spain; 3 Neuropsychologist Clinical research

team, Hospital Universitario Gregorio Marañón, Madrid, Spain.

Introduction: Mild cognitive impairment (MCI) is a diagnostic entity characterized by cognitive

changes without impairment of activities of daily living and insufficient severity to represent
dementia. Psychological and behavioral symptoms are common features of MCI occurring in up
to 75% of patients. Psychological symptoms include depression and anxiety; behavioral
symptoms are irritability, motor activity or sleep alterations. The negative impact of these
features has been associated with reduced quality of life and increased risk of progression to
dementia or of institutionalization. Despite growing evidence for the benefits of psychotherapy
in elderly patients, there is a lack of studies investigating the application of hypnotherapy for
treating neurobehavioral symptoms in patients with MCI.

Objectives: The aim of this study is to find whether patients with MCI can benefit from
Ericksonian hypnotherapy and to determine areas of change or improvement in psychological
well-being and behavioral symptoms.

Methods: Participants were eight MCI patients (ages 64-72) and their partners as
informants. These MCI patients demanded treatment with Ericksonian hypnosis for problems,
such as fear of signing, repetitive need to urinate, bad mood, irritation, chronic headaches or fear
of falling. Patients received individual hypnotherapy in private practice over a 9 month period in
2-5 sessions lasting 2 hours each. Ericksonian conversation and personalized formal hipnosis
inductions were applied. Indirect suggestions were delivered in metaphors based on utilization
principles of Ericksonian intervention. Each patient was asked to practice at home listening daily
to a personalized recording. Outcome measures were obtained from observation and
neuropsychiatric assessment. Comparison between baseline and end of treatment measurements
were analyzed.

Results: Beneficial effects of Ericksonian hypnotherapy in patients with MCI were observed in
measures of improved psychological well-being, reduction in behavioral symptoms and better
quality of life. Special beneficial results originated in unexpected treatment situations dealing
with revelation of traumatic events. Spontaneous reminiscence of trauma experiencies occured
during the application of techniques of ericksonian conversation which required special
therapeutic strategies.

Conclusion: Ericksonian hypnotherapy can be an effective and rapid therapeutic modality in

patients with MCI suffering neurobehavioral symptoms.

References:

1. Apostolova L.G. & Cummings J.L.(2008). Neuropsychiatric Manifestations in Mild Cognitive

Impairment: A Systematic Review of the Literature. Dement Geriatr Cogn Disord 25:115–126
https://doi.org/10.1159/000112509
2. Olazarán-Rodríguez J., Agüera-Ortiz L.F., Muñiz-Schwochert R. (2012). Behavioural and
psychological symptoms of dementia: prevention, diagnosis and treatment. Rev Neurol 2012; 55
(10): 598-608.
3. Short, D., Erickson, B.A. & Erickson Klein, R (2005) Hope & Resiliency: Understading the
Psychotherapeutic strategies of Milton H. Erickson MD. Bancyfelin, Wales: Crown House
4. Reyes-Figueroa JC et al. (2010) Psychological and behavioural symptoms as factors of
progression to Alzheimer-type dementia in mild cognitive impairment. Rev Neurol; 50: 653-60.
5. Petersen, R. (2016). Mild Cognitive Impairment. Continuum (Minneap Minn). Apr; 22(2
Dementia): 404–418. doi: 10.1212/CON.0000000000000313

Presenter: Suarez-Buratti, Beatriz

Brief hypnotherapy solutions to perinatal anxiety and infertility stress.

Beatriz Suarez-Buratti1,2.
1Psychotherapy, HipnosisPsicologos, Madrid, Spain; 2Master Program in Ericksonian

Hypnotherapy, Instituto Erickson Madrid, Madrid, Spain.

WORKSHOP PROPOSAL

Brief presentation outline:

In their search for motherhood, women may encounter a variety of adverse physiological and
psychosocial events related to this reproductive period. Pregnancy planning and the antenatal
period can be times of joy and positive experiences for women and couples seeking parenthood,
but also of stress and difficulties such as infertility, pregnancy loss, premature birth. The
perinatal period is a time of heightened risk for developing mental health problems. In our
society, up to 20% of women who are trying to conceive or are pregnant, experience symptoms
that go beyond depression, to include anxiety, panic attacks, post-traumatic stress disorder and
other psychological conditions.

• Panic attacks, anxiety and symptoms of depression are a frequent occurrence during
pregnancy and in assisted reproductive treatments (ARTs).
• If left untreated, anxiety and panic attacks can have severe consequences for mother
and child, yet not all women have the necessary auto-regulation and self efficacy abilities
for overcoming every crisis.
• Ericksonian hypnosis and psychotherapy help pregnant and infertile women by providing
solutions and tools for overcoming severe anxiety attacks within a short period of time.
• Effective Ericksonian solutions by means of conversational hypnosis and formal trance
work based on the use of resources of the patient and response ratification and
achievements.
Case illustrations and an experiential exercise will be used to explore personalized metaphors
and analogies introducing post-hypnotic suggestions in relation with the following treatment
objectives:

• Management of clusters of somatic symptoms and physical responses such as fainting,

heart palpitations, nausea, choking sensation, vertigo.
• Coping with medical procedures and techniques.
• Infertility treatment adherence.
• Coping with bad medical news (death of embryos; failure to conceive).
• Pregnancy loss mourning.
• Preparing a secure attachment bond with baby.
• Problem-solving in ambiguous situations (egg and sperm donor; gestational surrogacy;
therapeutic abortion indicactions).

References:

1. Alessandra Biaggi, Susan Conroy, Susan Pawlby, and Carmine M. Pariante (2016).
Identifying the women at risk of antenatal anxiety and depression: A systematic review. J Affect
Disord. 2016 Feb; 191: 62–77.doi: 10.1016/j.jad.2015.11.014
2. Poleshuck, E. L., y Woods, J. (2014). Psychologists partnering with obstetricians and
gynecologists: Meeting the need for patient-centered models of women’s health care delivery.
American Psychologist, 69(4), 344-354.
3. Yapko, Michael (2012). Trancework: An Introduction to the Practice of Clinical Hypnosis.
4ed. New York: Routledge.

Presenter: Sugarman, Laurence

Hypnotic climate change: Changing our minds about how hypnosis changes our minds.

Laurence Sugarman1, David Alter2, David Reid3.

1College of Health Sciences and Technology, Rochester Institute of Technology, Rochester, NY,

United States; 2Partners in Healing and the Institute for Brain-Behavior Integration, Minneapolis,
MN, United States; 3Private Practice, Fisherville, VA, United States.

Milton H. Erickson described hypnosis as a context for therapy, not therapy itself. He wrote,
“You use hypnosis not as a cure but as a means of establishing a favorable climate in which to
learn.” If we define trance as the process of plasticity – within and without hypnotic contexts –
and hypnosis as a skill set that perturbs trance and produces psychobiological climate change,
what then are core skills of hypnosis? What are the interpersonal communication strategies that
drive psychobiological plasticity beneath ritual, induction and diagnosis? What is the hypnosis in
the therapy? In this experiential skills workshop we will parse, demonstrate and practice those
responses that cultivate wonder, uncertainty and ideodynamics within hypnotic conversations.
Based upon these experiences, we will discuss new models of hypnosis as well as professional
education and training in the discipline. We hope to change your mind about how hypnosis
changes our minds.

Brief Presentation Outline:

Introductions

1. Who are you and who are we

2. Orientation to the workshop format and learning objectives

Some definitions and demonstrations.

1. Mind
2. Trance
3. Hypnosis
4. Utilization

Parsing and practicing basic skills

1. Kneading: responses that encourage embodiment and ideodynamics

2. Wondering: responses that disrupt sets, introduce uncertainty
3. Wandering: contingent responses that create progress
4. Regression: evocation of previous experiential resources

Hypnosis versus therapy.

1. Hypnosis as climate change. “Creating a favorable climate for change.” (MHE)

2. Therapy as evidence-based clinician-directed strategy (e.g. exposure/response prevention,
progressive muscle relaxation, multisensory dissociative imagery).
3. Hypnosis can function as resource evocation, a catalyst for therapy.
4. Further demonstration

Implications for education

1. Whither inductions
2. Feasibility

Summary and discussion

References:

1. Hope, A.E. & Sugarman, L.I. (2015). Orienting Hypnosis. American Journal of Clinical
Hypnosis, 57(3) 212–229.
2. Alter, D.S. & Sugarman, L.I. (2017). Reorienting hypnosis education. American Journal of
Clinical Hypnosis, 59(3) 235-259.
3. Reid, D. B. (2016). Hypnotic induction: Trance enhancing or myth promoting? American
Journal of Clinical Hypnosis, 59(2), 128–137.

Presenter: Sugarman, Laurence

Symptoms as solutions: Hypnosis and biofeedback for autonomic regulation with young
people who have autism spectrum disorder.

Laurence Sugarman1.
1College of Health Sciences and Technology, Rochester Institute of Technology, Rochester, NY,

United States.

Autonomic dysregulation has been proposed as a core impairment in people who meet criteria
for autism spectrum disorder. It is posited that early developmental impairments lead to
decreased vagal influence and sympathetic overarousal that result in difficulty with social
communication. Cognitive rigidity and repetitive behaviors manifest as mitigating self-regulatory
efforts. The therapeutic implications of this premise are that fostering innate self-regulatory
abilities using hypnosis and biofeedback can be highly effective, especially for young people.
Hypnotic strategies can utilize restrictive repetitive behaviors in trance as resources for comfort,
mastery and efficacy. Biofeedback training provides an accessible computerized interaction that
can be tailored to increase vagal tone. In this workshop, these converging and strength-based
approaches will be described, illustrated on video, and role-played for experiential learning.
Results of pilot studies with interactive media under development will be presented. More
broadly, implications of this approach for hypnosis with the people who have developmental
differences, the neurodiverse, and for general health and care promotion will be explored and
discussed.

Workshop Outline

1. Introductions Who we are

b. Experiences with autism spectrum disorder and neurodiversity

c. Hypnosis, biofeedback and self-regulation for people with ASD/neurodiversity

2. Definitions

a. Hypnosis and biofeedback

b. Utilization and person-centered care

c. Autism spectrum disorder

i. Characteristics
ii. Autonomic dysregulation hypothesis

3. Putting it together

a. Hypnosis with the neurodiverse

i. Utilizing repetitive behaviors

ii. Extracting their essence

iii. Caveats

b. Autonomic biofeedback training

i. Explaining a physiological mirror

ii. Using explicit learning

iii. Internalizing and generalizing

iv. Caveats

4. The Stress Destroyer and the Dynamic Feedback Signal Set (DyFSS)

5. The Parenting Effectiveness Program (PEP)

6. Discussion

References:

1. Sugarman, L.I., Garrison, B.L., & Williford, K.L. (2013). Symptoms as solutions: hypnosis
and biofeedback for autonomic regulation in autism spectrum disorders. American Journal of
Clinical Hypnosis. 56(2) 152–173.
2. Sugarman, L. I. (2012). Investing in autonomic balance for students with autism: The minding
anxiety project. Presented at The Autism Spectrum in Higher Education. Cambridge, MA.
Abstract and slides retrieved from http://mit.edu/uaap/sds/conference/events.html
3. Sugarman, L. I., Garrison, B. L., & Hope, A. E. (2014). Self-Adjusting Biofeedback with a
Dynamic Feedback Signal Set (DyFSS). http://scholarworks.rit.edu/eatc/Papers/Papers/9
4. Yapko, D. (2006). The Utilization Approach to Treating Depression in Individuals with
Autistic Spectrum Disorders. In Yapko, M. (Ed.), Hypnosis and Treating Depression:
Applications in Clinical Practice (pp. 243-267). New York: Routledge.
5. Porges SW (2011). The Polyvagal Theory: Neurophysiological foundations of emotions,
attachment, communication, self-regulation. New York: Norton.
6. Kinsbourne, M. (2011). Repetitive movements and arousal. In D. A. Fein (Eds.). The
Neuropsychology of Autism (pp. 367–394). New York, NY: Oxford Press.
7. Garrison, B.L., Sugarman, L.I., Baschnagel, J.S., & Williford, K.L. (2013). Tailoring
Autonomic Biofeedback to Individual Strengths with a Dynamic Feedback Signal Set [abstract].
Psychophysiology: Issue Supplement, 50(S1), S35

Presenter: Sugarman, Laurence

Advances in children’s trances: Keys to hypnosis with young people of any age .

Laurence Sugarman1.
1College of Health Sciences and Technology, Rochester Institute of Technology, Rochester, NY,

United States.

What is different about using hypnosis with children and adolescents? What are the skills that are
critical for success? What does exploring hypnosis with young people teach us about using
hypnosis across the lifespan? In this experiential workshop, we will review video-recorded
examples, draw on our clinical experience, and role-play our way toward a real-world
application of hypnosis with young people. We will focus on recognizing the spontaneous trance
the child brings to the encounter, evoking and utilizing the young person’s innate resources to
drive plasticity and beneficial change, and responding to development challenges in the context
of coping with illness.

Children are in the business of building their mind-body systems. The essence of using hypnosis
with children and adolescents goes beneath and beyond the presenting problem and diagnosis.
The emphasis is nurturing those unique connections that drive mastery, self-efficacy and
resilience. That clinical attitude applies not only when helping children, but for all who have ever
been children. Join us and bring your experiences.

While the presenter is a physician, this workshop will promote understanding about pediatric
applications of hypnosis across mind-body contexts and appeal to both the medical and
psychological, researchers and clinicians.

Brief Presentation Outline:

Introductions

1. Who are we
2. Orientation to the workshop format and learning objectives

Some definitions and demonstrations. What we mean by:

1. Mind
2. Trance
3. Hypnosis
4. Utilization
Finding and cultivating the trance in the encounter

1. Spontaneous trance in video recordings and demonstration

2. Role-playing: How do know what to do next?
3. Including developmental aspects: case discussion.

Utilization with children

1. Speaking their language: role-play

2. Evoking and honoring strengths: clinical discussion
3. Even when it feels like “resistance”: role-play

Applications across the lifespan

1. Helping parents’ and their projections: clinical discussion

2. Encouraging the child within: clinical discussion.

Summary and group trance experience.

References:

1. Sugarman LI Wester WC, eds. Therapeutic Hypnosis with Children and Adolescents, 2nd
edition. Crown House Publishers, Carmarthen, UK 2013.
2. Hope, A.E. & Sugarman, L.I. (2015). Orienting Hypnosis. American Journal of Clinical
Hypnosis, 57(3): 212–229.

Presenter: Terhune, Devin

The gold standard or the old standard? Revisiting the measurement of hypnotic
responding.

Devin Terhune1.
1Psychology, Goldsmiths, University of London, London, United Kingdom.

The most well-established finding gleaned from decades of experimental hypnosis research is
that members of the general population display marked individual differences in responsiveness
to suggestions following a hypnotic induction (hypnotic suggestibility or hypnotizability).
Insofar as this variability impacts both treatment outcome in the therapeutic application of
hypnosis, as well as responsiveness to hypnotic suggestions in experimental contexts, the robust
and reliable measurement of hypnotic suggestibility bears substantial theoretical and
methodological significance. Here I will outline the limitations of contemporary psychometric
instruments for the measurement of hypnotic suggestibility. In particular, I will describe multiple
measurement properties of these instruments that result in the loss of valuable information,
including binary scoring, low sampling frequency, infrequent use of control conditions, absence
of chronometric or psychophysical indices, sub-optimal suggestion content, and other
limitations. This review will show that contemporary scales have outlived their usefulness and
require substantial revision. I will conclude by outlining ways in which the measurement of
hypnotic suggestibility can be advanced.

Presenter: Terhune, Devin

The neurocognitive profile of high hypnotic suggestibility.

Devin Terhune1.
1Psychology, Goldsmiths, University of London, London, United Kingdom.

Hypnosis can be used to effect pronounced changes in conscious states and behaviour but these
effects are largely restricted to a small subset of the population who display high hypnotic
suggestibility. Responses to suggestions among highly suggestible individuals are characterized
by a pronounced distortion in the sense of agency – the feeling that one is not in control of their
actions. The mechanisms underlying this classic suggestion effect remain poorly understood.
Multiple theories of hypnosis converge on the proposal that responsiveness to suggestion is
facilitated by aberrant metacognition. According to such accounts, highly suggestible individuals
voluntarily produce responses to suggestions but experience them as non-volitional because of
impaired awareness of the intentions associated with the responses or a deficit in identifying the
source of suggestion-specific representations. A corollary of this hypothesis is that highly
suggestible individuals will have impaired metacognition or executive monitoring but the
specificity of this effect has not yet been explored. Here I will review multiple studies examining
the breadth of atypical metacognition in this population in order to determine whether aberrant
metacognition is restricted to meta-awareness pertaining to the sense of agency and motor
intentions or whether it reflects a broader deficit. In particular, I will describe data from studies
examining multiple forms of metacognition, meta-awareness, and source monitoring in highly
suggestible individuals and controls. The results demonstrate that highly suggestible individuals
have specific and distinct deficits in different forms of metacognition and thereby highlight the
specificity of atypical metacognition and monitoring in this group. I will conclude by outlining
the implications of this work for contemporary models of hypnosis and the mechanisms
subserving the classic suggestion effect.

Presenter: Thériault, Rémi

Can suggestion affect pulmonary function in children with suspected asthma?

Rémi Thériault1, Liana O. Corber2, Catherine W. MacLean2, Jenilee-Sarah Napoleon1, Jay A.

Olson1, Amir Raz1,2,3,4.
1Department of Psychiatry, McGill University, Montréal, QC, Canada; 2Department of

Psychology, McGill University, Montréal, QC, Canada; 3Institute for Interdisciplinary

Behavioral and Brain Sciences, Chapman University, Irvine, CA, United States; 4Lady Davis
Institute for Medical Research & Institute for Community and Family Psychiatry, Jewish
General Hospital, Montréal, QC, Canada.

Introduction: Placebos, suggestion, and expectation reliably influence people’s subjective

experience of several clinical conditions; they also influence objective physiological outcomes
for some conditions but not others. While suggestion does influence subjective symptoms of
asthma, there is mixed evidence that it can affect objective pulmonary function as well. Yet, this
information is important because many physicians forgo from using objective measures of lung
function and instead solely rely on subjective symptoms to diagnose asthma.

Objectives: In two studies, we attempted to see whether administrating a suggestion could

affect objective pulmonary function and subjective reports of breathing difficulty.

Materials: In the first study, we asked 36 children at the Montreal Children’s Hospital to
perform an objective pulmonary function test, the Methacholine Challenge Test (MCT),
following a prescription from their doctor to investigate the presence of asthma. In the MCT,
technicians administer increasing doses of a bronchoconstrictor, methacholine, and measure total
air capacity of the lungs at baseline and after each dose, which provides a measure called Forced
Expiratory Volume in 1 Second (FEV1). We also conducted a follow-up study with 22 new
participants who completed a self-report questionnaire assessing perceived breathlessness on a 0
to 10 scale.

Methods: In both studies, the first dose administered in the MCT consists of a saline
solution. We told half of the participants that this solution was actually a strong dose of a lung
irritant (methacholine) and the other half that it was simply inert, salty water. We used the FEV1
measure as an index of objective breathing difficulty.

Results: There was no difference between the suggestion and control groups on FEV1 in the first
study (t(34) = .070, one-tailed p = .472) or in the second study (t(20) = .156, one-tailed p =
.439). However, in the second study, participants did report higher self-reported breathlessness
in the suggestion condition (M = 3.42) compared to the control (M = 1.30, t(20) = 3.887, one-
tailed p < .001).

Conclusion: Our findings confirm the previously observed discrepancy between subjective
experience and objective measures for the case of asthma when expectations contradict
reality. These results may help explain the high rates of misdiagnosis when physicians rely on
self-reported symptoms without resorting to reliable objective pulmonary function testing.
Presenter: Thomson, Linda

Pearls of practice.

Linda Thomson1.
1Nursing, University of Vermont, Burlington, VT, United States.

As a seasoned clinician I have developed strategies, techniques and metaphors that have been
effective with children and adults. In this workshop I will share hypnotic
strategies/phrases/metaphors/suggestions that have become my “go to” favorites that have
proved useful in multiple clinical situations. Multiple ways to teach diaphragmatic breathing to
children as well as adults will be demonstrated and its efficacy in stimulating the relaxation
response will be discussed. Incorporating the concept of the behavioral Inhibition and activating
systems as they apply to working with someone managing chronic pain or attempting to change
a habit will be presented. The workshop will include examples and experiential opportunities to
create metaphorical inductions.

References:

1. Jensen MP, Ehde DM, Day MA. The Behavioral Activation and Inhibition Systems:
Implications for Understanding and Treating Chronic Pain. J Pain. 2016 May;17(5):529.e1-529.
2. Chen YF, Huang XY, Chien CH, Cheng JF.The Effectiveness of Diaphragmatic Breathing
Relaxation Training for Reducing Anxiety. Perspect Psychiatr Care. 2016 Aug 23.
3. Jensen MP, Tan G, Chua SM. Pain Intensity, Headache Frequency, and the Behavioral
Activation and Inhibition Systems. Clin J Pain. 2015 Dec;31(12):1068-74.

Presenter: Thomson, Linda

Helping children help themselves with hypnosis.

Linda Thomson1.
1Nursing, University of Vermont, Burlington, VT, United States.

The workshop will describe hypnotic interventions that can be used with children and
adolescents with medical or psychological challenges.
Hypnosis not only gives the child a tool to better cope with or solve the problem himself, but
also increases self-esteem, bolsters a sense of accomplishment and gives the child a valuable
skill that he can adapt to many new situations throughout life. How to match hypnotic strategies
to the developmental level of the child will be illustrated by using video clips. The principles
and practice of integrating hypnosis into clinical encounters in child and adolescent healthcare
for a variety of common pediatric habit disorders, anxiety and pain will be presented.

References:
1. Kohen, D.P. and Olness, K. and Hypnosis and Hypnotherapy with Children (4th Edition).
New York: Routledge, 2011.
2. Lyons, Lynn. Using Hypnosis with Children. New York: Norton, 2015
3. Sugarman, Laurence and Wester, William. Therapeutic Hypnosis with Children and
Adolescents. (2nd Edition) Carmarthen, United Kingdom: Crown House Publishing, 2014.

Presenter: Thomson, Linda

Butt out: The importance of the treatment relationship in smoking cessation.

Linda Thomson1.
1Nursing, University of Vermont, Burlington, VT, United States.

Smoking is a leading cause of morbidity and mortality. Clinicians trained in hypnosis can have a
critical impact on saving the health and lives of people addicted to nicotine. An important
variable in the success of hypnosis for smoking cessation is the therapeutic alliance between
clinician and patient. This workshop will describe interventions that can be used to promote
smoking cessation through counseling, motivational interviewing and hypnosis.

Attendees will be equipped with a framework for counseling patients/clients concerning the
important benefits of smoking cessation. They will learn effective strategies and techniques that
they can use in their work with smokers. Helping patients overcome nicotine addiction can have
an enormous impact on the patient’s health. Being successful helping people stop smoking can
have a positive impact on the increase of the numbers of referrals and the growth of one’s
practice.

References:

1. Carmody, T.P., Duncan, C., Simon, J.A., Solkowitz, S., Huggins, J., Lee, S., & Delucchi, K.
(2008). Hypnosis for smoking cessation: A randomized trial. Nicotine & Tobacco Research, 10,
5, 811-818.
2. Lynn, SJ., Green, JP., Accardi, M & Cleere, C. (2010). Hypnosis and Smoking Cessation: The
State of the Science. AJCH, 52:3
3. Xiaoming Li, et al. (2017). Delta coherence in resting-state EEG predicts the reduction in
cigarette craving after hypnotic aversion suggestions. Sci Rep. 2017; 7: 2430. Published online
2017 May 25

Presenter: Todorov, Assya

Réflexion pluridisciplinaire autour de la conscience: Hypnothérapeute, médecin, physicien,

philosophe et méditant bouddhiste réunis dans ce film pour donner leur définition de la
conscience?.
Assya Todorov1.
1Psychiatrie , Institut Hypsos de l'Arc Lémanique, Genève, Switzerland.

L'hypnose utilise un état de conscience modifié . Mais est-il possible de définir ce qu'est la
Conscience?

En pratique médicale , cela a d'importantes répercussions. Par exemple, un patient dans le coma
est-il conscient, ou inconscient?Comment la notion d'anti-zombie philosophique peut -elle avoir
des conséquences sur la clinique médicale? Comment rétablir une passerelle entre le discours du
vécu à la première personne et celui, plus reconnu en recherche, à la troisième personne?Qu'est
ce que la phénoménologie peut apporter à l'hypnose? Qu'est-ce que l'hypnopraxie?

Ce documentaire, construit autour d'un séries d'entretiens avec des médecins, un philosoque, un
physicien et un méditant bouddhiste, explore les différentes pistes ouvertes par ces questions qui
sont d'actualité .

Conscience 1

https://vimeo.com/225814965

Conscience 2 - Science et Conscience

https://vimeo.com/225813562

Conscience 3 - Phenomenology et Hypnopraxie

https://vimeo.com/225812254

Presenter: Tramontana, Joseph

Hypnotically enhanced psychotherapy.

Joseph Tramontana1.
1Private Practice, None, New Orleans, LA, United States.

For years, while teaching advanced workshops at ASCH and at SCEH, as well as in my book on
treament for addictions, I've used the term "hypnotically enhanced" rather than hypnosis or
hypnotherapy. The focus is on the relationship between therapist and client. Clients are taught to
utilize these tools (hypnosis/self-hypnosis) for a variety of clinical conditions. These include, but
are not limited to, addictions, other habit disorders, pain management, anxiety reduction,
depression, performance enhancement, sexual dysfunction, sleep disorders, and PTSD.

References:
1. Tramontana, J. (2009) Hypnotically Enhanced Treatment of Addictions: Alcohol Abuse, Drug
Abuse, Gambling, Smoking, and Weight Loss. Crown, UK.
2. Tramontana, J. (2011) Sports Hypnosis in Practice: Strategies, Scripts, and Case Examples.
Crown, UK.

Presenter: Trenkle, Bernhard

Self-hypnosis training as first trance experience.

Bernhard Trenkle1.
1Private Practice, Rottweil, Germany.

This demonstration workshop will outline the context of developing this approach in working in
Department of Speech Pathology of University Clinic in Heidelberg.

Then the approach will be demonstrated and taught with one participant but in the same time
as a group induction for all participants.

How to tailor this basic technique for different clients and symptoms will be outlined.

Finally it will be discussed how to use self-hypnosis in on-going hypnotherapy and how to
support and supervise clients in their self-hypnotic skills.

Presenter: Turner, Jane

GOSH it Works! Goal Oriented Self Hypnosis: Setting and achieving goals with self-
hypnosis .

Jane Turner1.
1Société Française d'Hypnose, PARIS, France.

Hypnosis is a goal-oriented reverie. What better way to define self-hypnosis? What if self-
hypnosis really were the place where dreams do come true?

Without a doubt, any invention, accomplishment or project begins with a dream, no matter what
form such dreaming may take. Daydreaming has been shown to be beneficial for creativity. The
nightly dream cycle has restorative and healing powers.
 Many essential discoveries have been
made fortuitously thanks to relaxation and other altered states of consciousness. It seems that it’s
at these moments that the unconscious mind, the vast reservoir of resources free of
contradictions, conflicts, limitations or censure, can express itself.
So, rather than start with the dream state and wait to receive its benefits, would it not be better,
and no doubt more efficient, to begin with a goal then orient to a reverie and dream one’s goal
into reality? Not only is this possible, it’s easy.

Although goal setting is the first of the important steps toward goal getting, it is certainly not
only one. To accomplish goals, meet objectives, finish projects and make dreams real, there are
other steps in the process, which are greatly facilitated by regular self-hypnotic practice.

During this workshop, the necessary parameters of goal setting along with several basic formats
for self-hypnosis will be explored.

Presenter: Turner, Jane

D.R.E.A.M. : A hypnotic model for dream work .

Jane Turner1.
1Société Française d'Hypnose, PARIS, France.

Often enough my clients ask me to help them decipher their dreams. Some want to shed light on
a possible message hidden in the dream itself; others wish to capture what in the dream has left
an echo that troubles their mind upon waking. How to help them explore, understand and
appreciate their dreams so that what they’ve brought back from the land of nod, that place
between the waking and sleeping worlds, may serve them in some way?
An answer to this
question lies in the hypnotic model for dream interpretation: D.R.E.A.M., which I have
developed thanks to my work with clients in psychotherapy and recent research about working
with dreams in the therapeutic setting.
 During this workshop the basic principles of dream
interpretation and dream work in brief therapy will be brought out. The steps in the D.R.E.A.M.
model will be presented accompanied by exercises so participants may appreciate this method
and become sensitive to the benefits derived from integrating this type of work in their
therapeutic interventions.

Presenter: Turner, Maureen

Clinical hypnosis research & practical applications for treatment of teen/adult attention
deficit hyperactive disorder and comorbids: Addictions, anxiety, depression, OCD, ODD,
and PTSD .

Maureen Turner1.
1Approved Consultant, American Society of Clinical Hypnosis, Bloomingdale, IL, United

States; 2Co-founder/Director, Hypnovations: Clinical Hypnosis Training and Education

Programs, Burlington, VT, United States; 3Clinical Hypnosis Education, Research, and Training
Programs, Motivation Hypnosis, Burlington, VT, United States; 4Psychotherapy and Clinical
Hypnosis Direct & Consultation Services, Motivation Hypnosis, Burlingon, VT, United States.

The paucity of research on Clinical Hypnosis applications to adults with ADHD gives clinicians
little guidance. There are an estimated 11 million (4.4%) of U.S. adults with ADHD [1] and
research studies estimate that only 15-20% have been diagnosed to date.[2] [3][4] (This leaves an
estimated 8.8 to 9.3 million undiagnosed!) The undiagnosed ADHD adult often self-medicates
with stimulants such as: sugar, worry (self-stimulating adrenalin), nicotine, marijuana, alcohol,
caffeine, prescription and street drugs. Ironically, applied hypnosis research studies abound in
the ADHD co-morbid diagnoses: Addictions, Anxiety, OCD, PTSD, Depression and
ODD. Research has been remiss in recognizing ADHD as a major causal etiology of these
cormorbids.[5][6][3][4]Recently, researcher Thomas Brown has identified ADHD as a "foundational
diagnosis." [7] Recently too, the clinical hypnosis research communiity has begun studying the
efficacy of clinical hypnosis treatment and application to ADHD and comorbids.[8][9]

In 2016, at the SCEH Annual Conference Scientific Session in Boston, psychiatric clinician
Maureen Turner, who has identified and treated ADHD with Clinical Hypnosis techniques since
1995, presented “What Changed: A Data Analysis/Integration of Four Instruments Measuring
Results of the Longitudinal Observational Study: Applying Clinical Hypnosis Techniques to
ADHD Traits and Symptoms.” Methods utilized: 4 ADHD diagnostic assessment tools to
establish a benchmark and which were re-taken anew in 6-12 mos. intervals by 14 economically
diverse Caucasian adults with ADHD, ages 22-66, 8 Female/6 Males. Results were correlated
with gender, age, ADHD diagnosis, Dyslexia, 9 comorbid diagnoses and the number of
psychotherapy/clnical hypnosis (with and without age regression) sessions utilized from 2012-
14. All 14 individuals showed signs of improvement (29-33%) in at least one symptomatic area
and 8 out of 9 diagnostic comorbid categories evaluated statistically significantly improved. [10]

This workshop focus is targeted to clinicians interested in utilizing ADHD diagnostic tools and
research findings to enhance ADHD awareness and treatment skills. The presentation outline
includes: A brief time line of ADHD history; current physiological and neurological
view; literature review of ADHD comorbids; treatment modalities being assessed including
clinical hypnosis; summary of Turner's Longitudinal Observational Study of Clinical Hypnosis
Applications to ADHD & Comorbids[10]; experiential opportunities for registrants to self--
administer - the 4 standardized Self-Report Assessment tools in Turner's research design;
opportunity to discuss case histories and utilization of the hand-outs: Turner's List of
Applications of Clinical Hypnosis Techniques to ADHD Traits and Symptoms Predominantly
Inattentive Presentation (F90.0) and Predominantly Hyperactve-Impulsive Presentation
(F90.1).[11][12] and General Antidote Negating Negative Self-talk Script.[13]

References:

1. Kessler et al.(2006). The prevalence and correlation of adult ADHD in the United States:
Results from the National Comorbidity Survey Replication. American Journal of Psychiatry,
63(4), 716-723
2. Fayyad, J., DEGraaf, R., Kessler,R., Alonso, J., Angemeyer, M. Demyttenaere, K.,, ...&
Lepine, J.P.(2007). Cros-national prevalence and correlates of adult attention-deficit
hyperactivity disorder. The British Journal of Psychiatry, 190(5), 402-409.D
3. Ginsberg, Y., Quintero, J., Anand, E., Casillas, M., & Upadhyaya, H. P. (2014).
Underdiagnosis of attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder in adult patients: a review of the
literature. The primary care companion for CNS disorders, 16(3).
4. Newcorn, J.H., Weiss, M., & Stein, M. A. (2007). The complexity of ADHD: diagnosis and
treatment of the adult patient with comorbidities. CNS Spectrums, 12(S12), 1-16.
5. Angold A, Costello E,J., Erkanli A. (1999). Comorbidity. Journal of Child Psychology and
Psychiatry, 40, 57-87. [PubMed: 10102726]
6. Biederman, J., Petty, C.R., Spencer, T.J., Woodworth, K.Y., Bhide, P., Zhu, J., & Farone, S.
V. (2013). Examining the nature of the comorbidity between pediatric attention
deficit/hyperactivity disorder and post-traumatic stress disorder. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica,
128(1)78-87.
7. Brown, T.E., (2017). Outside the box rethinking ADD/ADHD in children and adults.
Arlington, VA.: American Psychiatric Association Publishing. (pp. 12, 102).
8. Pliszka, S. R. (1997). Comorbidity of attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder with psychiatric
disorder: an overview. The Journal of Clinical Psychiatry, 59, 50-58.
9. Virta, M., Salakari, A., Antila, M., Chydenius, E., Partinen, M., Kaski, M., ... & Iivanainen,
M. (2010). Hypnotherapy for adults with attention deficit hyperactivity disorder: A randomized
controlled study. Contemporary Hypnosis, 27(1), 5-18.
10. Turner, M.F. & Barrantes- Reynods, R. (2016). What changed? A data analysis /integration
of four instruments measuring results of the longitudinal observational study: Applying clinical
hypnosis techniques to ADD traits & symptoms, SCEH 67th Annual Conference, Scientific
Session, Boston-Dedham, MA.
11. Turner, M. (2013, 2017) Turner’s list of applications of clinical hypnosis techniques to DSM-
5 (2013) Diagnostic Categories for ADHD Traits and Symptoms for Predominantly Inattentive
Presentation (F90.0) and Predominantly Hyperactive-Impulsive Presentation (F90.1). Hand-out.
ADHD & Clinical Hypnosis Manual, Burlington, VT.: Motivation Hypnosis.
12. American Psychiatric Association (2013). Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental
disorders – (5th ed). Arlington, VA: American Psychiatric Association.
13. Turner, M. (2013, 2017). Turner’s General Antidote for Negating Negative Self-talk Script.
Motivation Hypnosis ADHD & Clinical Hypnosis Manual, Burlington, VT.: Motivation
Hypnosis Training & Education Programs.

Presenter: Turner, Maureen

Age regression: Novel approaches utilizing clinical hypnosis theory,techniques and

applications to addictions, ADHD, anxiety, depression, habit change, OCD, ODD, and
PTSD.

Maureen Turner1.
1Clinical Hypnosis and Psychotherapy Practice, Motivation Hypnosis Education and Training

Programs, Burlington, VT, United States.

Diagnostic and treatment techniques of Age Regression have been available since the 18th
Century with the discovery of Marquis de Puysegur, a disciple of Mesmer, who focused his
attention on “what happened” in what he called magnetic somnambulism. It appears that when
Freud discarded hypnosis as a technique, many of the benefits of using deeper trance
states (except psychoanalysis) were also dismissed. Age Regression Techniques can elucidate
the causes of the symptoms and provide a strategy for treatment including symptom reduction
and, in many cases, symptom extinction. Utilizing age regression hypnosis techniques usually
provides the clinician more control than the spontaneous abreactions so common when using
EMDR and often reduces necessity of painful re-vivification of a traumatic event and/or the
common practice of de-sensitization.[3] Identifying the causal factor (s) for symptoms can
provide a blueprint for intervention, de-utilization of harmful beliefs and symptoms, and many
new opportunities for installation of new and restoration of former ego-strengths.

Psychiatric Nurse/Psychotherapist/Hypnotherapist, Maureen Turner’s 22 years of clinically

developing, integrating and researching the practice of Clinical Age Regression hypnosis
techniques has been consolidated into a 90 minute seminar for clinicians. [4] Turner will discuss
and briefly review brain neuro - imprinting theory and her cross-cultural case studies utilizing
Age Regression technique applications[2]. However, Turner’s primary focus is to teach her own
novel approaches and updates of both historic and new techniques: Deep Level
Induction/Anchoring Techniques , Meeting Room Techniques for Motivation Assessment,
Psychosomatic Bridge Techniques and Treatment indications, Rescue Mission Techniques:
1.) Client as Rescuer (coached by clinician using Solomon Asch Conformity Studies
applications)[1][5]; 2.) Assessing, Updating and Re-Imagining/ Re-Scripting Imprinted Event
(s); 3.) Magic Sieve Techniques for Enmeshment Release; 4.) Anchoring Techniques for
Positive Mind-Body States; and 5.) Re-Integration of Rescued Parts to Healthier Ego States.
Case Histories, video demonstrations and experiential practice opportunities are included.

References:

1. Turner, M.F. (2004). Using ego therapy and Solomon Asch’s Social Decision-Making Theory
to treat cognitive errors (opinions, beliefs, and judgments) in trauma patients. Crasilneck Session
Presentation at the SCEH Conference, Santa Fe, New Mexico.
2. Van Der Kolk (2014). The Body Keeps the Score. New York: Viking.
3. Augusto, L.M.(2010). Unconscious Knowledge: A Survey. Advances in Cognitive Psychology
6: 116-141. doi: 10.2478/v10053-0081-5.
4. Hammond, D.C., Garver, R.B., Mutter,C.B. et al. (2008). Clinical Hypnosis and Memory:
Guidelines For Clinicians and For Forensic Hypnosis (Third Printing). American Society of
Clinical Hypnosis: Education & Research Foundation.
5. Asch, S.E. (1956). Studies of Independence and Conformity: A Minority of one against a
unanimous majority. Psychological Monograph, 70.

Presenter: Uziel, Nir

Hypnosis in the dental chair - Is it a dream?

Nir Uziel1,2, Evelyne Weshler1.
1Oral Rehabilitation, Behavioral sciences, Tel Aviv University, Tel Aviv , Israel; 2 Institut

Français d'Hypnose, Paris, France.

The presentation will discuss aspects related to various difficulties in the dentist's daily practice.

The presentation is aiming at dentists who have just finished they training in hypnosis, as well as
at experienced dental hypnotists who want to deepen their knowledge. It will include theoretical
teaching, case presentations (including video movies following patients in treatment) and a
short live demonstration.

During the presentation we will discuss different means for dealing with the anxious / phobic
patient, including dissociation[1] and will present the age regression technique for treating severe
gag reflex. We will present how effective is hypnosis in the treatment of bruxism, and will show
a case of a treatment of a woman with tardive dyskinesia. A video demonstrating extraction of a
wisdom tooth using the glove anesthesia technique will be shown as well.

References:

1. Application of hypno-dissociative strategies during dental treatment of patients with severe

dental phobia

Presenter: Varga, Katalin

Hypnotic communication: The way to handle the different states of mind even in critical
illness.

Adrienn K. Szilágyi1,3, Csaba Diószeghy MD, PhD2, Katalin Varga PhD3.

1Doctoral School of Psychology, Behavioral Science Program, Eötvös Loránd University,

Budapest, Hungary; 2Emergency Department and ITU, East Surrey Hospital, Redhill, United
Kingdom; 3Department of Aff ective Psychology, Institute of Psychology, Eötvös Loránd
University, Budapest, Hungary.

In our prospective randomized controlled clinical trial, critically ill patients have been regarded
as being in a stress induced altered state of mind, and that they have certain basic needs
determined and consolidated throughout the evolutionary process. During the intensive care
these basic needs could be satisfied by using hypnotic communication. In the last 10 years 220
patients were randomized in the trial. Patients having this complementary psychological
treatment beside the standard intensive care had the length of stay in the unit and the length of
the mechanical ventilation 2-3 days shorter, that means 20-30% cut off.
We can see many types of alteration of mind during the critical illness. Hallucinations, ICU
psychosis, catatonia, coma or just the trance of the resistance, fear, or pain.

In this presentation, it’s shown by case vignettes how and why these states of mind – different in
type and in deepness – appear and could be treated by hypnotic communication. We show the
way how these evolutionary fixed basic needs can be satisfied. and how we can give patients a
useful tool to use these different states of mind to help themselves.

References:

1. Varga, K., Diószeghy, Cs., Fritúz, G. (2007). Suggestive communication with the ventilated
patient. European Journal of Mental Health, 2(2), 137–147.
2. Katalin Varga (Ed.) Beyond the Words: Communication and Suggestion in Medical Practice.
Nova Science Publishers, New York. pp. 293-306
3. K. Szilágyi A., Diószeghy Cs., Fritúz G., Gál J., Varga K. (2014). Shortening the Length of
stay and Mechanical Ventilation Time by using Positive Suggestions Via mp3 Players for
Ventilated Patients, Interventional Medicine and Applied Science, 6(1), 3–15.
4. K. Szilágyi A., Diószeghy Cs., Benczúr L., Varga K. (2007). Effectiveness of psychological
support based on positive suggestion with the ventilated patient. European Journal of Mental
Health, 2007, 2, 137-147.
5. K. Szilágyi A. (2011). Suggestive communication in the intensive care unit. In: Varga K. (Ed.)
Beyond the Words: Communication and Suggestion in Medical Practice. Nova Science
Publishers, New York. pp. 223- 237.
6. Cheek, D. B. (1969). Communication with the critically ill. American Journal of Clinical
Hypnosis, 12, 75–85.
7. Bejenke, C. J. (1996). Painful medical procedures. In J. Barber (Ed.), Hypnosis and suggestion
in the treatment of pain. A clinical guide (pp. 209–265). New York, London: WW Norton & Co.
8. Lioudmila V. Karnatovskaia, MD Kemuel L. Philbrick, MD Ann M. Parker, MD Dale M.
Needham, MD, PhD, Early Psychological Therapy in Critical Illness, Semin Respir Crit Care
Med 2016;37:136–142.

Presenter: Varga, Katalin

How to teach someone to realize the power of words in medical practice? Useful exercises.

Katalin Varga1.
1Department of Affective Psychology, Institute of Psychology ELTE University, Budapest,

Hungary.

In this workshop I will present some of those exercises that we are using in training medical
professionals. These exercises are focusing on the importance of rapport, communicating in
situations of emotional involvement, use of suggestive techniques in critical situations, applying
simple metaphors, etc. The approach is based on the observation that the patients in medical
settings are in a state very close to the hypnotic state, so any comment may function as a
powerful hypnotic suggestion.
The participants of the workshop will have the opportunity to take part in these exercises. We
will discuss the relevance of these experiences in training professionals (nurses, psychologists,
doctors, physiotherapists, etc.).

Presenter: Virot, Claude

L'hypnose entre science et croyance.

Claude Virot1.
1
Clinical hypnosis, Emergences, Rennes, France.

Keynote.

Presque toutes les cultures postulent un au delà, un monde pour les morts différent du monde des
vivants. Un des grands objectifs pour tout être vivant est de passer dans le monde des morts dans
les meilleures conditions possibles. Cette question du passage est au centre des rituels de deuil
pour s’assurer que le mort va bien chez les morts, que les vivants restent bien dans le monde des
vivants et qu’une bonne relation puisse s’établir rapidement avec le défunt.

Presque toutes les cultures aussi disposent de techniques de transe thérapeutique. Les transes
s’occupent des voies de passage entre des dimensions ou des mondes différents, et tout
particulièrement entre le monde des vivants et le monde des ancêtres ou des esprits.

Dans notre culture, depuis deux siècles, la transe thérapeutique est appelée hypnose. Si nous
savons qu’Hypnos est le dieu du sommeil, nous avons souvent oublié qu’Hypnos est aussi le
frère jumeau de Thanatos, le dieu de la mort. Dès lors que nous nous souvenons que notre outil
thérapeutique est apparenté avec le monde de la mort, nous comprenons beaucoup mieux
l’intérêt d’utiliser l’hypnose pour soulager nos patients en deuil.

Cette phase de vie, le deuil, est une phase naturelle, plus ou moins douloureuse qui va durer de
quelques semaines à quelques mois, jusqu’à réparation et cicatrisation. L’hypnose sera pratiquée
pour ses fonctions de sédation de la douleur et de l’angoisse, pour sa capacité à remettre du
mouvement lorsque le monde intérieur tend à se figer, pour son pouvoir à favoriser les
cicatrisations.

A coté des ces deuils simples, nous connaissons beaucoup de patients qui vivent des deuils
pathologiques par l’intensité ou la durée de la souffrance. Le deuil peut chez certains anéantir
toute capacité à vivre, le deuil peut aussi empêcher toute adaptation à la vie pendant des années
ou des dizaines d’années. Dans tous les cas, il est possible de décrire ces deuils comme des
troubles de la relation qu’entretient naturellement chacun de nous avec nos morts.
Après avoir décrit les facteurs qui favorisent ces pathologies, nous décrirons comment les transes
hypnotiques seront utiles pour restaurer cette relation lorsque le mort est absent, ou au contraire
lorsqu’il est envahissant. Nous complèterons par une pathologie heureusement rare lorsque un
mort est à la fois absent et envahissant : nous parlerons alors de fantôme.

Si l’hypnose nous aide au quotidien à soigner nos patients dans leurs corps, leurs idées et leurs
émotions, l’hypnose permet aussi d’explorer ces passages entre la vie et la mort, nous rappelant
qu’un des grands objectifs fondamentaux pour chaque humain est de bien mourir et de permettre
à nos proches de rester le plus possible en paix.

References:

1. VIROT Claude. Les vivants et leurs morts. Actes du 2e forum francophone d’hypnose et de
thérapies brèves. Ed de l’Arbousier. 2001
2. VIROT Claude. "Quelque part entre le monde des vivants et le monde des morts". Hypnose et
pensée magique. Collectif sous la direction de Edouard Collot. Ed Imago. 2008.

Presenter: Virot, Claude

Les vivants et leurs morts.

Claude Virot1.
1Clinical Hypnosis, Emergences, Rennes, France.

“Les morts sont des invisibles, ils ne sont pas des absents” dit St Augustin; Il nous rappelle ainsi
qu’après la mort d’un proche, les vivants continuent à entretenir des relations avec le défunt. Que
ce défunt garde une place plus ou moins importante dans la vie quotidienne des vivants.

La qualité de cette relation est essentielle et nous verrons que les sociétés ont prévu de nombreux
dispositifs plus ou moins contraignants dans cet objectif. Depuis la préparation de la mort
jusqu’aux rituels religieux et civils.

Cette relation peut présenter des perturbations simples à repérer : le mort peut être très distant
créant un manque; le mort peut au contraire être envahissant. Ces pathologies du deuil font partie
du travail quotidien des thérapeutes

Nous verrons que, comme dans le monde réel, les morts doivent avoir une place réservée dans
notre monde virtuel. C’est notre « cimetière intérieur »

Exercice : Création d’un cimetière intérieur dans une transe hypnotique

Démonstration de la technique hypnotique

Mise en oeuvre par les participants

References:

1. ABRAHAM Nicolas. TOROK Maria. L’écorce et le noyau. Ed Flammarion 1978

2. LE BRAZ Anatole. La légende de la mort chez les Bretons Armoricains. Ed Terre de
Brume.1996
3. MOLINIÉ Magali. Soigner les morts pour guérir les vivants. Ed Les empêcheurs de penser en
rond. 2006
4. NATHAN Tobie et Coll. Rituels de deuil, travail du deuil. Ed La Pensée Sauvage. 1995
5. VIROT Claude. Les vivants et leurs morts. Actes du 2e forum francophone d’hypnose et de
thérapies brèves. Ed de l’Arbousier. 200. (disponible sur www.hypnoses.com)

Presenter: Virta, Maarit

Effect of hypnosis on attention.

Maarit Virta1, Seppo Hiltunen1,2, Sakari Kallio3, Paavilainen Petri1.

1Department of Psychology and Logopedics, Faculty of Medicine, University of Helsinki,

Helsinki, Finland; 2Teaching and Learning Services, University services, University of Helsinki,
Helsinki, Finland; 3Department of Cognitive Neuroscience and Philosophy, School of
Bioscience, University of Skövde, Skövde, Sweden.

Introduction and objectives: Attention is the one of the key functions of human cognition.
Attention deficit hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) is a developmental neurobiological disability
characterized by deficits in attention and executive functions. Hypnosis is often associated with
changes in attention. The aim of the presentation is to give brief literature review, including our
own previous and new, unpublished findings, on how hypnosis may affect attentional functions.

Methods and results: The purpose of first study was to investigate whether hypnosis and
hypnotic suggestions influence the performance of adult ADHD (n = 27) and control participants
(n = 31) in the continuous performance test. There was a statistically significant decrease in
reaction times in both groups between pure hypnosis and hypnotic suggestions conditions. The
suggestions were targeted on better functioning in attention task. Also new, unpublished, results
about reaction time variability are presented.

In another previous study, we studied the impact of short hypnotherapy (10 sessions) on self-
reported symptoms on patients with ADHD. The hypnotherapy intervention decreased self-
reported symptoms on patients with ADHD (N=9) compared to treatment-as-usual condition
(N=10). The treatment benefits remained in 6-month-follow-up.

In an ongoing experiment, we are studying the effect of hypnosis and suggestions on the
mismatch-negativity (MMN) component of the event-related potential (ERP). The preliminary
results are presented.
Conclusion: Our studies suggest that it is possible with hypnosis and suggestions to influence
attention. Hypnotherapy is possible intervention on patients with ADHD. More research is
needed.

Presenter: von Mezynski, Elisabeth

Hands on experience with hypnosis against dental phobia and gag reflex including life
demonstration.

Elisabeth von Mezynski1,2,3,4.

1Deutsche Gesellschaft für Zahnärztliche Hypnose (DGZH), Stuttgart, Germany; 2Milton

Erickson Gesellschaft, Rottweil, Germany; 3Deutsche Gesellschaft für Hypnose (DGH), Bad
Lippspringe, Germany; 4Internationale Gesellschaft für Ganzheitliche Zahnheilkunde (GZM),
Mannheim, Germany.

Introduction: Anxiety disorders rank among the mental problems that have risen sharply in
recent months and years. 70% of patients in a psychologist’s practice are patients with anxiety
issues. Fear of the dentist, which can in some cases become a real phobia, is one of the most
widespread anxieties. One in 5 suffers from such an intense fear of the dentist that they will not
venture into a practice until the pain has become unbearable, and often not even then.Teeth and
the soul are more closely related than one might think. Teeth and the psyche really have a mutual
effect on each other.

Objectives: Introduction of direct and indirect hypnosis techniques with the help of ideomotoric
movements and how to apply this in your own praxis.

Methods: Power point presentation, Life demonstation, excercise, discussion

Results: By gaining a qualification in hypnosis, we acquire techniques that enable us to learn

how to cope with this problems

Conclusion: Hypnosis is an effective therapy against phobias/gag reflex and helps the patient to
deal with the symptoms in the long run or even to heal them completely.

Presenter: Waisblat, Veronique

Le balancier et autres inductions non verbales.

Veronique Waisblat1.
1
Anesthesiology, Groupe hospitalier, Montfermeil, France.

Les inductions non verbales sont le thème de cet atelier pratique.

L'hypnose est le résultat d’une action qui entre par le corps et s'empare de l'âme. L’entrée de
l'hypnose par le corps est l’induction hypnotique.

Nous partagerons des exercices pratiques d’inductions sensorielles - équilibre, proprioception,

intéroception - cad au-delà des 5 sens. Nous expliciterons comment ces interactions
sensorielles facilitent la transe hypnotique, avec pour objectif de les intégrer dans notre pratique,
en conscience.

Cette expérience a été acquise en salle de naissance dans l’accompagnement des femmes en
travail[1]. Une situation chaude où l’interaction corporelle, associée aux mots, a toute sa place.

References:

1. Waisblat V et al. Impact of a Hypnotically-based Intervention on Pain and Fear in Women

Undergoing Labor. Intl. Journal of Clinical and Experimental Hypnosis, 65: 1–22, 2017 DOI:
10.1080/00207144.2017.1246876 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=XZSS4tUFI24&t=10s

Presenter: Wall, Martin

Hypnosis a universal catalyst for healing and empowerment in our fractured world.

Martin Wall1,2,3.
1
Peninsular School of Medicine and Dentistry, Plymouth University, Plymouth, United
Kingdom; 2President, European Society of Hypnosis, London, United Kingdom; 3Board Member
Section Hypnosis and Psychosomatic Medicine, Royal Society of Medicine, London, United
Kingdom.

This workshop will be informed by a parody of Somerset Maugham’s advice on novel writing:

"There are three rules for (writing a novel) the effective use of clinical hypnosis.

Unfortunately, no one knows what they are."

We will contest or agree on the veracity of that aphorism.

As a surgeon, my training and career has essentially involved excising the pathology and
repairing the defect. During my undergraduate training, it was emphasised that the successful
surgeon must stand apart from the patient otherwise our scalpel would waiver and our judgement
would be compromised
Throughout my subsequent career, it has become self-evident that this is untenable and indeed
the contrary holds sway, in that the interaction is much more in the nature of a dance with each
participant having effect on the outcome.

This workshop will look at the effect we have on each other, both patient and clinician. We will
consider the change of state that patients experience during a consultation and the manner in
which this change can be utilised in giving them a positive hypnotic experience at both a somatic
and psyche level.

I will present hypnosis as a valuable clinical tool that should take its place in the routine
everyday care of our patients.

We will examine the consent issues that impinge on this approach, with due regard to the ethics
of engaging in the metaphysical dimension of our patients lives.

Presenter: Wang, Ting

An experimental research on treating primary dysmenorrhea in female college students by

hypnotherapy: A perspective from Chinese medicine.

Ting Wang1.
1Psychology, Nanjing Universty of Chinese Medicine, Nanjing, People's Republic of China.

Objective: To understand the relevant situation of primary dysmenorrhea and relieve pain and
associated symptoms by means of hypnosis.

Methods: By using hypnosis from a perspective from traditional chinese medicine to treat the
primary dysmenorrhea via a self-control study. Result Before and after treatment, the pain score
and symptom score were significantly decreased on subjects' selfreport. 50% of subjects was
cured, 25% was improved significantly and 25% was no significant effect.

Conclusion: This hypnosis process is feasible in the treating primary dysmenorrhea.

Presenter: Watanabe, Naoki

Hypnotherapy combined with morita therapy .

Naoki Watanabe1.
1Department of Psychiatry, Mental Hospital Kamakurayama, Kamakura, Japan.

The aim of my presentation is to tell the participants about my trial of hypnotherapy to the
dissociative and conversion disorder using Dave Elman's approach and implemented a speech
counseling during trance state of 22 sessions telling the female client to be able to express freely
her feelings. In the beginning there was an expression of self blame and anger toward her father
and expressed the feeling of abandonment and self denial. To such an expression the therapist
used the technique called "Fumon"(not answering with silence) even though the therapist
understands her deep suffering with empathy using also the posthypnotic suggestion to forget
everything she told in order to take a stance from the thought. Freud also used such a technique
called "Versagen" in his Pychoanalyisis. Morita Therapy accepts in advance the total feeling of
the client, using however Fumon to break through the vicious cycle of the thought contradiction
and establish the new aspect of "the natural self" based on equality of human being with other
creatures. Such an awareness brought her the life force so that she could stand up and start to live
her real life again. Western psychotherapy aims to support clients and through discussion or
suggestion to decrease negative thought and to establish self-assertive ego-strength and
autonomy where as Morita Therapy trys based on the eastern culture to establish the mutual
experience of awareness of the life force in outer and inner nature of the ecological world.
Morita Therapy is established around 1920 by the Japanese Psychiatrist, Masatake(Shoma)
Morita using Zen words. However Morita Therapy itself is not religion but a scientific, medical
and ecological therapy using paradoxical setting and realizing the natural self. For Westerners
Morita Therapy is still the so called "tera incognita" and especially even in Japan it is a new trial
to intorduce Morita Therapy into the field of Hypnosis. In this regards it is worth presenting at
the ISH congress. Discussion remains how to understand "Nature". Peg LeVine (2017), however,
takes an standpoint of understanding nature rather as ecological world and developed a so called
"classic Morita Therapy" in Australia from the aspects of "peripheral consciousness". My trial in
Hypnotherapy has to do with both aspects which might be an imoportant proposal in the ISH
congress.

Presenter: Weinspach, Claudia

Healing with ceremony.

Claudia Weinspach1.
1Psychotherapeutische Fachpraxis, Deutsche Gesellschaft für Hypnose, Coesfeld, Germany.

Purpose:
Although there is a long tradition, especially in indigenous cultures, of healing with ritual and
ceremony, the modern scientific world rather excluded spiritual components of healing for a long
period of time.

It was the Cartesian revolution that includes the idea that all phenomena can be understood and
thereby indicating that you can only trust that which can be explained. As a consequence the
mind was separated from the intuitive wisdom of our body and spirit.

Ceremonies provide the structure though which we touch the spirit and promote our own healing
as well as the healing of others.

What will be taught: In this workshop we will apply new research findings (like the brain´s
plasticity) with ancient wisdom to expand our healing power. In the language of ceremony we
will explore the factors that promote the healing process.

Relevance to the conference:

Learning more about ancient wisdom that can be applied in modern therapy not only enriches the
therapeutic repertoire of each therapist or doctor but also helps creating a new balance in society.
Honoring and applying spiritual components includes helping patients being connected within
them and thereby strengthen their immanent healing powers.

Presenter: Willmarth, Eric

Heroes of hypnosis: The Marquis de Puysegur and the first family of Mesmerism.

Eric Willmarth1.
1College of Integrative Medicine and Health Sciences, Saybrook University, Oakland, CA,

United States.

The history of hypnosis is filled with facinating individuals however it is unlikely that any single
family contributed as much to the evolution of hypnosis as Amand Marie Jacques Chastenet de
Puysegur and his two brothers. The Marquis de Puysegur, the Count de Chastenet and the
Viscount de Puysegur all studied with Antone Mesmer. One of these brothers is said to have
raised a fellow officer from the dead using Mesmerism, another's introduction of Mesmerism is
reported to have freed a nation from foreign rule while the third brother was protected by a
Russian Czar after being ordered shot by Napoleon. This presentation will introduce this
remarkable family and review the many contributions that helped animal magnetism become the
hypnosis that we know today.

References:

1. Huges, J. & Rothovius, A. (1996) The world's greatest hypnotists. University Press of
America, NY.
Presenter: Willmarth, Eric

Telling stories to teach hypnosis, an application of the Willmarth Hypnosis Interviews.

Eric Willmarth1.
1College of Integrative Medicine and Health Sciences, Saybrook University, Oakland, CA,

United States.

For the past 25 years the author has recorded video interviews with some of the leading hypnosis
clinicians and researchers from around the world. These interviews have been collected from
prior meetings of the International Society for Hypnosis, the European Hypnosis Society, The
American Society of Clinical Hypnosis, The Society for Clinical and Experimental Hypnosis and
other related hypnosis meetings. Portions of these videos have turned out to be extremely useful
in teaching Basic and Intermediate Hypnosis classes. This workshop will review how to access
these videos and how to select appropriate video clips to teach both the fundamentals of hypnosis
and also to demonstrate creative applications of hypnosis in the clinical setting. Come see what
your colleagues have said over the years and learn how to use these videos for teaching
hypnosis. From learning why we should study hypnosis, to struggling with how to define
hypnosis, these experts have permitted themselves to be interviewed to enhance the educational
tools available for teaching the art of hypnosis. Come learn how to use these free resources!

Presenter: Wilson, Marie

The re-definition of self process, a hypnosis based protocol for trauma resolution.

Marie Wilson1.
1Private Practice, Private Practice, Edmonton, AB, Canada.

With the widepread recognition of the psychological damage experienced by individuals who
have lived through emotional, physical, or sexual trauma, it is more important than ever for
therapists to have effective tools to use in trauma psychotherapy. Since 1992, Dr. Wilson has
developed and modified a hypnosis based trauma therapy protocol, the Re-Definition of Self
Process, (RDS Process), that has evolved into a very specific, teachable, and effective means by
which to update and resolve this trauma induced psychological damage. Self definitions are
created in a context of emotionally secure or insecure developmental environments and are
expressed as efficacy or a lack thereof in Attachment Theory research observations. With the
use of the protocol, clients clear the emotional content of the past experience while reclaiming
personal resourcefulness. They "earn" Attachment, coming to re-define themselves in the
process, owning self love and worthiness, innocence, resilience and success.

In this workshop, Dr. Wilson will review the theory supporting the develpment and effectiveness
of the protocol, including a presentation of attachment categories from the perspective of
efficacy and description of the more recently identified biological pathway that is required to
update and permanently change the physical structure of fear memory traces. The elements of
activation, retrieval, labilization, updating and re-consolidation in this pathway are identifiable in
her protocol. As well, awareness of these essential elements will allow participants to identify
their presence or absence in any therapeutic approach they use, and modify their use
accordingly. Dr. Wilson will review the RDS Process in detail and show a thiry minute video of
the use of the protocol with a client. In dyads, participants will practice a brief induction similar
to the one used in the protocol, with the focus being identification and ownership of
positive resourcefulness. Handouts, including a transcript of the video, will accompany the
presentation.

References:

1. Wilson, M. A. (1999). Responses as resources in the integration of experience. Hypnos, 26,

151-158.
2. Wilson, M. A. (2005). Comparing the hypnotically based Re-Definition of Self Process to
EMDR. Hypnos, 32, 67-81.
3. Brunet, A., Orr, S. P., Tremblay, J., Robertson, K., Nader, K., & Pitman, R. K. (2008). Effect
of post-retrieval propranolol on psychophysiologic responding during subsequent script-driven
traumatic imagery in post-traumatic stress disorder. The Journal of Psychiatric Research, 43,
503-506. doi:10.1016/j.jpsychires.2007.05.006
4. Brunet, A., Poundja, J., Temblay, J., Bui, E., Thomas, E., Orr, S. P.,…Pitman, R. K. (2011).
Trauma reactivation under the influence of propranolol decreases posttraumatic stress symptoms
and disorder 3 open-label trials. Journal of Clinical Psychopharmacology, 31(4), 547-550.
5. Kindt, M., Soeter, M., & Vervliet, B. (2009). Beyond extinction: erasing human fear responses
and preventing the return of fear. Nature Neuroscience, 12, 256-258. doi:10.1038/nn.2271
6. Sara, S. J. (2000). Retrieval and reconsolidation: Toward a neurobiology of remembering.
Learning & Memory, 7, 73-84. doi:10.1101/lm.7.2.73.

Presenter: Wohlrab, Jutta

No more Hollywood drama: How to effectively use hypnosis to create a happy birthing
mind for both moms and their partners.

Jutta Wohlrab1.
1Private Practice, Happy Birthing Institute, Berlin, Germany.

Pregnancy and giving birth is always the dramatic scene in Hollywood movies that scares many
pregnant mothers and their partners. This workshop will reverse this stereotype by introducing
the positive effect of hypnosis during pregnancy, the birthing process and after giving birth. The
presenter will use her over 30 years of experiences as a professional midwife and as a hypnotist/
therapist for over a decade to provide both theory and practical hands-on approach to bring back
the joy of giving birth.
Participants will first understand the neurobiology of the brain, the roles of different hormones
and impact of hypnosis throughout pregnancy and birthing process

Participants will learn effective hypnosis strategies for the pregnant mother to create a safe inner
space, release unwanted fears, doubts, and worries to have a stress-free pregnancy and birth.

Birthing partner plays an important role during that special time in life and needs to be able to
feel confident and calm to be able to support in the best way.

Participants will learn innovative hypnosis strategies tailored for partners /fathers to be so they
can stay calm and relaxed, effectively release stress, happily support the pregnant mother and
genuinely connect with the baby already during pregnancy, birth and beyond.After the
workshop, you will have a deep understanding of this special time in life, how you can help
women and their partners to create, and use a happy birthing mind.

Birth is the start of life, how we are born and give birth makes a difference to all of us.

"Lose your mind come to your senses" Fritz Pearls

Truly with the help hypnosis: let,s make birth a beautiful, place to visit on memory lane.

Presenter: Wood, Chantal

Hypnosis improves awake neurosurgery outcomes for spinal cord stimulation implantation
by optimizing lead positionning with intra-operative patient cooperation.

Chantal Wood1, Gaelle Martine1, Nicolas Naiditch2, Olivier Monlezun2, Manuel Roulaud2,
Philippe Rigoard2.
1Chronic Pain Center, CHU Dupuytren, Limoges, France; 2Prismatics Laboratory, CHU La

Milétrie, Poitiers, France.

Introduction: Since 1995[1] hypnosis is known to improve surgery outcomes and to decrease
intra-operative use of analgesics and anaesthetics. Patient cooperation is key to optimize the lead
positioning of spinal cord stimulation (SCS) but this remains challenging with a patient lying
under prone position[2].

Material and method: We report 16 cases of SCS procedures performed under awake condition
combining target controlled intra-venous anaesthesia with hypnosis.

Patient mean age was 45.2 years old. SCS indications were refractory failed back surgery
syndrome, neuropathic pain or CRPS. Apart 3 patients, all were assessed and prepared for
hypnosis before the day of the surgery. Patients were asked to interact with the hypnotist
speaking of their favourite interests and journeys. Patient’s hand was held during the procedure,
to allow him to report any discomfort. Interactions were reinforced during painful moments.

Results: All patients reported extreme comfort, minimal pain and even enjoyment during
surgery. They unanimously would strongly recommend this technique to other patients. Intra-
operative hypnosis was also helpful for the neurosurgeon, as the patient was immediately ready
for intra-operative testing, helping to optimize SCS lead positioning.

Conclusion: this technique should be used more often to improve SCS lead implantation
outcomes. It allows great interactions between the surgical team and the patient, who is thus
encouraged and proud of having performed in such a helpful way.

References:

1. Faymonville, M. E., J. Fissette, P. H. Mambourg, et al. 1995 Hypnosis as Adjunct Therapy in

Conscious Sedation for Plastic Surgery. Regional Anesthesia 20(2): 145–151.
2. Rigoard, Philippe, and Cam, Philippe. 2014 Technique d’implantation d’une électrode de
stimulation médullaire chirurgicale. In Chirurgie de la douleur Pp. 105–120. Paris: Springer
Paris.

Presenter: Yapko, Michael

Treating depression with hypnosis: The power of focus and experiential learning in
teaching mood regulation skills.

Michael Yapko1.
1Milton H. Erickson Institute of San Diego, San Diego, CA, United States.

In March, 2017, the World Health Organization (WHO) declared depression the number one
cause of human suffering and disability. A large and still growing problem, depression is
undertreated for many reasons. The hypnosis community has much to offer for enhancing
treatment, but too few hypnosis practitioners know how to address depression as well as they
could. This workshop emphasizes the importance of utilizing proactive and well-targeted
interventions when treating depression. How a clinician thinks about the nature of depression and
answers fundamental questions - such as what causes depression - naturally determine what
treatment approach he or she is most likely to take. Regardless of one’s preferred orientation,
however, depression experts agree that treatment needs to be multi-
dimensional and active. Furthermore, the more we learn about the neuroscience of depression,
especially neuroplasticity and neurogenesis, the more important well designed experiential
learning processes become in treatment. These include the use of task assignments and focusing
processes such as hypnosis.

Topics:
Redefining What We Know in Light of New Neuroscientific Evidence

Biological factors affirming the power of social factors

Advances in the interpersonal model: Depression is contagious
The possibility of prevention requires us to shift our priorities

Designing Hypnosis Treatment Sessions

The importance of building automaticity into treatment

Dynamics of delivering strategic hypnotic interventions

Focus and dissociation as driving forces of change

References:

1. Alladin, A. (2006). Experiential cognitive hypnotherapy: Strategies for relapse prevention

in depression. In M. Yapko (Ed.), Hypnosis and treating depression: Advances in
clinical practice (pp. 281–313). New York: Routledge.
2. Schoenberger, N. (2000). Research on hypnosis as an adjunct to cognitive-behavioral
psychotherapy. International Journal of Clinical and Experimental Hypnosis, 48, 154– 169.
3. Yapko, M. (2010a).Hypnotically catalyzing experiential learning across treatments
for depression: Actions can speak louder than moods. International Journal of Clinical
and Experimental Hypnosis, 58, 2, 186-201.

Presenter: Zanotta, Silvia

The light at the end of the tunnel: Treating depression with hypnosomatic ego state
therapy.

Silvia Zanotta1,2.
1Gesellschaft für Klinische Hypnose, Ghyps, Zurich, Switzerland; 2Milton Erickson Gesellschaft,

MEG, Munich, Germany.

Depression is spreading, across demographic groups and across international borders. Depressed
people become younger and younger and their suffering more severe with every generation. In
therapy, these clients can be very challenging and are often resistant to change. The reason for
this may be unconscious disappointed or traumatised ego-states that block all other states,
banning them from joy of life. From a neurobiologic point of view depressed people are in a
shut-down mode. Therefore, a holistic treatment is important.

This practical workshop focuses on the treatment of depression with hypnosis and ego state
therapy combined with somatic approaches like Somatic Experiencing or Energy Psychology.
Participants will learn how to strengthen the whole personality, how to connect with resource
states and how to form an inner team out of conflicted parts, and thus achieve a healthy and
healing cooperation of the ego state system. They will also learn how to teach their clients self-
regulation in order to shift low energy into more vitality and openness. Clinical presentations and
exercises will illustrate the essential steps in this process.

Presenter: Zhang, Ruidong

The hypnosis and effect Tai Chi which is practiced as Kongfu .

Ruidong Zhang1.
1The department of employee psychoogy contrl, Yunnan Jingji Huzheng Machinery Co., ltd.,

Kunming, People's Republic of China.

The hypnosis and effect of Tai Chi which is practied as Kongfu

1. Tai Chi springs from combat：the legendary of Zhang Sanfeng & the reputation of Yang
Luchang

2. Combat requires the real KongfuThe Behaviours done by body would be real Fongfu

3. The differences between Tai Chi practiced as Kongku and practiced as Gym Controlling the
whole body Vs. Controlling some parts of body (expound with the true cases and the experiences
of the speaker himself)

1. Controlling the entirety of your body and Controlling a certain part of your body

2. Easing your body when you're in Tai Chi: loosening the tense parts of your body meanwhile
experiencing your body with completeness

3. Connecting your consciousness to your body by feeling your body：setup a whole new
nervous system (practicing the real Kongfu) Tai Chi which controls your body via the imago
Explain how to setup the consciousness as well as the whole new nervous system via the imago.

1. Controlling your body with no consciousness as with consciousness at the same time
controlling your body with consciousness as with no consciousness

2. The switch of the reflection of your body The “disappearing” of your Extremities even your
entire body present the experience of the Tai Chi as Kongfu of the speaker and the speaker’s
master. The recordation of “disappearing”, which has not been seen in the reality but could be
conjectured based on experiences of the speaker，also would be mentioned in this part.

Presenter: Zoghlami, Sabri

Chirurgie du cerveau sous hypnose en Tunisie (à propos de 6 cas): Place de l'hypnose
comme technique anesthésique efficace dans des opérations majeures en Tunisie .

Sabri Zoghlami1.
1neurochirurgie, clinique médicale la soukra , la soukra, Tunisia.

Réalité Tunisienne entre la résistance au changement et l'ouverture et l'acceptation.

Mon atelier sera présentée en trois parties:

1ère partie: L’Hypnose en Tunisie

l'hypnose médicale en Tunisie à partir de 2013.

La Réalité Tunisienne dans ce contexte.

2éme partie: Hypnose avant la chirurgie

Préparation du patient pour une chirurgie longue et difficile (en moyenne 5 à 6 h)

Nombre de rencontres avant l'opération et techniques utilisées.

3ème partie: Accompagnement du patient le jour de l'opération.

Préparation depuis la chambre d’admission, 1 h avant son transfert au bloc opératoire

Réalité du bloc opératoire et particularité de la chirurgie éveillée du cerveau.
Place des inductions rapides (on/off) pour supprimer ou instaurer rapidement l'anesthésie sous
hypnose.
Techniques de dissociations pour gérer les pics de la douleur intense au moment de l'ouverture
de la boîte crânienne.
rôle de la communication non verbale entre: l'hypno thérapeute, le médecin anesthésiste
réanimateur et le neurochirurgien pendant l'opération.

L’Accompagnement du patient en réanimation post opératoire et le rôle de l'autohypnose dans le

rétablissement rapide des patients.

Des vidéos et photos illustrant des parties des operations chirurgicales

Mots clés: Hypnose - chirurgie éveillée - cerveau - auto hypnose - inductions rapides -
dissociation

Durée de l'atelier: 60 - 90 mn

References:

1. Professeur Sadok ben Amor (neurochirurgien